Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Public Information
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible
contingency to be met during installation, operation, and maintenance. The information is supplied for informational
purposes only, and GE makes no warranty as to the accuracy of the information included herein. Changes, modifications,
and/or improvements to equipment and specifications are made periodically and these changes may or may not be reflected
herein. It is understood that GE may make changes, modifications, or improvements to the equipment referenced herein or to
the document itself at any time. This document is intended for trained personnel familiar with the GE products referenced
herein.
GE may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this
document does not provide any license whatsoever to any of these patents.
Public Information – This document contains non-sensitive information approved for public disclosure.
GE provides the following document and the information included therein as is and without warranty of any kind,
expressed or implied, including but not limited to any implied statutory warranty of merchantability or fitness for
particular purpose.
For further assistance or technical information, contact the nearest GE Sales or Service Office, or an authorized GE Sales
Representative.
Public Information
Document Updates
Rev Location Description
Shared IONet Group Updates for enhancements to the Shared IONet feature
Mark VIe, Mark VIeS Diagnostics View Updates to provide the procedure to view Advanced Diagnostics
PCNO I/O Module Configuration Updates to include support for Woodward GS40 and GS50 fuel valves
P
Mark VIe FOUNDATION Fieldbus Interface Linking Removed Attention statement that PFFAs are not capable of online
Devices interaction while the controller is not in the Inputs Enabled or Controlling
Download state. This is no longer applicable as the issue has been resolved.
Control Server Set Templates
New sections
Network Switch Layouts
System Reports Updated to include new Component Versions report
System Component Password Change Updated Attention text for clarification
Updated the following procedures and sections for clarification and
consistency:
• To set up a UCSB / UCSC controller
Mark VIe, Mark VIeS — Working Online
• To set up a UCCA / UCCC / UCSA controller
• To set up a UCCC controller
• Controller Password Change (Attention text only)
N
Updated the Data Grid Variable Properties table as follows:
• Indicated property only applies to libraries: Visibility, Description
• Indicated property only applies to libraries: Inherit Description of
Mark VIe, Mark VIeS Component Editor Program Connected Variable, Usage
Variables • Moved property to Format category: Override Entry Limits, Allow Entry
Limits Override
• Added properties: Keep During Instance, Override Properties, Override
Value, Primary Language, Secondary Language, Is Critical
Mark VIeS Component Menus Added new View menu option PFD Calc to the table
Mark VIeS Safety Controller Operations Updated to describe Branding feature and Locked and Unlocked mode
Indicates a procedure or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage
to or destruction of equipment.
Caution
Attention
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric shock, burn, or death. Only
personnel who are adequately trained and thoroughly familiar with the equipment
and the instructions should install, operate, or maintain this equipment.
Warning
Isolation of test equipment from the equipment under test presents potential electrical
hazards. If the test equipment cannot be grounded to the equipment under test, the
test equipment’s case must be shielded to prevent contact by personnel.
Always ensure that applicable standards and regulations are followed and only
properly certified equipment is used as a critical component of a safety system. Never
assume that the Human-machine Interface (HMI) or the operator will close a safety
critical control loop.
Warning
The information in this document applies to the overall Mark* VIe control system or
Mark VIeS Functional Safety System control products; however, your application may
not be licensed to access full system capability and I/O packs as described in this
document. For example, the Mark VIeS Functional Safety System for General
Markets only utilizes the following I/O packs:
Note For the requirements for ToolboxST to run on the HMI, refer to ControlST Software Suite Upgrade Guide (GEI–
100694) the section, HMI Compatibility.
• Windows 7 64-bit
Microsoft has resolved the issue with a Hotfix (KB2588507) for both operating
systems. GE is not able obtain redistribution rights for this Microsoft Hotfix. Users
with large memory ToolboxST system configurations (such as FOUNDATION Fieldbus)
using Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 should download and install the
Microsoft Hot Fix.
Note The ControlST Software Suite no longer supports Windows 2000 and Windows XP, and does not support using
CIMPLICITY V8.2 and V9.0 with Windows Server 2012 R2.
ToolboxST users with Dell© Precision 5510 mobile workstations with GE Core Load
with a 4K display (Hi DPI) resolution running on Windows 10 64-bit OS will
experience several display issues. To resolve this, upgrade Windows 10 using the
following URL: https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/software-download/windows10. Click
Update Now to download the Windows10Upgrade9252.exe file. (This upgrade will
take approximately 6 hours, followed by 3 or 4 reboots.) After the upgrade, right-click
Attention the ToolboxST icon from the desktop, and select Properties, click the Compatibility
tab, select (check) Override high DPI scaling behavior, then select System
Enhanced. This applies to all supported versions of ControlST running on Windows
10.
Note Contact the nearest GE Sales or Service office, or an authorized GE sales representative for assistance.
• Go To Variable
• Go To Hardware Diagnostic
• Go To Locator
• -NoSplash
• Archive a ToolboxST System
Note If the ToolboxST application is already opened, starting it again with the /variable option sends a message to the
already running ToolboxST application to cause it to navigate to the appropriate location.
Note Using /EGDAction:ADD requires no /EGDDevice identifier. The application started determines the ProducerID(s) and
device names(s) to be used.
Go To Hardware Diagnostic
/HardwareDiagnostic:<devName> [.HardwareGroup] - navigates to either the Device Diagnostics window or the Hardware
Module Group.
If the first command line argument is a valid path to a .tcw system file, that system file is used for the variable search.
Otherwise, the first file in the most recently started ToolboxST system is opened.
Example 2
/HardwareDiagnostic:Marky
This causes the last opened system to be opened, the Mark controller to be opened, and the Device Diagnostic window to
display (View/Diagnostics/Controller Diagnostics item).
/HardwareDiagnostic:Marky.23GROUP
This causes the last opened system to be opened, the Mark controller to be opened, and the Hardware tab 23GROUP
hardware group to be selected.
Go To Locator
This argument opens any locator string displayed in the Find Results tab.
/NavigateToLocator:<locator string shown in Find results>
If the first command line argument is a valid path to a .tcw system file, that system file is used for the variable search.
Otherwise, the first file in the most recently started ToolboxST system is opened.
To open a ToolboxST component and navigate to a desired point, use the Finder to search for a string in a component. Then,
from the Find Results tab, select one of the locator text strings.
-NoSplash
If the text -NoSplash is contained in an argument, the splash screen does not display when the ToolboxST application starts.
Example 3
ToolboxST /Archive
The most recent system is opened. An archive.zip file, with the opened system name and date/time, is created. The archive is
placed in the parent folder for the ToolboxST system. If the parent folder cannot be opened, the archive is placed in the
ToolboxST system working folder.
ToolboxST c:\MySystem.tcw /archive
The system c:\MySystem.tcw is opened. An archive.zip file, with the opened system name and date/time, is created. The
archive is placed in the parent folder for the ToolboxST system. If the parent folder cannot be opened, the archive is placed in
the ToolboxST system working folder.
ToolboxST c:\MySystem.tcw
/archive:c:\MyArchiveFolder\MySystemArchive.zip
The system c:\MySystem.tcw is opened. An archive.zip file, with the specified archive name, is created.
ToolboxST c:\MySystem.tcw /archive:c:\MyArchiveFolder
The system c:\MySystem.tcw is opened. An archive.zip file, with the opened system name and date/time, is created. The
archive is placed in the specified folder.
Attention
Always install new versions of the ToolboxST application before removing older
versions to preserve your personal settings.
Attention
Do not install ControlST component releases (individual .msi files) without first
installing a full ControlST release. Then, component releases can be installed. You
must install the ControlST Software Suite to properly install the ToolboxST
component.
Attention
1. Place the ControlST Software Suite DVD in the DVD-ROM drive.
2. The ControlST Software Suite Setup Notes dialog box displays. Click Continue.
Note If the installation does not begin automatically, navigate to the DVD-ROM drive and run the installation file setup.
exe.
3. The Setup - ControlST Software Suite dialog box displays the installation options. Select the applicable installation
options and click Install.
CMS-SVN Server and GE HART® Message Server options are typically only installed
on one computer per site. If either of these options is selected, a message displays
asking you to confirm that you want to install the option.
Attention
Note The Configuration Tools Package option installs the ToolboxST application on your machine.
7. From the Custom Setup window, select the features to install or not install. All components are installed by default.
8. Click Next.
9. Click Install.
10. After installation is complete, click Finish.
11. If any other options were selected (such as WorkstationST), a Setup dialog box displays asking if you want to install the
next selected option. Click Yes and repeat the installation procedure for each selected option.
12. When all selected installation options are complete, click Yes to exit setup.
Note Icons for installed applications are automatically placed on your desktop.
Note You can install multiple versions of the ToolboxST application. If a new version is included, the desktop icons and
Start menu update to reflect the most recently installed version.
Note The Alarm Viewer is installed with the WorkstationST application. It can also be installed separately on a remote
computer.
Note If you installed the Configuration Tools Documentation option, the ControlST Documentation application can be
opened from the Start menu.
➢ To uninstall or modify the ToolboxST application: from the Start menu, select Settings, Control Panel, and
Add/Remove Programs, right-click the ToolboxST application version and click Uninstall.
➢ To display ControlST versions: from the Start menu, select All Programs, GE ControlST, and Versions to
display a complete list.
The ControlST Versions dialog box contains the following tabs:
• Tree View displays all installed products, their versions, the setup used for installation, and the installation date.
• Form View displays complete information for all installed products in a table format that can be copied and pasted into a
spreadsheet.
• DVD Tree View displays a list of products installed from the DVD.
ControlST Versions
Note The ControlST Documentation application can be installed with the ControlST Software Suite. Refer to the section
Installation for further details.
2. From the Search field, enter a document number or a keyword or phrase for which to search and press Enter.
The Search Enhancement dialog box displays a notification that the search capability can be improved by enabling full text
search. Click Yes or No to continue.
From the Search Enhancement dialog box, click Yes to display the
document How to Enable the Adobe PDF Full Text Search for ControlST
Documentation (GHT-200030). Perform the procedures in that document
to enable full text search.
To view this document at any time, click ControlST Documentation Global Search.
Note: To prevent the Search Enhancementdialog box from displaying every time you
perform a search , check the option Do not show again .
• Internal GE search:
− Link to document(s) containing the document number, keyword, or phrase entered in the Search field
− Link to Mark Controller Solutions Support Site
− Link to GE Power Technical Downloads
• External GE search:
− Link to document(s) containing the document number, keyword, or phrase entered in the Search field
− Link to GE Power Technical Downloads
3. Click the document link to view the document.
4. Click the website link to open the website and search for additional documentation or information.
• Hardware key for Legacy ControlST versions prior to V03.06.09, and from V03.06.09 to V04.07.xx (green or blue USB
Protection Device (UPD) known as a dongle)
• Hardware key for ControlST V05.00 and higher (white M4)
• Software activation key, Project Advantage license, that is typically assigned to a computer, but can also be assigned to a
USB key
Hardware and software license keys can be viewed using the License Viewer/Manager. The Legacy ControlST license key
cannot be viewed.
If a user logs in and tries to open the ToolboxST, Trender, and Alarm Viewer application and the number of allowed sessions
is exceeded, the following error message is displayed. Additional sessions can be added by purchasing additional Terminal
Server Connection licenses.
Before you insert the key, install the ToolboxST and/or WorkstationST application. If
you insert the hardware key before installing these applications, the key may appear
to be installed but it is not associated with the correct drivers. This will correct itself
after the application is installed.
Attention
Note The most current licensing installation is available at the following location: http://support.ge-ip.com/licensing.
➢ To install the hardware key: insert the hardware key into an empty USB port on your computer.
Note Only one hardware key of the same type (Keylok, M4) can be installed at a time.
➢ To install and activate the Project Advantage license: enter your activation code (provided by email) in the
Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) Activate License window.
PLM connects to the License Server and performs various checks run by the License Server (valid activation code, license
already assigned, and so forth).
➢ To open the License Client (Manager/Viewer): from the Start menu, select All Programs, Proficy Common,
and License Client (Manager/Viewer).
License Client/Viewer/Manager
Enter a name for the new system. Some characters are prohibited ; if you enter a valid
character, a small red exclamation mark displays .
Specify the working directory to contain the ToolboxST system. Either enter a Location
path or click Browse to navigate to a file location.
Note: If you enter a path that does not exist, the ToolboxST application creates it for you.
Note Refer to the section System Configuration Files for more information.
• Tree View
• Property Editor
• Summary View
• Component InfoView
Property Editor
allows you to
configure all
system
properties when
the system is
selected in the
Tree View.
Component
properties are
configured in the
specific
Component
Editor
Component InfoView
displays specific system
feedback information
ToolboxST System with Configured Components
➢ To view Alarm Help: from the Alarm Viewer, right-click an alarm and select Alarm Help to display the Operator
Guidance window. For more information, refer to the WorkstationST Alarm Viewer Instruction Guide (GEI-100620).
Note Alarm help files are published when the device containing the alarm changes is saved. The Log tab in ToolboxST
indicates when publishing is complete.
Password protection can also be set for individual components to restrict certain functions and property modifications. For
further details, refer to the section Password Protection for your component.
To change the password, refer to the section System Component Password Change.
➢ To edit system components: from either the Tree View or Summary View, double-click the system component to
open the Component Editor.
Note You can add components to the root component of a system or group. Some components display a wizard or window
that prompts you for additional information when you add them to the system.
System
Group of Components
WorkstationST application
Printer
Library Container
Network
Trender
Watch Window
LiveView
CMS Administrator
ControlST Documentation
Mark V component
Note Drag-and-drop editing is only available if the System Editor is in View by Group mode, as the components are
automatically organized when View by Type mode is selected.
• indicates that the item being dragged cannot be dropped at the location currently beneath the cursor.
• indicates that the item being dragged will be moved to the location beneath the cursor.
• indicates that the item being dragged will be copied and the copy will be placed at the location beneath the cursor.
Most components can be moved and copied in the Tree View, with two exceptions:
• When a group is copied, a new Group is created. The contents of the previous Group remain in place and are not copied
to the new Group.
• The drag-and-drop feature is not supported for networks.
Tip � You can import components and Library Containers from either another Copy of the ToolboxST application or from
the Windows file system using the drag-and-drop feature. (To import from the file system, drag the Device.xml or Library.xml
file that represents the component.)
➢ To display system properties: from the Tree View, select a system item to display the system properties in the
Property Editor.
System Properties
Note This property only applies to Mark VIe and Mark VIeS secure systems.
Beginning with ControlST V06.00, the CA Server Thumb Print property is required to be provided at the system level for all
systems that use Security servers. Enter the Thumb Print from the CA Server that signed the download certificate in the
System Properties.
Bob
Bob
Bob
Note Refer to the chapter, WorkstationST — Working Online, the section, WorkstationST Status Monitor, WorkstationST
Alarm Viewer Instruction Guide (GEI-100620), and Trender for the ToolboxST Application Instruction Guide (GEI-100795).
Predefined theme files are provided in the installation directory (Program Files\GEEnergy\ThemeFiles).
The ToolboxST application supports theme files for all operator-facing tools. These include:
• Trender
• WorkstationST Alarm Viewer
• WorkstationST Status Monitor
Examples of the operator-facing tools enabled with the selected theme GE GrayScale are provided in the following table. To
use a standard Windows display style, leave the Theme File property empty.
Trender
WorkstationST
Alarm Viewer
WorkstationST
Status Monitor
This feature is not available for Mark VIeS Safety Control systems.
Attention
The ToolboxST system provides a Batch command to allow you to select multiple controllers and perform the Instance All or
Build commands.
Right-click the
system item and
select Insert New,
Tool , and Batch
Commands
From the
Component
drop-down list,
select the
component and
click to enable.
From the On
Error drop-down
list, select the
action to take
(Stop, Continue
(skip to), or Next
Component))
when the first
error occurs.
Status Icons
Icon Status Indicates
Component Diagnostics – No
NTP Diagnostics – No
EGD Diagnostics – No
I/O Diagnostics – No
Healthy
Number of Forced Variables – 0
DDR Equality – Equal
Configuration Equality - Equal
Network Status Monitor - Healthy
NTP Diagnostics – No
EGD Diagnostics – No
I/O Diagnostics – No
Unhealthy Number of Forced Variables – 0
DDR Equality – Equal
Configuration Equality – Major difference
Network Status Monitor - UDH has errors
Logic forcing procedures can result in personal injury or death, if not strictly
followed. Only adequately trained personnel should modify any programmable
machine. Forcing of control logic for an operating process is strongly discouraged.
Forcing of protective functions is never permissible for an operating unit. All safety
Warning measures should be strictly enforced in conjunction with this procedure.
Note It is possible to scan and perform configuration downloads to multiple controllers simultaneously.
3. A progress dialog box indicates when each selected controller has been build. Verify that there are no validation errors.
After a Build has been performed on all components, the scan takes place. The scan allows the ToolboxST application to
obtain each component’s version status of the base load, the firmware, and the application code and parameters.
The application displays a message if any components selected for download have any conditions (for example, issues with
firmware or application code) that could cause them to be in an inappropriate download state.
4. When the scan is complete and you are prompted to generate a scan report, click Yes. The scan report displays any
controllers that are Not Equal.
➢ To start the scan download: from the wizard window, click Next.
Download Completed
To maintain a strong security posture GE recommends the user must change the
factory default controller password for a device. The maximum number of characters
for the new password is limited to 8 characters. The new password cannot be the
factory default password. The factory default password is ge.
Attention
Note For a component configured with redundant controllers, the password applies to all controllers in that component.
Note This password is required to configure the network address during controller setup.
2. A message displays asking you to confirm that you fully understand the effects of the changes to the control constants
values in the controller(s) to the controller(s). Click OK to proceed.
3. Click Browse… and select the .csv file to import. Use the following .csv file format:
4. Click one of the import options:
• Import to Device Values modifies the values in the device only, which results in a faster load.
5. A message indicates when the import is finished in the lower left corner of the window and a report log is available to
view. Click View Log to view a report of the import details.
2. Select the device(s) to export the associated control constants and parameters.
3. Click Browse... to select the location for the export file.
4. Click Begin Export to export the control constants and parameters of the selected device(s).
5. When the export is complete, click View Log to review the results.
Note The Entry High Limit and Entry Low Limit values are imported and exported with the live values for control constants
and parameters.
Note If all configured components have been upgraded to the latest installed version, the System Upgrade Wizard window
displays the message No components require upgrade.
All component editors must be closed to perform an upgrade from the system.
It is recommended that users back up the ToolboxST .tcw file prior to upgrading the
system.
Attention
1. Check for available upgrades.
Note The latest version for components is displayed by default and the I/O module versions default to the latest compatible
hardware.
2. Select the components for upgrade. By default, components are listed by Component Name but you have the option to
list by component hardware type as well.
The New Version column displays the version to which the component will be upgraded.
Select Upgrade for the appropriate component(s), then click Next to proceed.
Upgrading the component to the new incompatible version will require replacing
existing I/O modules with supported hardware.
Attention
Place your cursor on the Caution icon to display a Tool Tip indicating that the selected
upgrade version does not support the existing I/O module hardware and if you proceed
with the upgrade you will have to replace the existing hardware.
Note Selecting No does not cancel the upgrade. You must unselect the incompatible component(s) if you want to
proceed with the upgrade for other compatible components.
Tip � Place your cursor on the component name to display a Tool Tip listing all controllers that contain the I/O module
selected for upgrade.
If Hardware Type was selected and any I/O modules cannot be upgraded due incompatible hardware, the Hardware
Mismatch dialog box displays notifying the user that the incompatible I/O module hardware cannot be listed by Hardware
Type.
➢ To instance components
From the
System menu,
select Instance
Components to
display the
Select Devices
dialog box
Select
individual
components
or click
Select All
and OK
Information
and progress
for both the
Instance and
Build
commands
display
• Simple Replicate — the name and IP addresses for the duplicate components are automatically assigned in linear order
from a base value
• Replicate using Properties from CSV — the name, IP addresses, and group for the duplicate components are read from a
Comma Separated Value (.csv) file. Since the name and IP address of each component can be specified, this command is
more flexible than the Simple Replicate.
Note The Replication Wizard cannot replicate a component with validation errors. If a validation error message displays
when Simple Replicate is selected, perform the Build command.
Note Any component name or IP address conflicts display in red in the Status column.
Note If the component cannot be replicated, the replicate commands are unavailable.
1. From the Tree View, right-click a component and select Export Component Properties from CSV.
2. Select a name for the .csv file.
3. Using Notepad or Microsoft Excel®, edit the .csv file.
Each line represents one component to create during replication, and each column defines a component property:
Note All existing Trenders and Watch Windows in system components are replicated, as well.
This feature is not available for Mark VIeS Safety Control systems.
Attention
The Create System Wizard allows you to create a new system from selected components of an EGD configuration server or
SDB server. If a selected component supports uploading the configuration, an attempt is made to perform the upload. If
Upload is not supported or the upload fails, a component of the correct type is created in the system based on the information
in the EGD configuration server.
Note The new system will not be an exact copy of the original. Not all information required to create a system is available
from the EGD configuration server or SDB, including libraries. The new system will have the default NTP settings; however,
this may not reflect what is configured in the original system.
Note If the system is already open, it will be closed before the wizard starts.
Select the
check boxes
for the desired
components
and click OK.
• GenericEgd
• Mark VI Control
• Mark VIe Control
• Mark VIeS Safety Control
• External device
• WorkstationST application
This feature is not available for Mark VIeS Safety Control systems.
Attention
Alarm Shelving allows the operator to temporarily suppress Alarms from the Alarm Viewer live Alarm data display, and from
HMI screens that display Alarms. The Out-of-Service feature allows the operator to place an Alarm in the out-of-service state
or to return the Alarm back to in-service. The Alarm Shelving property is enabled in the System Editor. Alarm Shelving and
the Out-of-service feature apply to Process Alarms only.
For further information, refer to the WorkstationST Alarm Viewer Instruction Guide (GEI-100620).
This feature is not available for Mark VIeS Safety Control systems.
Attention
In conjunction with the Alarm \Shelving feature and the ANALOG_ALARM and BOOLEAN_ALARM blocks,
Condition-based Unshelving allows you to create the Unshelve sub-variable.
Select the
analog variable.
Shelved variable
attached as input pin
The Unshelve sub-variable
also displays in the Block
Diagram Editor.
Sub-variables Properties
display
This feature is not available for Mark VIeS Safety Control systems.
Attention
It is possible to copy all parameters and connections for I/O packs in a controller to other controllers at the system level.
When the
welcome page
displays, click
Next.
Note Ports configured with the connection type Default_Native Device Connection or not used can have a network
component connection.
➢ To add a network component connection to a port: from either the Data Grid or the Property Editor, click the
ellipsis button next to the Network Component property.
Select a
component
and click OK
➢ To save changes to the current system: from the File menu, select Save System.
This feature is not available for Mark VIeS Safety Control systems.
Attention
When changes to the system or an individual component are saved, a Change Log is created in the component folder that
users can access to review the changes.
This feature is not available for Mark VIeS Safety Control systems.
Attention
The optional Control Data Highway (CDH) is a second Unit Data Highway (UDH) that allows two separate controllers to
communicate with each other. There are two ways to configure a CDH. In a standard network configuration, the CDH is
configured in the same manner as a UDH. Each controller core in the two controller sets is connected directly to a network
switch. EGD exchanges are transmitted by whichever controller is designated as the CDH communicator.
In a direct connect network configuration, the CDH is configured with a single wire connection between the two R, S, and T
controller cores. This method is only possible if the following criteria is met:
To avoid voter mismatches, the ToolboxST application issues a Build warning for dual
or TMR redundancies when it detects EGD exchanges on the CDH being transmitted
at a rate other than frame rate unless it determines that network switches have been
configured for the CDH.
Warning
For Transport,
select IP
Enter a page
name and
click OK
The EGD Page cannot be configured to transmit on more than one Ethernet network
(UDH and CDH) on this component. Only one Ethernet platform should be enabled
(True). If both are enabled, ToolboxST displays an error message.
Attention
➢ To add variables
• System folder is the top-level folder that contains all other folders and files. The folder name is the same name as the
system. The files located within the system folder include:
− SystemX.tcw contains top-level information for each component.
− FormatSpecifications.xml contains format specifications that define units and scaling information for data display.
− SystemDiagram.xml contains information about the system block diagram, including both the basic diagram structure
and additional drawing shapes.
• Component folders contain configuration files for each component in the system. The exact structure of each folder
varies with the component type, but all folders have a Device.xml file that contains basic component information.
• Tools folder contains definitions for all tool components in a system. A folder for each type of tool is located within the
Tools folder, and within the folders for each tool type are additional folders for each instance of the tool.
• Library Container folders exist for each Library Container in the system. The files and folders located within the
these folders include:
− Library.xml contains attributes of the Library Container and a listing of all libraries.
− _Mylibname.xml is a file created for each library in the Container (where Mylibname is the name of the library).
− Block Diagrams is a folder containing the diagrams for the user blocks defined in each library.
The .xml files used by the ToolboxST application should NEVER be modified by ANY
other application.
Caution
Configuration files can be both compressed and encrypted. Some portions of .xml configuration files may be also stored in
encrypted format to prevent unauthorized users from viewing the design of password-protected system components.
Some controller components offer a Build command that produces files to be downloaded directly to the controller. These
files, which are stored in the Output folder of a component, are in a binary format, and are not human-readable.
Note The ToolboxST application cannot open a configuration file saved in a newer ToolboxST version.
Multiple ToolboxST versions can be used on a system (for example, during an upgrade), and upgrading the configuration files
is undesirable. To help prevent accidental upgrades to configuration files, you are warned if saving the file will prevent older
ToolboxST versions from opening the file.
When you are saving a system that causes a version upgrade, you are asked if you wish to continue (a backup of the original
system is created, as well).
Note This feature is enabled from the System Property Editor. For further details, refer to the section System Properties.
When opening a system in a newer ToolboxST version, the following prompt may display. Click Yes for the .tcw file to be
written in a format compatible with the ToolboxST version that last saved the system. Individual components will continue to
be saved in the newer version.
• Systems saved by ToolboxST versions prior to V04.04.11C cannot enable the Maintain Backward Compatibility property
• Certain features added to the system may require the newer file format. If you attempt to use one of these features, a
message displays to ask if you wish to proceed.
Click Cancel to cancel the change. Click OK to save the change and upgrade the system to the current ToolboxST version.
Note Refer to WorkstationST Alarm Viewer Instruction Guide (GEI-100620) for more information about viewing language
options.
➢ To view system options: from the Options menu, select Settings to display the Settings window.
• History Log
• Component Log
• Build Log
• Change Log
100 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Menu Command Used
By Type Automatically organize the Tree View by component type
By Group Organize the Tree View by components
Track Synchronize Tree View selections with Summary View selections
Memory Usage Display the currently allocated memory
Access the following EGD diagnostic tools:
View Online Statistics displays EGD exchange status from the selected component.
Only EGD Class 2 or higher components that respond to EGD Command Message
Protocol (CMP) have this diagnostic window.
WorkstationST Capture Live UDP Packets provides an EGD window only enabled in
EGD Diagnostics
a WorkstationST component with an OPC DA server configured. This allows the
WorkstationST runtime to capture up to 10,000 EGD UDP messages, then upload
them for display, printing, and exporting to .csv format.
EGD Network Load Calculation provides network load calculation to determine
memory usage.
Perform one of the following:
View EGD configuration
View Differences opens a configuration view window.
server
Work Offline allows you to work offline.
Network Status
Display defined networks in the system
Viewer
Generate the following reports:
Force Lists displays all forced system variables.
I/O displays all I/O variables
Alarm displays Alarms from all configured components
Reports Hold displays Holds from all configured components
Event displays Events from all configured components
Find Unlinked Blocks displays unlinked blocks from all configured components
Firmware Versions allows you to select devices and display a report of the installed
firmware versions for each
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Display the device definition window (Refer to the chapter Mark VIe Control FOUNDATION
DD Manager Fieldbus Interface.)
Online Work online
Download Select components to scan for downloading
Control Constants
Import or export system-level control constants and parameters
and Parameters
Upgrade Components Upgrade any or all configured components at the system level
Instance Components Instance any or all configured components at the system level
System Restore Password Restore any password protection that was unlocked for the component or clear the Undo
Protection history
Allows the user to configure the Wind Turbine Control for Wind Farm Management for
multiple devices at one time.
Set Wind Turbine
This menu item is only visible if the V300 Advanced Options system setting for the Mark
Control Configuration
VIe controller is enabled. From the Options menu, select Settings, Mark VIe Controller,
and set V300 Advanced Options to True.
Options Settings Configure system settings
Cascade Arrange open Component Editors in a layered style
Window Tile Arrange open Component Editors in a grid style
Close All Close all open Component Editors
CMS Refer to the section CMS Menu Items.
102 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.9 System Information Editor
The System Information Editor enables the user to modify and configure system information including alarm system settings,
format specifications, users and roles, and other items that apply to all system components.
Note If access to a System Database (SDB) is enabled, the contents of the System Information Editor can be stored to the
SDB.
➢ To open the System Information Editor: from the System Editor Edit menu, select System Information to
display the System Information Editor Tree View.
This feature is not available for Mark VIeS Safety Control systems.
Attention
Alarm Block Templates are used in conjunction with the ANALOG_ALARM block in certain controller configurations. The
ANALOG_ALARM block provides Analog Alarm documentation defined in application code; it also allows automatic
configuration of the Alias properties of each Alarm associated with the Analog Alarm.
Note For further details on these blocks, refer to the Mark VIe Controller Standard Block Library Instruction Guide
(GEI-100682).
104 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To add an Alarm Block Template
1. From the System Information Editor Tree View, right-click Alarm Block Templates.
2. From the shortcut menu, select Add Alarm Block Template.
Enter a name
for the template
and click OK
➢ To edit Alarm Classes: from the System Information Editor Tree View, select Classes.
A Data Grid with the existing Alarm Classes displays in the Summary View.
Note When colors are selected, unnamed colors may display in the Data Grid as RGB codes.
106 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Alarm Class Properties
Property Description
Ack Background Color Displays the background color for an alarm in the Acknowledged state
Ack Foreground Color Displays the foreground color for an alarm in the Acknowledged state
Ack Inner Border Color Displays the inner border color for an alarm in the Acknowledged state
Ack Outer Border Color Displays the outer border color for an alarm in the Acknowledged state
Alarm Background Color Displays the background color for an alarm in the Alarm state
Alarm Foreground Color Displays the foreground color for an alarm in the Alarm state
Alarm Inner Border Color Displays the inner border color for an alarm in the Alarm state
Alarm Outer Border Color Displays the outer border color for an alarm in the Alarm state
Blink Background Color Displays the background color for the blink state of an active unacknowledged alarm
Blink Enabled If set to True, enables blinking ability
Blink Foreground Color Displays the foreground color for the blink state of an active unacknowledged alarm
Blink Inner Border Color Displays the inner border color for the blink state of an active unacknowledged alarm
Blink Outer Border Color Displays the outer border color for the blink state of an active unacknowledged alarm
Normal Background Color Displays the background color for an alarm in the Normal state
Normal Foreground Color Displays the foreground color for an alarm in the Normal state
Normal Inner Border Color Displays the inner border color for an alarm in the Normal state
Normal Outer Border Color Displays the outer border color for an alarm in the Normal state
Specifies which image to use when an alarm is in the Acknowledged state.
Acknowledge Image An Alarm Symbol must be assigned to the Alarm Class and the Symbol selection must be Custom
before the image can be imported.
Specifies which image to use when an alarm is in the Active state.
Active Image An Alarm Symbol must be assigned to the Alarm Class and the Symbol selection must be Custom
before the image can be imported.
Specifies the alternate image to use when Blink is True and the alarm is in the Active state.
Blink Image An Alarm Symbol must be assigned to the Alarm Class and the Symbol selection must be Custom
before the image can be imported.
Specifies the image to use when an alarm is in the Normal state.
Normal Image An Alarm Symbol must be assigned to the Alarm Class and the Symbol selection must be Custom
before the image can be imported.
Description Displays the description in the primary language (English)
Display Priority In Symbol If set to True, displays the Priority in the alarm symbol in the WorkstationST Alarm Viewer
Displays the name of the Alarm Class
Name
Limited to five characters if using an SDB.
Priority Alarm Class priority (1 to 99, where 1 is the highest priority)
Sound Reference Sound definition to select when an active Alarm displays in the Alarm Viewer
Symbol displayed for a particular Alarm Class (Read-only)
Symbol
An Alarm symbol can be associated with an Alarm Class.
108 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To edit Alarm Definitions: from the Tree View, expand Definitions and select the Alarm definition.
Note $Desc (and $2ndDesc) may be used for the Alarm Description and Second Language Description for the Analog
Alarm when the Alarm Parameter is created in the component.
110 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
A signal driven in the application code
enables the Alarm Inhibit group and
inhibits the alarm in the Alarm Viewer.
➢ To edit sounds
1. From the Tree View, select Sounds to edit the configured sounds in the Summary View.
2. In the Data Grid, enter a Sound Name (such as chimes for this example).
3. From the Sound Type column, select a sound type from the drop-down list (such as Wave File for this example).
4. From the Wave File column, click the Ellipsis (...) button, then navigate to select the file type.
Sound Properties
Property Description
Time lapse between sounds (from 100 to 10,000 ms). The Repeat Quantity property must be 1 or
Delay
more.
Duration Sound’s duration (from 100 to 10,000 ms)
Frequency Sound’s frequency (range is 100 to 500 Hz)
Name Sound’s name
Repeat Quantity Number of times the sound is repeated
Sound Type Type of sound annunciated; options are Tone, Wave File, and Text to Speech
If selected as the Sound Type, displays the name of the Wave File. When the system information is
Wave File
saved, the wave files are published to the Master WorkstationST computer
➢ To edit alarm state definitions: from the System Information Editor Tree View, expand Alarm System and select
State Definitions to display the parameters in the Data Grid.
112 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.9.1.7 Alarm Symbols
Alarm symbols can be associated with an Alarm Class and feature. The associated symbol uses the same alarm color and
Priority configuration and displays in the Alarm Viewer and on CIMPLICITY screens. Only one symbol can be associated
with an Alarm Class; however, the same symbol can be used by multiple Alarm Classes.
3. From the Alarm Classes column, click the Ellipsis (...) button and select an alarm class for the symbol.
114 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.9.2 Control Server Set Templates
The Control Server Set Templates item is used to create custom templates for use in configuring a High Availability (HA) or
Simplex Control Server set. Default HA and Simplex templates are selected when a Control Server component is initially
created in the system to provide a starting point for a typical Control Server configuration, then custom templates may be
created using the System Information Editor Control Server Set Templates item.
Note For further details, refer to the WorkstationST Control System Health Instruction Guide (GEI-100834).
116 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.9.3 Diagnostic Translations and Rationalization
The Diagnostic Translations and Rationalization feature provides two options:
• Allows second language display of the product diagnostic messages from controllers, I/O modules, and WorkstationST
devices
A second language must be selected from the Component Property Editor before using
this feature or it will not function properly.
Attention
• Allows configuration of diagnostic alarm information to support alarm help features in the WorkstationST Alarm Viewer
Note Additional alarm rationalization properties can be edited for each diagnostic message. (In the Tree View, the
WorkstationMessages node provides descriptions that may be translated but are not associated with diagnostic
messages. These descriptions do not allow for configuration of the alarm rationalization properties).
118 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To view diagnostic alarm message help (corresponds to the Message Id property) in Alarm Viewer:
right-click the alarm message (Message ID 547 for this example) and select Alarm Help.
The Alarm Viewer Help dialog box displays the alarm help for that diagnostic alarm. When the user preferences are set to use
a second language, the second language property values are displayed in the alarm help in the translated second language.
Note The Export Product Diagnostics option creates an All_Product_Diagnostic Translations.csv file that contains
diagnostics for all I/O packs installed on this computer. It may be opened using Notepad or an .xml spreadsheet.
4. From the Tree View, right-click Diagnostic Translations and Rationalization and select Import Diagnostics.
5. Select the All_Product_Diagnostic Translations.csv file.
6. Expand the Diagnostic Translations and Rationalization item to display each individual system component,
including diagnostics grouped as Common. Diagnostics text can be translated in either the .csv file or the System
Information Editor.
7. Select a component to display the message text containing the Second Language column with empty text.
8. It is the user’s decision as to whether they will send the complete list or individual products to a translation company. To
create an individual .csv file for a particular component, right-click a component and select Export these
Diagnostics.
Note Selecting the Diagnostic Translations item exports all I/O pack items within to a single .csv file. However, if an
individual I/O pack is selected, the diagnostics for that I/O pack only are exported.
120 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9. Open the .csv file to read the instructions for translation.
If you select that product name, the message text displays with the second language column containing the translated text.
5. Open the Component Editor for each device in the system with translated diagnostics and click Save. This adds the
second language descriptions to the controllers/devices in a running system.
Note Any errors or warnings that occur during validation display in the Component InfoView. Double-click an error or
warning to be connected to that diagnostic.
The Validation command applies to all translations entered into a system. Even if you have Common selected when you start
to validate, all translations are validated. Warnings and errors do not prevent controllers from running the Build and
Download commands, but rather ensure that all Second Language diagnostic text displays correctly at runtime.
Note The text displays in English if there is no Second Language translation for a particular diagnostic.
Note This command only deletes the selected translation records. If a diagnostic occurs and its translation record was
deleted, it still displays in English.
Note If the configuration in the ToolboxST application is equal to the configuration running on the controller, the new
information is published to the EGD configuration server. The next time the diagnostic occurs, the translated text displays. If
the configuration and the running controller are not equal, the controller must be downloaded for the changes to take effect.
122 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.9.3.3 Display Second Language Diagnostics
Displaying Second Language diagnostics can be selected from two different locations.
From the
WorkstationST
component
General tab,
select General
Or
Note When you select Use Second Language from Regional Settings, that becomes your permanent default setting,
regardless of what is configured in the ToolboxST application.
Using this formula, a conversion from Celsius to Fahrenheit would be calculated by the HMI as follows:
Within a Format Specification Set, all Engineering Min values must represent the same physical value and all Engineering
Max values must represent the same physical value.
Note In the previous example, the minimum value for Fahrenheit (32) and the minimum value for Celsius (0) represent the
same temperature, the freezing point of water.
124 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To create a Format Specification Set
1. From the System Editor Edit menu, select System Information.
2. From the Tree View, right-click Format Specification Sets and select Add Format Specification Set.
3. Enter a name for the new set and click OK.
2. From the Name column, enter a Name for the new Format Specification, or right-click a Format Specification Set and
select Add Format Specification Set.
Note When a Measurement System is selected, HMI applications scale the display limits accordingly.
Measurement Systems
Each format specification is assigned to a measurement system. Within a format set, which represents a particular type of
measurement (like temperature), only one unit per measurement system can be created. (For example, you could not add both
Celsius and Kelvin within the Metric system as units of temperature.) You can select the two measurement systems that are
stored in the SDB in the System Information Editor.
126 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.9.5 HMI Resources
An HMI allows you to organize and customize access to Alarms and live data. Variables have an HMI resource property that
can be set to one of the HMI resources defined here. Each resource has a name and an optional description.
➢ To add device names and descriptions: from the Tree View, select HMI Resources.
• Adding and deleting screen files from the System Information Editor
• Defining the use of screen files by HMI WorkstationST components
• Modifying screen files from the system .tcw file location or the Master location if CMS is not enabled
• Downloading screen files from the Master location to the HMI WorkstationST components
Note It is recommended that HMI screen files be managed from the System Information Editor, although they can also be
managed from the WorkstationST components.
• The Master location is the path defined at the system level. This location is displayed in the System Editor Property
Editor.
• The System File location is the HMIScreens folder (in the same location as the .tcw file).
• The HMI WorkstationST location is the path defined in the HMI Config tab in the WorkstationST application.
Master
location
path
Master Location
2. From the Tree View, expand HMI Screens to display the HMI WorkstationST components and HMI screen files in the
Summary View.
Note When CMS is enabled, the system must be checked out to add screens.
1. From the System Information Editor Tree View, right-click HMI Screens (or any item under it or in the
Summary View) and select Add HMI screen file to display a Select a Folder dialog box.
2. (Optional) Enter the Folder Name in which the HMI screen files will be stored. (This folder will be located within the
HMIScreens folder at the system .tcw location.)
3. Click OK to add the screen file to the HMIScreens root folder.
4. Browse to and select the screen file or files you want to add and click Open. The screen file is added to the system file
location.
128 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To delete an HMI screen file from the system
1. From the Summary View, select the screen file to be deleted.
2. Right-click the screen file and select Delete, or, from the toolbar, click the Delete icon, or from the Edit menu, select
Delete. The screen file(s) should be deleted from the HMIScreens folder in the .tcw location.
Note When a particular WorkstationST component is selected in the Tree View, the Use property can also be changed from
both the Summary View and the Property Editor.
Note If a WorkstationST component is configured for automatic download, a manual download cannot be performed.
When pre-configured for automatic download, the WorkstationST application periodically compares the date of the file in the
Master location to the date of the file in the WorkstationST location. When an HMI screen file is saved to the Master location,
its date changes. The component detects the change and automatically copies the new file to the WorkstationST HMI screens
folder. HMI screen files can be downloaded to an HMI WorkstationST component without checking out the system or
individual HMI screens from the Configuration Management System (CMS).
➢ To manually download HMI screen files from the Master location to the designated HMI WorkstationST
components
1. From the System Information Editor Tree View, select HMI Screens or HMI WorkstationSTs.
2. From the Summary View, select one or more HMI screen files.
3. From the Summary View, right-click to select Download selected HMI screens.
Note Any screens selected for download that are not configured to be used on the WorkstationST component will not be
downloaded.
When not pre-configured for automatic download, the WorkstationST application compares the local HMI screen dates with
the Master during a build of the WorkstationST component. An option to download the mismatched screens is then presented
to the user when the WorkstationST component is downloaded.
130 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.9.6.6 Display HMI Screen File Status
The System Information Editor displays the status of HMI screen files, comparing the date and size of the master HMI screen
file in the Master location with the date and size of the HMI screen file in the WorkstationST location. The Status column
reflects whether the HMI WorkstationST screen file is current with the Master file.
Note The process of editing an HMI screen file is different, depending on whether CMS is enabled.
• From the System Information Editor, right-click the file to be edited and check it out by selecting CMS and
CheckOut. The checked-out status displays.
• Right-click the screen file again and select Edit. The file opens in CimEdit for editing.
• Save the edits and close the file.
• Right-click the file and check it in by selecting CMS and CheckIn to update the file in the System .tcw location.
• A message displays asking if you wish to publish the changes to the Master. Typically, you will click OK. This updates
the screen file in the Master location.
Note The edit window displayed depends on the state of both the Master file and your system file.
The source of these HMI screen files is the System .tcw location. When CMS is disabled, the Check Out function copies the
file from the System .tcw location to the computer where the editing is taking place. The file is then checked back in to the
System .tcw location.
There are three possible states, as follows:
Note To ensure that the latest screens from the Master are included in the archive, perform the Copy Master to Local
function before the archive function.
When an archive is unzipped, the HMI screen files are located in a subdirectory relative to the location of the system’s .tcw
file. For example, if the system is called abcSystem, and is stored in C:\Site, the .tcw file is located at C:\site\abcSystem
\abcSystem.tcw. The HMI screen files are located at C:\site\abcSystem\HMIScreens. This is the System .tcw location of the
HMI screen Files.
Note If files already exist in the Master location when copying from the system, a warning dialog displays to ask if you wish
to overwrite the existing files.
Note The Copy Local to Master is not typically required except when setting up a system or the Master WorkstationST
component for the first time. The Copy Master to Local is required prior to performing a system archive to ensure that the
latest screens from the Master have been copied to the System .tcw location before creating the archive.
132 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.9.7 Network Switch Layouts
Beginning with ControlST V07.05.01C, Network Switch Layouts provide enhanced network switch management features.
Network Switch Layouts provide the mapping between the internal switch interfaces and the physical switch ports, which
enables the Network Monitor or CSH feature to read the switch data over SNMP and display the data with the correct
physical port location.
Two types of Network Switch layouts are supported:
• GE standard switch layout definitions: standard switch layout definitions that are provided as part of the ControlST
product. The standard switch layout files correspond to the standard switch types qualified for NetworkST. GE standard
layouts cannot be modified.
• Custom switch layout definitions: custom switch layouts can be created to support non-standard switch types.
The use of switch layouts has been designed to provide the following improvements:
• Support for newly qualified switch types independent of ControlST releases: in previous ControlST versions, the
network switch layouts were hard coded in the release. Support for newly qualified switches was only available as part of
the next ControlST release and required, at a minimum, an update of ToolboxST and WorkstationST. ControlST
V07.05.01C and later versions moved the switch-specific code to a switch layout file. The switch layout file is updated as
new switches are qualified, and this file can be sent to existing sites that need to support the new switch type
independently of the ControlST release cycle and without the need to upgrade to a newer version of ControlST.
• Minimize the impact of switch operating system changes: network switch vendors periodically update the switch
operating systems, and in some cases these changes have required ControlST updates to support new behaviors that were
introduced as part of the operating system update. The switch layout files have been designed to minimize the impact of
internal switch layout changes. In the event that internal switch changes cannot be supported by the existing switch
layout, a new switch layout will be created that will be included in the next ControlST release and distributed to affected
sites.
• Support for unqualified (custom) switch types: GE standard switch layouts are provided for all NetworkST standard
switch configurations. Support for non-standard switch types can be added by creating custom layout files.
Note Layouts for GE standard NetworkST switch types always begin with GE, followed by the switch manufacturer, model
number, and any model-specific options (GE_<Manufacturer>_<Model>_<Options>).
The GE standard switch layouts support any NetworkST qualified Cisco® switch. Switches from other manufacturers have
been supported on a legacy basis but it is not anticipated that these switches will be used often in new systems. If support for a
legacy switch type is required on a new system, legacy switch support can be enabled using the following procedure.
134 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To enable legacy switch support on a new system
1. From the System Information Editor Tree View, select Network Switch Layouts to display the supported switch
layouts.
2. From the Property Editor, set the Enable Legacy Switch Support property to True to display the legacy switch
layouts.
Note Always use the GE standard switch layouts when available. For example, always use the GE_CISCO_2960_24Port
layout but never use the legacy Cisco_Catalyst_2960 layout. In the case where a supported legacy switch such as the
Enterasys_N1 is required, the legacy layout must be used because there are no GE standard layouts defined for Enterasys
switches.
Refer to section Custom Network Switch Layout Configuration for the procedure to create custom switch layouts. For
example, the GE standard switch layouts only support 24 port versions of the Cisco 2960 switch. Support for a 48 port Cisco
2960 switch is not available with the GE standard layouts, but a custom switch layout can be created to allow monitoring of
this non-standard switch type.
Note The custom layout is used for qualifying new switch types and cannot be used for normal operation. The switch is not
monitored when the custom layout is selected.
Whenever a GE standard switch layout is selected for a switch type that supports
stacking, stacking is enabled by default and the number of switches in the stack is
initialized to the maximum stack size defined by the switch layout type. Do not forget
to modify these properties to match the actual layout of the switch being configured.
Attention
138 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.9.7.3 Add Support for Newly Qualified NetworkST Standard Switch Types
New GE standard switch layouts are created as new switch types are qualified for NetworkST. The new standard switch
layouts are added to the GeSwitchLayouts.xml file, which is then used to update older versions of ControlST with the latest
standard switch layouts. Any ControlST version that supports the GE standard switch layouts (V07.05.01C and later) can be
updated to support the latest GE standard switch layouts by updating the GeSwitchLayouts.xml file. Simply copy the latest
GeSwitchLayouts.xml file to the top level of the ToolboxST project directory (the directory where the .tcw file is located),
then close ToolboxST and re-open the project to make the new GE standard switch layouts available.
Note For systems under CMS source control, first check out the system configuration (check out from the root tree node of
the system overview), then copy the new GeSwitchLayouts.xml file in place of the existing one. Open the System Information
Editor by double clicking on the system overview root tree node. Make some change to something in the editor and change it
back so the document requires saving. Save the editor and close it. Check the system back into CMS.
Note The use of a non-standard switch implies that the user assumes responsibility for all aspects of the switch configuration
and its interaction with and impact on the network. Switch configuration is beyond the scope of this document. SNMP V1 or
SNMP V3 must be enabled and properly configured in the switch to enable monitoring of the switch values.
Network Switch Layouts allow users to enter unique physical port-to-port faceplate and interface name mapping. The
Network Switch Layouts include a set of legacy switch layout types that were supported before the ability to add custom
switch layouts existed. These legacy switch layout types cannot be edited, but are presented for completeness and to allow
easy version upgrade. There is also a set of GE standard switch layout definitions that cannot be modified but are included as
validated switch layouts.
2. From the Tree View of layouts, right click a port, select Add Switch Layout, and enter a unique name for the layout.
(As an alternative, you may copy an existing one.)
3. From the Property Editor, modify the properties to configure the switch layout.
140 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Network Switch Layout Configuration Properties
Property Description
General
Is a legacy layout Legacy layouts; cannot be modified (False)
Is Stackable Switch is a stackable switch (default is True)
Maximum number of stacked switches allowed. This setting limits the Stacked Switch Group Size
Maximum Stack Size
setting in the Network Switch component editor.
Sets the number of ports on each switch. For a stacked switch this number controls how many
Number of ports on each ports are defined as the Stacked Switch Group Size is set. For a non-stacked switch this controls
switch the total number of ports. For the switch layout, all ports are shown per the Maximum Stack Size
and Ports Per Switch setting.
Standard GE switch configurations are part of the product. This switch layout is a standard
Standard Layout
configuration; cannot be modified (False).
Name of the type of switch. There are some pre-defined legacy switch types that were used by
Switch Layout Type
previous ToolboxST / WorkstationST versions, which are included but cannot be modified.
Manufacturer of the network switch. There are some manufacturers that require special SNMP
Switch Manufacturer
behavior by the WorkstationST Network Monitor.
In the Data Grid View, each non-legacy switch allows modification to port information.
Note Although User names must match Windows logon names, Role names do not have to match.
The following table lists the User and Roles properties available in the Property Editor.
142 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Logic forcing procedures can result in personal injury or death, if not strictly
followed. Only adequately trained personnel should modify any programmable
machine. Forcing of control logic for an operating process is strongly discouraged.
Forcing of protective functions is never permissible for an operating unit. All safety
Warning measures should be strictly enforced in conjunction with this procedure.
A Group name can also be specified here, by prepending the name with an at @ sign. Groups
Name can either be locally defined on the PC or come from a domain. Some limitations apply, such as
local groups that reference domain groups cannot be used. However, local groups can contain
domain users. For example, a group name of @SITEDOMAIN\Operators will allow all users in
that Domain group to log on and be granted the Role and HMI Resources assigned to that entry
in the User list.
Role Defines the user’s access privileges
Associated with a User
Users are configured in the System Information Editor and can be assigned to variables. Users
who have a resource that matches a variable’s resource can write to live data for that variable if
HMI Resources the privilege is assigned. If a variable does not have a resource, it defaults to allow the user to
modify the data if the user’s role supports that privilege. Users with an empty list of resources
are only allowed to modify variables without an Human-machine Interface (HMI) resource
defined. Refer to the section HMI Resources.
Role Settings
Role Name User name and privileges
Alarm Privilege Allows you to acknowledge and reset Alarms in the Alarm Viewer
Alarm Service Privilege Allows you to place Alarms as out-of-service from the Alarm Viewer
Allows you to shelve or unshelve one or more Alarms in the Alarm Viewer. Refer to the section
Alarm Shelving Privilege
Alarm Shelving.
Download Privilege Allows you to download to a controller
144 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.10 System Database (SDB)
This feature is not available for Mark VIeS Safety Control systems.
Attention
The ToolboxST application can interface with a System Database (SDB) from the System Editor.
146 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.11 EGD Configuration Server
The EGD configuration server is a repository for EGD device and system configurations. Like the SDB, the EGD
configuration server allows configuration information to be available to multiple tools or runtime platforms.
The EGD configuration server maintains a group of .xml documents for each EGD device. The EGD configuration server also
maintains a MasterSymbolTable.xml file that contains format specifications, Alarm Classes, and other system-level
information.
Note The ToolboxST application uses the EGD configuration server if it has been enabled in the System Editor.
The protocol used to get and put these .xml documents to and from the EGD configuration server is a published HTTP
protocol. This protocol is available for other tools, and is currently used by the GE CIMPLICITY ME.
148 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.11.1 Work Online with EGD Configuration Server
Work Online with the EGD configuration server is the default in the ToolboxST application to open, build, or save
components. You can select Work Offline from the View menu or from the Status bar shortcut menu.
When the EGD configuration server is enabled, a status bar indicates the Online/Offline status. Right-click the status bar to
display a shortcut menu, which allows you to toggle between the two modes. If Work Offline is selected, the server is
bypassed when components are opened, built, or saved. This means that any component saved results in a difference between
the EGD configuration server and the ToolboxST application.
An issue in the Windows operating system handling of 32-bit application addresses has
been identified in large (~2 GB) ToolboxST system configurations on two platforms:
• 64-bit Windows 7
Microsoft has resolved the issue with a Hotfix (KB2588507) for both operating
systems. GE is not able obtain redistribution rights for this Microsoft Hotfix. Users
with large memory ToolboxST system configurations (such as Foundation Fieldbus)
using Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 should download and install the
Microsoft Hot Fix.
➢ To compare the local EGD configuration to the server configuration: from the System Editor View menu,
select EGD Configuration Server, then select View Differences.
OR right-click the status bar shortcut menu and select View Differences.
The Local Configuration Compare to Server Configuration window displays the comparison results between the local EGD
configuration files and the EGD configuration server files.
Note Publishes to the EGD Configuration server occur when a component is saved. If a component in a .tcw file is not the
latest configuration (for example, if the most current configuration is on another computer), publishing the local EGD
configuration sends the old configuration to the server.
• The Search text box allows the user to filter the display for the entered criteria.
• Color coding represents differences and missing documents:
− Salmon color indicates documents that are missing from the configuration server
− Green/gray color indicates rows containing differences
• The toolbar above the grid provides two icons:
− Select the Toggle icon to only display the documents that do not match in the table.
− Select the Help icon to display a diagram that illustrates the dataflow of configuration documents between tools
(Configuration Server and WorkstationST).
150 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Toggle Search Text Box
Help
Missing
Different
Note The CMS Status column displays information only if the user is currently logged into CMS and the ToolboxST system
is under CMS control.
152 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.11.4 Configure External EGD Device
The EGD configuration for a device in the SDB can be retrieved for use in a ToolboxST system. However, before you can
reference an external device in the SDB, the SDB Enable property must be set to True.
1. If the external device does not already exist as a ToolboxST component, create an External Device component to
represent it.
2. Select the external device in the System Editor Tree View. The component properties display in the Property
Editor.
3. Set the Enable Get from SDB property to True.
4. From the Tree View, right-click the external device and select Get EGD from SDB. A window displays the destination
SDB Host and Path.
5. Click OK to proceed with the Get EGD from SDB operation. When it is complete, the results display on the Log tab of
the Component InfoView.
Note If the EGD configuration server is enabled for the system, the EGD configuration will also be put to the EGD
configuration server.
• Force Lists
• I/O / Variable
• Alarm Parent Child Relationships
• Alarm
• Hold
• Event
• Find Unlinked Blocks
• Firmware Versions
• Workstation Consumed Device Information
• Workstation Feature Configuration
• System IP Address Information
• Component Versions
➢ To generate a system report: from the System Editor View menu, select Reports, then select the report.
154 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.13 System Configuration Files
Each system configuration has a .tcw file associated with a particular ToolboxST version. When an existing system .tcw file is
opened, a window may prompt you to select a ToolboxST version to use when opening the file. In most cases, when there is
only one ToolboxST version of the installed (ToolboxST.exe), the .tcw file opens without displaying a window. When multiple
ToolboxST versions are installed, a window displays with all versions that are equal to, or a higher version than, the selected .
tcw file.
In the following example, the fivetwoC.tcw system file opens using the selected version. If the selected version is higher than
the system in which it was saved, you must upgrade the ToolboxST version.
Note The Privileges features is accessible from the WorkstationST application or WorkstationST Status Monitor icon in the
taskbar notification area.
The following figure illustrates how the ToolboxST application, CimView, and CimEdit authenticate system access using the
Privileges feature.
156 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
!
+
!
"
#$
%#&
'"(
)
)'
"'
./0
%)'$$)'&
#*
)'$
$'
)+
)''
"
))+
),-
+
+ ./0
)
)')
./0
)
! "#$ %
&'
(
(
! "# $ %
) *+ (,
,
'
Note Privileges can only be modified from the System Information Editor.
158 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.14.2 Log On
From the Privileges User Logon Manager, you can:
Note An event message indicating the logged-on user (and role) is generated in the Alarm Viewer.
➢ To replace the current user: right-click the WorkstationST Status Monitor icon and select Privileges Log On.
The user selected (with defined privileges) replaces the current user.
The user maint is now logged on over the current user (now sub-user). The previously defined user privileges for maint take
effect.
160 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.14.3 Log Off
The feature Auto LogOff Timeout is activated when one user is logged on over another user. This feature is enabled in the
Property Editor when the Users and Roles item is selected from the Tree View.
Note An event message indicating that the user logged off is generated in the Alarm Viewer.
➢ To set the Auto LogOff Timeout: from the System Editor Tree View, double-click the system item to display the
System Information Editor.
From the
Property Editor,
enter the Auto
Logoff Timeout
in minutes.
If the temporary user remains inactive through the timeout period, that user is logged off and message displays that the user
administrator is again active.
➢ To log off the Current User: right-click the WorkstationST Status Monitor icon and select Privileges Log Off.
The current user is now logged off. If the current user was the temporary user, the sub-user now becomes the current user and
previously defined user privileges now apply.
Note Only users with roles assigned to a protected object can access that object.
162 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the drop-down list, select an Access
Right and the Role Name to be assigned.
By default, when a role is assigned to an access right, only users with that role can access the protected object (programs,
tasks, and such). Permissions are also inherited from parent objects. For example, if a component has the Modify Design role
assigned to Operator, all objects in that component require the Operator role before allowing design changes. However, each
Role name can optionally be applied with the Grant keyword. This reverses the normal behavior so that users with the Grant
keyword have access to the object regardless of any parent objects. As an example, the Modify Design access could be
restricted for an entire component to users with the Maintenance role, but one particular program could be modifiable by
users with the Operator role.
Note A controller set is a group of controllers (based on redundancy) with a set of owned I/O modules. In the ToolboxST*
System Editor Summary View, a controller set displays as a single controller.
A shared I/O module sends field device inputs to both its owner controller and to all consumer controllers. A consumer
controller receives the field device inputs from the shared I/O modules that are owned by the other owner controller. The
exception to this is a Mark VIeS Safety controller. The Mark VIeS only receives inputs from its own safety-certified I/O
modules. The ToolboxST application is used to configure the controller sets. The computer with ToolboxST communicates
with the I/O devices through a software gateway function residing in the controllers.
Only the following controller combinations are supported by Shared IONet:
• One Mark VIeS Safety controller and up to three Mark VIe controllers
• One MarkStat controller and one Mark VIe controller
• Up to four Mark VIe controllers
Note The UCPA controller platform should not be used in a Shared IONet system.
164 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.15.1 Insert New Shared IONet Group
➢ To add a Shared IONet Group
1. Open a ToolboxST system *.tcw file to display the System Editor.
2. Create a Shared IONet Group.
3. If inserting a new controller, from the Tree View, right-click the Shared IONet Group and select Insert New,
Controller, and Mark [VIe, VIeS, or Stat] Controller.
a. Complete the Creation Wizard pages to add the controller.
b. If inserting a new second controller, repeat these steps.
166 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.15.2 Delete or Remove Shared IONet Groups
➢ To remove a shared IONet Group
1. From the System Editor Tree View, expand the Shared IONet Group and either:
a. Drag the controllers from inside to outside the group.
Or
b. Delete the controllers from inside the group.
2. Select and delete the group folder.
3. Restart the WorkstationST* OPC DA server to refresh the I/O diagnostics as displayed from the system-level controller.
If the server is not restarted, active diagnostics may not display from the system level.
When attempting to delete the Shared IONet Group without first removing the controllers, the following message displays.
2. A Download Shared IONet System wizard displays. Notice that the check boxes for the individual controllers
cannot be cleared.
3. Complete the wizard screens to build and download to the Shared IONet Group.
Note For further details, refer to Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Controllers Shared IONet Instruction Guide (GEH-6812).
168 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3.16 System Controller Platforms
There are several available controllers that can be instanced in a ToolboxST system. The available controller platforms depend
on the user’s control system. The following tables list the controllers that are available for each control system, and identifies
the supported and unsupported features the controllers offer for that control system. For further information on each
controller, including backup/restore procedures, refer to the Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Control Systems Volume II: System
Guide for General-purpose Applications (GEH-6721_Vol_II), the chapter Controllers.
Master
UCPA No No No No Simplex only No (PSCA),
Slave
Simplex, Master
UCSA Yes Yes No Yes Dual, Yes (PSCA),
TMR Slave
Simplex, Master
UCSB Yes Yes Yes Yes Dual, Yes (PSCA),
TMR Slave
Simplex, Master
Yes
UCSC Yes Yes Yes Dual, Yes (PSCA),
Restore only
TMR Slave
Simplex,
Slave
UCSB Yes No Yes Yes Dual, No
(Read Only)
TMR
Simplex,
Yes Slave
UCSC Yes No Yes Dual, No
Restore only (Read Only)
TMR
170 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4 Software
Attention
There are two system components for creating downloadable application software, controllers, and Library Containers.
Controller components contain the software that is downloaded to a particular controller. Library containers contain user
block libraries of reusable blocks that can be referenced and used by controller components.
Controller software consists of function blocks that perform logical and mathematical operations on the block variables. This
network of blocks and connected variables controls a particular machine through physical inputs and outputs.
Function blocks arranged and connected within a software element are called tasks. Tasks are grouped into other software
elements called programs. For more information, refer to the section Software Tab.
User-defined blocks called user blocks are created using existing function blocks, as well as other user blocks. User blocks
can be used in a task in the same manner as function blocks.
Note A variable Alias report can be generated for a list of all variables with aliases.
172 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4.1.3 Unlink Property
All programs, tasks, and user blocks generated from a library definition have a Boolean property called Unlink, which is False
by default. In this state, they are called linked.
Linked programs, tasks, and user blocks, with very few exceptions, cannot be changed. They are updated with the current
library definition when the Instance command is performed.
Unlinked programs, tasks, and user blocks are disassociated from the library definition, and can be modified. They are NOT
updated with the current library definition when the Instance command is performed.
Note Programs, tasks, and user blocks that do not come from a library definition are called Embedded, and they do not have
the Unlinked property.
174 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4.2 Library Container Editor
The Library Container Editor is used to create reusable software that can be included in multiple controller components.
Library Containers are added to a system as a separate component. Double-click the component icon in the Tree View to
display the editor as a separate window. Each Library Container can contain one or more libraries. Each of these can contain
user block definitions, program definitions, or task definitions.
A User Block Definition is a collection of function blocks and user blocks with input and output pins.
A Program Definition is a collection of tasks that can be used in a controller device.
A Task Definition is a collection of function blocks and user blocks that can be used in a program.
Validate checks the configuration Summary View is used Library View contains
for errors, connection compatibility, to edit the user block categories of blocks that
data types, and equations selected in the Tree View perform various functions
Tree View
displays all
items in the
editor. Add or
delete libraries
here
Property
Editor displays
properties for
the item
selected in the
Tree View
Component
InfoView
displays
information
whenever an
action occurs
It is highly discouraged that systems contain multiple libraries or objects with the
same name for the following reasons:
• Duplicate named libraries – Even though a system can contain multiple libraries
with the same name, a Library Container or device can only reference one of these
libraries. Therefore, if the libraries have a different subset of objects the system will
not be able to access all of the objects in both libraries.
• Duplicate named objects – Even though a system can contain multiple objects with
Caution the same name, an unexpected instancing operation can occur if a device or Library
Container references more than one of these objects. This could also lead to confusion
for future users who may not be intimately involved in the system design. If a user
designs a system in this manner it is their responsibility to test and understand the
instancing operation and convey that information to all system users.
176 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the drop-down lists, select the ControlST Version
and the Application type, then click Finish.
Tip � Different versions of the controller component can be used as the basis for a library component. A software block
library is always included that contains basic function blocks, such as Move and Average. There are also optional libraries,
which contain more specialized blocks that can be included in the Library Container.
When new versions of the controller software are installed, Library Containers continue to use their current configuration
until they are upgraded. (If the old version is uninstalled, the Library Container must be upgraded before it can be opened.)
From the System Editor Tree View, double-click the Library Container.
From the Libraries menu , select Add Library or Add Existing Library.
178 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Enter a name for a new library or select
the desired existing library and click OK.
Tip � The Summary View Libraries item displays names and locations of all function blocks and user block libraries defined
in the Library Container. The function block library version used by the Library Container can be determined by looking at
the Directory field and observing the path to the library.
Library containers and devices should have a reference to all top-level and nested
linked objects. Failure to do this may cause the Instancing and Update All Uses
features to generate errors due to not being able to update all selected objects. This
results in the following error message displayed in the Log window: The block [user
Attention block 1] is not found in block library assembly.
Note The Go to Definition and Compare to Definition features will not work for any object that does not contain a reference
to the source object.
Devices and Library Containers must have library references to the source code of all
linked objects for the Go to Definition and Compare to Definition features to operate. If
no library reference exists for an object these functions will not be displayed in the
right-click menu.
Attention
Note If the user performs an Instance All operation the system updates all nested link contents from their source code if they
are defined within the Library Container. However, nested links that were defined in referenced libraries are updated here
with an exact copy as they exist in that reference library. The reference library content is not updated by the Instance All
operation.
Instancing behaves differently from Instance All in that if the user performs an Instance operation the system updates all
nested link contents from their source even is the source is referenced from another library.
180 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4.2.3 Find All Library Uses
➢ To locate all uses of a User Block Library: refer to the procedure Find All Uses.
Property Description
Description Description for this library
Name Unique name for this library
Access Roles are assigned to users to protect each access right for the object.
Modify Data allows you to modify data values and forcing of variables.
Protection
Modify Design allows you to modify the design of defined blocks in this library.
View Design allows you to view details of defined blocks in this library.
Logic forcing procedures can result in personal injury or death, if not strictly
followed. Only adequately trained personnel should modify any programmable
machine. Forcing of control logic for an operating process is strongly discouraged.
Forcing of protective functions is never permissible for an operating unit. All safety
Warning measures should be strictly enforced in conjunction with this procedure.
• Block3.mht
• Block4.htm
The ToolboxST application first searches for a .chm file that corresponds to the Library name. If this is not found, it searches
in the HelpFiles directory for a help file that matches the block name. The search order is:
• .mht
• .htm
• .txt
182 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4.2.7 Password Protection
The first time you attempt to perform a password-protected function, the Enter Password dialog box displays. All protected
functions performed during the remainder of the current ToolboxST session do not require re-entering the password.
Note If passwords were set in the Property Editor for this library, the following functions require a password.
The Data Grid displays the differences and allows you to edit the table data values in the controller. Once the table data values
are correct, click the Save to Initial Values button to capture the values in the ToolboxST configuration.
184 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4.2.11 Table Definitions in Software Code
➢ To add a 2D (uni-variant) Linear Interpolator block
1. Connect the Table2D pin to the Table\T_ESPBSJ table.
186 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4.2.12 Add User Block Definition
A user block definition is a collection of function blocks and user blocks with input and output pins.
From the System Editor Tree View, double-click the Library Container.
User block definitions can be sorted alphabetically. If additional user block definitions are added, repeat the sort.
➢ To sort user block definitions: from the Tree View, right-click the library item and select Sort Definitions.
• Add Variable allows a variable to be added to the selected User Block. Once the new variable is added, properties
become available in the Data Grid.
• Add Undefined Variables allows you to add all undefined variables in the User Block Definition to the variables of
the User Block Definition. Undefined variables are ones that have been referenced in a User Block Definition but have
not yet been defined as part of user block variables or user block.
188 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4.2.14 Work with User Blocks
User attributes are named values that specialize user block definitions. They consist of a name, a data type, a description, a
value, and a PromptforInput property. The PromptforInput property allows you to verify the attribute value when the user
block that owns the user attributes is inserted. Named attributes can be used to change the variable names and connections by
substituting strings specified in user block attributes. User attributes for a user block can be changed at the instance. (Refer to
the section, Software Examples.)
3. Select the Attributes item in the Tree View to display modifiable properties in the Data Grid.
➢ To add an Instance Script: from the Tree View, right-click the user block definition and select Add Instance
Script.
4.2.14.2 Instance
Select this command to get a new copy of the user block definition from the library. In addition to updating the user blocks,
this command causes the instance scripts and text substitutions for all top-level user blocks to run. It is not possible to undo
this command.
➢ To instance a User Block Definition: from the Tree View, right-click the user block definition and select Instance.
4.2.14.3 Validate
This command checks the selected user block definition for errors. Validate also checks connection compatibility, data types,
and equations. Validation status displays in the Log tab. Double-click the error in the Log tab to locate the software that
caused the problem.
➢ To check a User Block Definition for errors: from the Tree View, right-click the user block definition and select
Validate.
Note The Enter Password dialog box displays if this action is password-protected.
Click Yes .
Note When Update All Uses is selected, you are prompted to save changes if changes have not been saved. Once changes
are saved, the Controllers and Libraries to Update dialog box displays.
The Controllers and Libraries to Update dialog box displays the search results. Each Library Container or controller
containing the user block being pushed is listed, as well as indication if it is OK to update (push) the instance, the number of
instances within the Library Container or controller, and the status that corresponds to the number of instances within the
Library Container or controller. The following table describes the possible status of the instances within the Library Container
or controller that qualify it as OK or not OK to push. Library Containers can contain multiple libraries, therefore the status
field can contain more than one status because different libraries within the same container can have a different status.
190 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Select the appropriate Library Container or controllers and click Update.
Note A Library Container/controller with an OK status is the only one that can be updated. Users can only select a Library
Container when the OK to Push To status is OK.
The following Warning dialog box displays to remind users that any open Library Containers or controllers will not be
updated.
192 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The Block Updating Results dialog box displays the update results. Click Close to close out the window.
Click Yes .
The search results display in the Find Results tab of the Component InfoView.
The system notifies the user in the search results of unlinked objects and duplicate names.
194 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4.2.14.6 User Block Property Editor
A user block definition is created by using the Block Diagram Editor to insert different types of blocks and connect them to
perform a function.
Note In some locations, including Reports and the Block Diagram Editor, shortcut menus contain commands that allow
single pages or reports to be printed.
Prints a
summary of Page Numbering
configuration controls page
settings number
assignment
Includes a list
of sections Linear pages
with page number
numbers sequentially
Includes a starting with page 1
quick
reference Hierarchical
symbol guide pages include
sections and
Prints all subsections (1, 1.1,
component and such)
programs
196 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4.4 System Design Procedures
This section provides five procedures to create a system. These procedures build on each other so you must complete them in
the following order:
1. Add a user block definition to a library.
2. Insert a linked user block in a controller.
3. Add a device attribute.
4. Exclude a function block from a user block with an instance script.
5. Substitute text into a user block with an attribute.
198 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
7. With the Lib1Usb1 item highlighted in the Tree View, the All Categories drop-down list displays on the right side of
the block diagram.
4. Right-click Programs again and select Add Program. Complete the Add Program dialog box and click OK.
5. From the Tree View, right-click Prog1 and select Add Task. Complete the Add Task dialog box and click OK.
6. Save the changes and close the editor.
200 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4.4.3 Device Attribute
➢ To add a device attribute
1. Open the test System Editor and double-click to open the component.
2. From the Tree View, select Attributes.
3. Enter the Name for the new device attribute as attr1.
4. Click in the Value cell for attr1, then click the ellipsis button (...) to display the Modify Value dialog box.
Name of the
attribute
being
modified
If selected, the
attribute values
are restricted to
an enumeration
(a predefined
set of allowable
values).
202 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4.4.4 Block Exclusion with Instance Script
➢ To exclude a function block from a user block with an instance script
1. Open the test System Editor and double-click the Library Container Editor.
Right-click the
MOVE_2 block
and select Add
Instance Script
4. Change the attribute name to Attr1_u and click OK. A new Attributes item displays in the Tree View under the user
block definition Lib1Usb1.
5. From the Tree View, select Attributes.
6. From the Data Grid, change the Attr1_u data type to STRING by clicking the Type cell (which currently contains
UNDEFINED), and selecting STRING from the drop-down list.
7. Change the PromptForInput cell of Attr1_u to True. (You may have to scroll right in the Data Grid to locate the
PromptForInput column.)
8. Now that the attribute has been created, create a user block variable with text substitution in its name. From the Tree
View, click Variables.
9. From the Data Grid, click the Name cell in the Append row (indicated by an asterisk *) and {Attr1_u}_thing. Leave
the data type set to the default value, BOOL.
10. Text substitution can also be used in variable connections. To connect the variable that was just created, click the
MOVE_1 block in the Tree View.
11. In the Summary View, double-click the enable pin of the block MOVE_1.
204 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
12. Click to select Local Variable. Then, enter the variable name {Attr1_u}_thing in the text box and click OK. The block
diagram updates to reflect the new connection.
206 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIe Intrinsic Variables
Data Engineering Min
Global Intrinsic Variables Description Max Limit
Type Unit Limit
When this variable is set to True, a command is generated for
Alarm.Ack acknowledging all alarms in the Alarm or Hold queue not previously BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
acknowledged (read/write).
Output variable that contains the number of alarms in the alarm
Alarm.AckCount UINT Number 65535 0
queue that have been acknowledged
Output variable that contains the number of alarms currently in the
Alarm.ActiveCount UINT Number 65535 0
alarm queue
Output variable that is set to True every time a new alarm occurs. It
can be reset either by toggling the Alarm Horn Silence variable or
Alarm.Horn BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
by sending the Silence Horn SDI command. The alarm horn is also
silenced when all alarms are removed from the queue.
When this variable is True, a command is generated to silence the
Alarm.HornSilence BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
horn (read/write)
Output variable that is set to True when the alarm queue contains
Alarm.Indicator BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
one or more active alarms.
When this variable is set to True, a command resets all alarms after
checking if reset is allowed for those alarms. A reset command is
Alarm.Reset allowed for an alarm if it is in the queue but is not alarmed, and the BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
alarm has already been acknowledged. Once an alarm is reset, it is
removed from the alarm queue (read/write).
Used to determine the current status of Alarm.Ack, Alarm.Reset,
AlarmSpecialToken and Alarm.HornSilence. This value should not be used by the UINT Do not use N/A N/A
application.
Output variable that contains the number of alarms in the alarm
Alarm.UnackCount UINT Number 65535 0
queue that have not been acknowledged.
Bit-masked value indicating if a restart is allowed, if a download is
allowed, or if the processor is currently downloading. The meaning
AppStatus_X UINT Do not use N/A N/A
of this intrinsic is subject to change, so this value should not be
used.
Contains the revision number of the auto reconfiguration for
Seconds since
AutoReconfigRevision_X processor X. This value is used to check for equality between the UDINT 4294967295 0
01/01/1970
controller and the ToolboxST application.
208 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIe Intrinsic Variables (continued)
Data Engineering Min
Global Intrinsic Variables Description Max Limit
Type Unit Limit
Used prior to the processor reaching the Controlling state to
indicate why the processor is paused in that state. A value of 0
means that the processor has reached the Controlling state. The
other values in the following list are permissives and indicate what
the processor is currently waiting for. These values are subject to
change in future releases.
20: CONTROLLER_ID_DETERMINED
21: SYS_ONLINE
22: DC_DETERMINED
24: NVRAM_DATA_INIT_COMPLETE
25: APP_DATA_INIT_COMPLETE
28: INPUTS_RECEIVED
29: FRAME_SYNCHRONIZED
30: INPUTS_VOTED
31: STATES_INITIALIZED
32: STATES_EXCHANGED
ControllerReasonCode_X DINT Enumeration 46 –1
33: BLOCKWARE_RUNNING
34: LOAD_COMMAND_RECEIVED
35: ONLINE_LOAD_COMPLETE
36: APPLICATION_EQUALITY
37: APPLICATION_EQUALITY_STANDBY
38: OUTPUTS_RECEIVED
39: APP_MANAGER_DRIVERS_LOADED
40: ACFG_CONFIG_RELEASED
41: FF_DEVICES_PRESENT
42: IOAPP_INITIALIZED
43:IOAPP_CONFIG_COMPLETE
44: IOAPP_PROCESS_RUNNING
45: IOAPP_STANDBY_COMPLETE
46. VALID_PROCESSES_FOUND
Additionally, a value of -1 means that the FAILURE state has been
entered, although this is not actually a permissive.
Indicates the X processor revision of the Dynamic Data Recorder.
Seconds since
DdrRevision_X This value is used to check for equality between the controller and UDINT 4294967295 0
01/01/1970
the ToolboxST application.
Contains configurable internal information not intended for
DebugFloat_X REAL Do not use N/A N/A
application use.
210 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIe Intrinsic Variables (continued)
Data Engineering Min
Global Intrinsic Variables Description Max Limit
Type Unit Limit
When the controller is a UDH communicator, if the alarm manager
finds any active holds that are not overridden it sets this variable.
Otherwise this variable will be false. If there are four active holds in
Hold.Permissive BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
the queue and all four are overridden, Hold Permissive will be set
to false. If override is removed from any one of the four holds, Hold
Permissive is again set.
Indicates what percentage of the overall CPU time is not executing
IdleTime_X code for processor X. This value is not the same as FrameIdle_X. REAL % 100 0
This is also known as the system idle time.
Value indicates whether or not the X processor is frame
Is_Synced_X synchronized. This value should be true once the processor has BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
passed the DC_DETERMINATION state.
Indicates whether the auto-reconfiguration server is currently
IsAutoReconfigDownloading_X downloading an I/O module. Controllers and I/O modules should BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
not be powered off or downloaded when this value is true.
Value is True when the X processor has auto-reconfiguration
IsAutoReconfigEnabled_X BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
enabled.
Indicates whether all consumed CDH EGD exchanges are healthy
IsCdhEgdHealthy_X on the X processor. A False indication means that there is at least BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
one unhealthy consumed exchange.
Indicates whether there is currently a dynamic bind in progress on
IsDynamicBindActive_X BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
processor X. This value indicates that a download is not allowed.
Declares whether processor X has its UTC clock synchronized to
IsNtpSynced_X an NTP source. A value of True indicates that the clock is BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
synchronized.
Indicates whether all consumed UDH EGD exchanges are healthy
IsUdhEgdHealthy_X on the X processor. A False indication means that there is at least BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
one unhealthy consumed exchange.
Indicates whether there is an active or an inactive diagnostic in the
diagnostic queue for processor X. If this value is true, there is at
least one diagnostic. To view and/or clear diagnostics, from the
L3Diag_X BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
ToolboxST System Editor, double-click the controller to display the
Component Editor, and from the View menu, select Diagnostics
and Controller Diagnostics.
212 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIe Intrinsic Variables (continued)
Data Engineering Min
Global Intrinsic Variables Description Max Limit
Type Unit Limit
Enumerated value for the current security state of processor X. The
different states are:
0: OPEN
1: NEGOTIATE
2: GETTING_CA_CERTIFICATE
SecurityState_X UINT Enumeration 6 1
3: ENROLLING
4: GETTING_CA_CERTIFICATE_REVOCATION_LIST
5: AUTHENTICATED
6: SECURED
Any other value indicates an invalid state.
Time synchronization error relative to the limits. The
synchronization regulator must be within the limits to reach frame
synchronization. The meaning of this intrinsic is subject to change,
Sync_Err_Sigma_X LREAL Do not use N/A N/A
so this value should not be used. If a user wishes to see if the
processor is time synchronized, the Is_Synced_X intrinsic should
be used.
Time synchronization regulator error. This value is the relative error
from the master to the slave. The meaning of this intrinsic is subject
Sync_Est_Error_X to change, so this value should not be used. If a user wishes to see LREAL Do not use N/A N/A
if the processor is time synchronized, the Is_Synced_X intrinsic
should be used.
Value indicates whether or not processor X is a UDH
communicator. A value of 1 means that processor X is a UDH
communicator. The designated controller is always a UDH
UDHCommunicator_X UINT Enumeration 1 0
communicator. A second processor may also be a UDH
communicator if it loses communications with the designated
controller on the UDH network.
214 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIeS Intrinsic Variables (continued)
Data Engineering Max Min
Alarm Name Description
Type Unit Limit Limit
The CDHCommunicator_X value indicates whether or not
processor X is a CDH communicator. A value of 1 means that
processor X is a CDH communicator. The designated controller
CDHCommunicator_X UINT Enumeration 1 0
is always a CDH communicator. A second processor may also
be a CDH communicator if it loses communications with the
designated controller on the CDH network.
The ControllerID value contains the processor ID, and is
different within a redundant set. A value of 1 corresponds to the
ControllerID UINT Number 3=T 1=R
R processor, a value of 2 corresponds to the S processor, and a
value of 3 corresponds to the T processor.
The ControllerStateHeartbeat_X is the heartbeat value coming
ControllerStateHeartbeat_X UDINT Number 4294967295 0
from processor X. This value should always be changing.
The ControllerTimeNanoSeconds_X contains the UTC time as
known by processor X as the number of nanoseconds within
ControllerTimeNanoSeconds_X UDINT Nanoseconds 4294967295 0
the current second. This is used in conjunction
withControllerTimeSeconds_X.
The ControllerTimeSeconds_X contains the UTC time as
known by processor X as the number of seconds since January Seconds since
ControllerTimeSeconds_X UDINT 4294967295 0
1, 1970. This is used in conjunction 01/01/1970
withControllerTimeNanoSeconds_X.
216 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIeS Intrinsic Variables (continued)
Data Engineering Max Min
Alarm Name Description
Type Unit Limit Limit
The ControlState_X value indicates the current state of
processor X. The values with the corresponding state are as
follows:
0x00: POWERUP
0xD0: MASTER_INITIALIZATION
0xD1: DC_DETERMINATION
0xD2: DATA_INITIALIZATION
0xD3: INPUTS_ENABLED
ControlState_X 0xD5: EXCHANGE_INITIALIZATION UINT Enumeration 0xFF 0x00
0xD6: EXCHANGING
0xD7: SEQUENCING
0xD8: STANDBY
0xDA: CONTROLLING
0xDB: LOADING
0xDC: LOAD_DONE
0xDF: FAILURE
0xFF: NOT_APPLICABLE
The DdrRevision_X indicates the X processor revision of the
Seconds since
DdrRevision_X Dynamic Data Recorder. This value is used to check for UDINT 4294967295 0
01/01/1970
equality between the controller and the ToolboxST application.
The DebugFloat_X contains configurable internal information
DebugFloat_X REAL Do not use N/A N/A
not intended for application use.
All process alarms are placed in the Default Inhibit Group
unless otherwise configured for a specific inhibit group. When
DefaultGrpInhibit the DefaultGrpInhibit intrinsic is set to True, all process alarms BOOL TRUE/FALSE 1 0
in the default group are inhibited. This intrinsic should be used
with extreme caution.
The DesignatedController_X identifies the designated controller
as known to processor X. A value of 0 corresponds to unknown, 0=
DesignatedController_X UINT Number 3=T
1 corresponds to the R processor, 2 corresponds to the S Unknown
processor, and 3 corresponds to the T processor.
The DeviceBackupCrc_X indicates the CRC of the device
DeviceBackupCrc_X backup file for processor X. This value is used to check for UDINT Number 4294967295 0
equality between the controller and the ToolboxST application.
220 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIeS Intrinsic Variables (continued)
Data Engineering Max Min
Alarm Name Description
Type Unit Limit Limit
The Sync_Est_Error_X is the time synchronization regulator
error. This value is the relative error from the master to the
slave. The meaning of this intrinsic is subject to change, so this
Sync_Est_Error_X LREAL Do not use N/A N/A
value should not be used. If a user wishes to see if the
processor is time synchronized, the Is_Synced_X intrinsic
should be used.
The UDHCommunicator_X value indicates whether or not
processor X is a UDH communicator. A value of 1 means that
processor X is a UDH communicator. The designated controller
UDHCommunicator_X UINT Enumeration 1 0
is always a UDH communicator. A second processor may also
be a UDH communicator if it loses communications with the
designated controller on the UDH network.
222 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5 Block Diagram Editor
Attention
Software in the controller consists of blocks that perform control logic functions. The controller runtime provides a library of
standard blocks that can be combined to form user blocks. The Block Diagram Editor allows you to create and edit user
blocks using a visual interface and drag-and-drop tools. The Block Diagram Editor displays in the Summary View when a
user block is selected in the Tree View.
Additional editing tools display on the toolbar, and a sidebar called the Library View displays on the right side of the
Summary View to allow you to make changes to a user block.
Note If the user block is read-only or linked, an error message displays. If the user block is protected, you are prompted to
enter the appropriate password.
Property Description
Auto-Layout Mode Controls how the blocks on the diagram are arranged. Refer to the section Layout Modes.
Diagram Settings Displays the Diagram Settings
Append Sheet Adds a new drawing sheet at the end of the drawing
Insert Sheet Inserts a sheet immediately before the current sheet in manual mode
Delete Sheet Deletes the current sheet in manual mode
Rename Sheet Opens the Rename Sheets dialog box
Edit Sheet Border Opens the Sheet Border Editor
Print Sheet Prints the current sheet
Zoom Adjusts the zoom level to either a preset zoom level or a custom value
View Settings Allows you to toggle the rulers, library view, and print border
Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the selected location
224 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.2 Rename Sheets
Individual sheets can be renamed to follow any standard naming convention needed for a particular system. The sheet names
are used in page numbering and cross references, and must be unique within a particular device.
➢ To rename sheets: from the Tree View, right-click Programs or right-click anywhere in the empty portion of the
diagram.
Note For a particular sheet, you can enter a complete sheet name or use certain substitution characters to automatically
number or letter the sheets within a particular diagram.
Sheet Names
Substitution
Represents Example
Character
# Sheet number
@ Sheet letter
{AttributeName} Attribute
➢ To customize the sheet border: from anywhere in the Block diagram: right-click and select Edit Sheet Border.
Select Border or
Footer options.
Preview
selected
options.
Edit footer,
then select
either Export
or Import for
border re-use.
226 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.3.1 Border Options
Border Option Description
Border Name Text field to name the border
Border Description Text fields to describe the border
Coordinates When selected, draws the grid of letters and numbers on the border
Outer Line When selected, draws a rectangle around the outer edge of the border
Inner Line When selected, draws a rectangle around the inner edge of the border
When selected, draws the footer. When unchecked, the Footer Options and Footer Block section of
Footer
the dialog box is grayed out.
Footer Height Total vertical space allocated to the footer
Number of rows in the footer; each row is allocated vertical space equal to the footer height divided
Footer Rows
by the number of rows
Number of columns in the footer; each column is allocated horizontal space equal to the border
Footer Columns
width (which is paper size-dependent) divided by the number of columns
5.3.2 Preview
The Preview section displays how the border looks with the selected options. Additional preview features include the
following:
Cell Description
Next Cell Selects the next cell in the footer (list is sorted in Z order back to front)
Previous Cell Selects the previous cell in the footer (list is sorted in Z order back to front)
Delete Cell Removes the current cell from the footer. The button is only visible if a cell is selected.
Adds a new cell to the footer at the current Row and Column. The button is only visible if no cell is
Create Cell currently selected. Clicking an empty spot on the footer in the Preview makes the Create Cell visible
and presets the Row and Column fields to where you clicked in the preview.
Top-most Footer row for the current cell. It does not need to be within the footer boundaries, which
Row
allows special effects like non-rectangular footers.
Export Saves the current border from the editor to a specific .xml file
• Caption is text displayed in a smaller font on the first line of the cell.
• Text is text displayed in a larger font on the second line of the cell.
For both fields, the text is clipped to the size of the cell (no wrapping) and both support Attribute substitutions. For example,
if the custom text for a border cell is custom Text with {Attr1} substitution, the {Attr1} is replaced with the current value of the
user attribute Attr1 in whatever context the border is drawn. If Attr1 is not defined, it is removed from the text. These attribute
substitutions allow the user to customize footer contents for specific programs, tasks, or user blocks.
228 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.3.5 Sheet Information
Information Type provides a drop-down list of different pre-defined cells.
Requisition information from the system and device includes:
• Customer Site
• Customer Name
• Drawing Number
• Engineer
• Requisition Number
• Process Application
• Shop Order Number
• DM Number
• Serial Number
• Machine Size
Automatically-generated configuration data includes:
230 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Status Combine and Status Split Blocks
It is sometimes necessary to create a status variable from a normal analog value and a particular status value. Analog and
status values can be split into separate variables using the STATUS_COMBINE and STATUS_SPLIT blocks (illustrated in the
following figure).
232 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.4.3 Variable Input Blocks
Certain blocks (such as Add and And) referred to as Rubber blocks have a variable number of pins and are drawn differently.
Some complex blocks have functional groups of input and output pins.
Grouped
input pins
MODE_OPT
set to NONE
MODE_OPT
set to AUTO Auto
displays Auto mode
mode pins pins
Note Pins hidden by animations always display if they are connected to a variable.
234 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Variables attached to blocks display the configured redundancy next to the block pin.
Layout Modes
Arranges blocks in execution order in one column, with inputs and outputs lined up on the edges of
List Layout the sheet. All Rung blocks display as Rung diagrams rather than blocks. This mode is ideally suited
for sequencing, and can be used to simplify very large diagrams where wiring becomes confusing.
Does not arrange blocks or wires, but leaves all layout tasks to the user. It is ideal for users familiar
Manual Layout with a sheet-oriented approach to design or for applications where very specific documentation
standards must be met.
➢ To add a block
1. From the Library View, select a category and the desired block, then use the drag-and-drop operation to move the block
to the Block Diagram Editor.
Or
From the Tree View, right-click a task, a user block, or a block and select Add Block.
2. Select the desired block and click OK.
236 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To edit the properties of a block: click a block in the Block Diagram Editor and modify as needed.
Block Properties
Property Description
Block Type Name of the library block from which this block was created
Description Text describing the selected block
Unique identifier that allows the block (as well as its attributes and pins) to be referenced
Instance Name
from other places in the ToolboxST application
Instance Script Script that runs when the block is instanced
Height Height of the block in the diagram
Left Location of the left of the block in the diagram
Selected Pin Pin currently selected in the block highlighted in the diagram
Show Description When set to True, displays the description text for this block on the diagram
Top Location of the top of the block in the diagram
Width Width of the block in the diagram
Detached Summary File Backsheet for the selected block
Version Read-only the version number of the source for this block instance
Determines when the block is run. Setting this property automatically renumbers other blocks
Execution Order
in this user block. The blocks are run in sequential order
operation. You can also use the Wiring Tool for pin connections , which forms connections to both normal blocks and to
blocks with a configurable number of inputs (rubber pins).
Forcing of control logic for an operating process is strongly discouraged. Logic forcing
procedures can result in personal injury or death if not strictly followed. Only
adequately trained personnel should modify any programmable machine.
Forcing of protective functions is never permissible for an operating unit. All safety
Warning measures should be strictly enforced in conjunction with this procedure.
238 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.7.2 Zoom and Pan Tools
➢ To pan the block diagram: from anywhere in the diagram, press and hold the right-mouse button. The cursor displays
as a hand to allow you to pan in any direction.
Note While using the Zoom tool, the diagram hyperlinks are active.
Menu Items
Item Description
Block Help Displays a help window for the selected block
Opens the New Trender dialog box. Once you enter a name, Trender opens with the block
Add To Trend automatically added.
Refer to the Trender Instruction Guide (GEI-100795).
Opens the new Watch Window dialog box. Once you enter a name, Watch Window opens
Add to Watch
with the block automatically added.
Toggles the display of description text for the block. This text is the most effective way to
Show Description on Diagram
document a block, as the text stays attached to the block when the diagram is rearranged.
Edit Block Pins Displays the Edit Block Pin Connections dialog box.
Unhide all Pins Causes the pins to display
Use Status When enabled, uses the status of each input to calculate the status of each output
Add Pin Group If selected, adds additional inputs
Remove Empty Pin Groups Removes empty inputs
Show boolean logic as Rung (RUNG blocks) displays Boolean logic for the block
Displays the RLD Editor
Edit Ladder Logic
Refer to the section Rung Editor.
Copy Copy a block
Paste Paste the copy to the diagram
Cut Cut a block from the diagram
Delete Delete a block from the diagram
Bring to Front Reorder blocks, causing them to display above or below all other blocks and shapes on
Send to Back the diagram when overlap occurs.
Insert whatever is on the clipboard but sets the run order of the blocks to occur
Paste After
immediately after the right-clicked block.
240 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.9 Pin Connection
Pins represent block inputs and outputs. Parameters are always inputs and are usually constant values that control block
operation. Most parameters are drawn on the block diagram beneath the block; Typically, they do not display if they are set to
the initial default value.
➢ To connect a single pin: from the Block Diagram Editor, double-click a pin.
Note Press Enter while entering text to select the next pin on the block, allowing rapid entry of connections.
3. Select the Connection column to display a drop-down list that includes Browse Globals and Browse Locals. Any
enumerated values that are legal for the selected pin also display in the drop-down list. Select an option to display the
Select a Variable dialog box.
All block pin connection changes take effect immediately. (The Edit Block Pin Connections dialog box does not contain an
OK nor a Cancel button.)
➢ To reverse any changes: from the Component Editor Edit menu, select Undo.
242 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.10 Toggle Live Data Layers
To reduce information clutter in the online block diagram you can toggle live data or variable names on and off using various
toolbar buttons.
➢ To toggle between live variables and values: from the diagram Layer toolbar, click the down arrow and select the
desired action.
Variable only:
Value Over Variable displays the live value larger than the variable:
Variable Over Value displays the variable name larger than the live
value:
Variable Inline with Value both display larger and may overlap other
shapes in the diagram:
244 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.11 Modify Live Values
If you are online with a controller and the controller is not in Lock mode, you can change the current value stored in a
variable. Optionally, you can also force the new value to prevent programs defined in block diagrams from overwriting your
choices.
Forcing of control logic for an operating process is strongly discouraged. Logic forcing
procedures can result in personal injury or death, if not strictly followed. Only
adequately trained personnel should modify any programmable machine.
Forcing of protective functions is never permissible for an operating unit. All safety
Warning measures should be strictly enforced in conjunction with this procedure.
➢ To change the value of a variable: from the Software tab (any place variables are used), double-click a variable
value to display the Send Value dialog box and change it as needed.
Boolean Values
Click Send to
send the New
Value to the
Enter a value to
be added to or controller.
subtracted from
the variable. Click to increase
or decrease the
variable by the
Select Force delta value and
Value to prevent send to the
selected value controller.
from being
overwritten.
Numerical Values
Array Values
246 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.12 Shape Drawing Tools
Drawing tools allow you to customize a block diagram. The drawing tools create shapes, which are elements of graphics or
text that provide additional visual information on a drawing sheet. They are accessed from the Block Diagram Editor toolbar.
The Variable Rail Tool arranges inputs along the left side of a sheet and outputs along the right side to improve
readability. It inserts a variable reference that can be wired to a block pin and moved around freely.
Inputs Outputs
Properties
Item Description
Variable Displays the variable represented by the shape
Top Displays the top location of the variable shape
Left Displays the left location of the variable shape
Width Displays the width of the variable shape
On a variable rail display with symbols and cross references that indicate the role of the variable in the
Variables
system
Note The Variable Rail tool is only used in Manual Layout mode. (Refer to the section Layout Modes.) When you select the
Variable Rail tool, a message displays that enables you to switch to this mode.
Local input
Global variable
Undefined variable
EGD variable
Pin callout
I/O
Note The text in the I/O symbol indicates the redundancy for an input.
Connected I/O can be:
• Simplex Input with 1 IONET (S1)
• Simplex Input with 2 IONET (S2)
• Dual Input (D)
• TMR Input (T)
• HotBackup Input (H)
248 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Add Variable Rail
➢ To add a variable rail
1. From the Block Diagram Editor, select the Variable Rail drawing tool.
2. Press and hold the left-mouse button on the block diagram sheet, then drag the mouse until the size and location of the
new variable rail displays.
To define a rectangular
area for the rail, click
and drag the cursor.
Tip � Clicking in the right or left two inches of the sheet docks the rail to the sheet’s edge.
Note Variables from other windows (Watch Windows, Trenders, and such) can be dragged and dropped into a variable rail.
250 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.12.3 Manage Variables on a Rail
Variables attached to a rail can be manipulated in different ways.
➢ To connect variables on a rail to a block pin: drag a variable from the rail and drop it into a block pin to form a
wired connection.
➢ To move variables on a rail: select and drag the variable from the rail to the desired location.
Variable Commands
Command Description
Displays a list of all places that the selected variable is used (hardware I/O, EGD page, and
Go To Where Used
such)
Add To Trend Adds the selected variable to a defined Trender
Add To Watch Adds the selected variable to a defined Watch Window.
Navigates to the location where the variable is defined. It automatically selects the Where Used
Go To Definition
tab in the Component InfoView.
Change Live Value Displays the Change Live Value dialog box (you must be online).
Add To EGD Set the EGD page for the selected variable
252 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.12.6 Rectangle/Ellipse Tools
The Rectangle and Ellipse tools draw simple geometric shapes with configurable line and fill colors.
➢ To add Rectangle or Ellipse: click the desired upper left corner of the shape, drag to the desired lower right corner
and release the mouse button.
Rectangle / Ellipse Tool Properties
Properties Description
Line Color Displays the color of the shape's line
Line Thickness Displays the thickness of the shape's line
Filled When set to True, causes the shape to be filled with the color specified in the Fill Color property
Fill Color Displays the color the shape is filled with when Filled is set to True
Top Displays the top location
Left Displays the left location
Height Displays the height
Note The image file is not embedded in the diagram. All images must be distributed separately from the .xml files for the
diagram.
Tip � To ensure that images can be found when the diagram is moved on the hard disk, avoid hard-coded path names or
mapped drive names. Relative names, such as ...\Metafiles\bom1.wmf are best.
254 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.14 Diagram Settings
The Diagram Settings dialog box allows you to change how the Diagram Editor operates, as well as style options such as
paper size. In most situations, these settings are consistent across all diagrams in a system, but occasionally a particular
drawing may need custom settings. The diagram settings are arranged hierarchically with system-level settings in effect
unless other settings are configured. These settings can be overridden by the device or library settings, which take effect at the
Component Editor level. The user settings, saved on a per-user basis, override the device or library settings, and finally the
diagram settings are saved per diagram and override all other settings.
For example, if the system settings specify the paper size as Letter, the library and user settings specify Use Parent Setting,
and the diagram settings set the paper size to Legal, that diagram displays on legal-size paper while all other diagrams display
on letter-size paper.
➢ To configure diagram settings: from Edit mode, right-click an open area of a diagram and select Diagram
Settings.
Tip � Selecting the Default to parent setting or a dimmed check box indicates that you have no preference at the current
level. The diagram uses the settings from the next level down in the hierarchy.
256 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.15 Rung Editor
Boolean logic functions are added to a block diagram inside special blocks called rung blocks. Rung blocks are named after a
component of a Relay Ladder Diagram (RLD). In an RLD, one or more contacts (which function similarly to a mechanical
relay switch) are connected as a control network for a single coil or output. As the diagram is formed with two vertical buses,
one representing power and one representing ground, the completed diagram resembles a ladder, with each coil and associated
contacts resembling a ladder rung. Rung blocks, like the rungs in a relay ladder diagram, control a single output.
The rung block controls variable values using Boolean logic equations. While you can specify a Boolean logic equation
directly by connecting it to the EQN pin of the rung block, a graphical RLD Editor is also available to simplify the process.
➢ To open the RLD Editor: from a Block Diagram, double-click a Rung Block.
The RLD Editor window consists of both a 16x16 or smaller grid of cells that can contain contacts or wires and a set of tools
used to edit the contents of the cells.
Drag
separators
to add or
remove rows
Displays the
current
equation or
error message
directly or the negation of the variable are added to a ladder diagram using the contact tools.
➢ To add a contact
1. Select the contact tool that matches the type of contact you want to add. The cursor changes to
reflect the selected contact type.
2. Click a cell to add a new contact.
3. Double-click inside the cell above the newly inserted contact to open the Connect Contact dialog box.
5.15.2 Wires
Wires are used to connect contacts to the coil and to each other.
➢ To add a wire: select the Wire tool and click a location on the grid.
Wires can only be drawn vertically or horizontally:
258 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5.15.3 Coils
➢ To connect the coil to a variable: double-click the coil to display the RLD Editor.
➢ To add or remove rows or columns: drag the boundary between any row or column. Blue text indicates the result of
the action.
5.15.5 Errors
You can create rung diagrams in the RLD Editor that do not convert to compatible Boolean logic functions. Typical errors
include not connecting a contact to a variable, creating a wire or contact that is not connected to power and ground, or
creating a short circuit. If you make one of these mistakes, text displays on the status bar to help you resolve the error.
Note When the output equation displays on the status bar, the diagram is correctly drawn and no errors are detected.
➢ To open the Combinational Logic Editor: from the Block Diagram or Tree View, double-click a LOGIC_
BUILDER block or right-click a LOGIC_BUILDER block and select Edit Combinational Logic.
Note The Combinational Logic Editor can remain open while you work in other ToolboxST windows.
260 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Edit block pins Diagram View
Pins
list
Status
bar
Logic gates AND, OR, and NOT can be used in Combinational Logic. If there is an existing equation on the block being
edited, it is automatically converted to a logic diagram. Each + operator becomes an OR gate, each * operator becomes an
AND gate, and each ~ operator becomes a NOT gate. Gates can also be added to the diagram.
Note The position of the gate will change as interconnections are made with Inputs and other gates.
Combinational logic blocks have up to 32 input pin groups. These are added and removed from the block using the block
diagram or Edit Block Pin Connections dialog box. As soon as inputs are changed, the Input List in the Combinational Logic
Editor is updated. Once a pin displays in the Pin List it can be used to make connections to logic gates.
or
4. Click a gate to add a new input to the gate.
Note A Tool Tip displays warnings for connections that cannot be made.
The only output for the equation displays in the pin list as OUT. Only one gate can write to the OUT, and OUT cannot be used
as an input.
The drag-and-drop feature can be used to connect pins on gates. Tool Tips provide feedback on permitted connections. Wires
between gates alter the automatic arrangement of the diagram.
If there are errors within the diagram, an equation will not be calculated and the OK and Apply buttons are grayed. Click the
status bar to display errors.
262 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Selecting an error causes the corresponding gates, wires, and pins to be highlighted. As errors are corrected, they are
automatically removed from the error list. When all errors are resolved, the error list is hidden and the equation displays on
the status bar.
Errors include:
• Unconnected pins
• Unreachable gates, or gates that have no direct or indirect connection to the OUT variable
• Feedback, where the output of a gate is used as input to the same gate or a gate that feeds into the same gate
• Multiple gate outputs connected to a single gate input
• OUT used as an input
• Inputs used as a gate output
264 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6 Mark VIe Component Editor
The Mark VIe Component Editor provides a comprehensive user interface for configuring a Mark VIe controller. The
elements of the configuration are grouped by specific function tabs. Areas of the editor provide various displays, depending
on the currently selected item.
➢ To create a component: from the System Editor Tree View, right-click the system and select Insert New,
Controller, and Mark VIe Controller.
266 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.2 Component Editor
➢ To open the Mark VIe Component Editor: from the System Editor Tree View, double-click the Mark VIe
component.
Tree View
lists the items
that can be
configured.
The list
changes when
a different tab
is selected.
Property
Editor
allows you to
edit the item
currently
selected in
the Tree
View.
Component
InfoView
displays
information
about the
currently
selected item.
➢ To edit the component: select an item in the Tree View. The configuration information displays in the Summary
View and Property Editor.
➢ To edit a property in the Property Editor: select an item by clicking its value field.
Click the drop-down menu button to select a value from a drop-down list.
Note If no button displays, edit the value directly in the corresponding text box on the right side of the Property Editor.
268 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.6 Component InfoView
The Component InfoView contains multiple tabs that provide controller status information.
Log Tip � If there is a build problem, the error is listed on the Log tab. Double-click the error. The input focus goes
to the location in the component configuration where the error occurred.
Status Displays operating state and equality information about the component
Keeps a navigation history for each user session and allows you to return to different places in the
History editor. Each time an item is selected in the Tree View or Summary View, the name of that item is added
to the top of this list.
Finds all uses of a variable within a Library Container
The write icon at the beginning of some lines indicates that the variable is being written at that location.
Where Used
Tip � From the Where Used tab, double-click the desired item. The input focus goes to the view represented by
that line and the item is selected.
Each time a Build is performed, a message displays that allows you to view the Change log.
When Errors or Warnings are present, the Log tab notifies the user by displaying the current count, as well as a description.
Click each button to hide the corresponding item. For example, click Warning to hide the warnings listed in the Log tab;
Click Warnings again to display the warnings in the Log tab.
270 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.6.2 Status Tab
The Status tab provides the controller operating state and equality status. When you are online with the controller, the color
displayed on the Status tab indicates the overall state of the controller. Refer to the section Controller Status for further
details.
Note Some Data Grids, especially those without an Append Row, may not support all available features.
Quickly set a property to the Left-click the row header for the first row to be edited. Then, while pressing the CTRL key,
same value for multiple rows left-click added row headers. After selecting all desired rows, use the Property Editor to
change properties for all selected rows. (Some properties are omitted when a group of rows is
selected, and properties with conflicting values will display no value in the property editor.)
To... Do this:
Resize a column Drag the vertical bar on the right of the column header to a new location.
Quickly remove a single column Right-click the column header and select Hide Column.
Move a column to a different location Drag the column header to a new location.
Sort by a column Click a column header. The column sorts in ascending order. To sort in descending
order, click the column header again.
Reset columns to the original Right-click any column header and select Default Column Organization.
configuration
Add or remove columns Right-click any column header and select Organize Columns to display the
Organize Columns dialog box.
272 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Select a column Click the double arrow
then click the arrow button to add all available
button to add it. columns to the Data Grid.
Select a
column name
and use the up
arrow to move
it to the left-
most side of
the Data Grid.
in the destination grid and select Paste Row(s) to insert the row into its new
location.
Copy and paste multiple rows Left-click the row header for the first source row. Then, while pressing the CTRL key,
left-click added row headers. After selecting all desired rows, continue to hold down the
CTRL key and right-click any selected header. From the shortcut menu, select Copy
Selected/Current Rows to place the rows on the clipboard. Then, right-click the header
for the append row in the destination grid and select Paste Row(s) to insert the rows into
their new location.
Copy and paste a range of two or Click the top left cell of the desired range and drag to the bottom right cell. Right-click the
more cells selected region and select Copy Selected/Current Rows to place the cells on the
clipboard. Then, click the top left cell of the destination range and drag to select the
same number of columns and rows that were copied to the clipboard. Right-click inside
the destination region and select Paste Row(s).
Move rows between data grids Arrange windows on screen so both the source and destination grid are visible. (An
entry in a Tree View is acceptable as a destination). Left click the row header for the first
row. Then, while pressing CTRL, click any added row headers to be moved. Release the
CTRL key and drag a row header to the new data grid.
Add a variable to a block diagram, Arrange windows on screen so both the source grid and a destination block diagram,
Trender window or Watch Window Trender window or Watch Window are visible. Then, drag the row header for the variable
from a data grid to the destination window.
Tip � You can copy and paste rows between different data grids if the columns match by following the above procedures and
navigating to a different data grid before pasting the data.
Tip � Cells in a data grid can also be copied to and pasted from Microsoft Excel. The copied data is stored in .csv format,
which contains no information about column names. To make sure pasted data is placed into the proper columns, do not
change column ordering, and always select the exact destination range in the ToolboxST configuration before pasting data
from Excel.
274 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.8 Controller Settings
➢ To open the Settings window: from the Component Editor, select the Options menu, then select Settings.
Settings Properties
Property Description
Download
When set to True, allows you to download application code to redundant controllers in
Controller Parallel Online Download
parallel
Displays the boot loader in the Download Wizard when it does not have to be
Show Boot Loader
downloaded
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Enable User Configuration of Link When set to True, allows you to configure the link master device on a FOUNDATION
Master Devices Fieldbus segment link
The minimum time between retries of FOUNDATION Fieldbus alert reports. Units are
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Alarm 1/32 ms, (32000 = 1 sec). This applies to the entire device. (Range is 1 to 640000).
Confirm Time Note Setting this value too small may adversely affect the reporting of alerts from
runtime. The recommended value is 640,000.
Linking Device Parameters are
Prevents modifying of linking device parameters
Read-only
I/O Diagnostics
Makes controller I/O diagnostic Alarm events available for automatic Alarm updates in
Enable I/O Diagnostic Alarm Events
the I/O Diagnostic Viewer
PROFIBUS
Show Advanced Importer Screen Displays the advanced importer screen when importing a PROFIBUS configuration
V300
When set to True, allows users to configure the Wind Turbine Control for Wind Farm
Management at the System level using the System menu item Set Wind Turbine
V300 Advanced Options
Control Configuration. For more information, refer to the section System Editor Menus,
listed as a System menu Command item.
6.9 Security
The ToolboxST application provides security based on user-entry passwords. Passwords ensure that only authorized persons
have access rights to view or modify system components. Protected objects can have one or more of these access rights and
each access right can have a different password. Some objects can be password-protected if they are contained in another
parent object, which is protected by its own password(s).
Access Rights
Access Rights Description
Allows you to set Modify Data and Modify Design access rights to pre-defined user roles. Once roles
Access Roles
have been assigned to a protected object, only users with those roles can access the object.
Allows you to make changes to data values associated with an object without changing how it works.
Modify Data For example, it protects the initial value of a variable defined in a controller. The purpose of this right is
generally to keep unauthorized persons from making unsafe changes to settings.
Allows you to change the way a protected object works. For example, this protects block creation and
Modify Design editing of connections within a library block diagram. The purpose of this right is to limit the ability to
change how the system works to authorized persons.
276 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.9.1 Passwords
Whenever you attempt to perform an operation on a protected object, the Enter Password dialog box displays.
Note Passwords are case-sensitive – secret and Secret are not considered to be the same password.
Tip � If you have performed an operation in the ToolboxST application that requires entering a password, it is
recommended to close the protected component when you are done so that an unauthorized user does not gain inappropriate
access.
➢ To clear all passwords and protect the component: from the Device menu, select Restore Password
Protection.
Protection Properties
Property Description
Access Roles Allows you to set modifying data and design rights to previously defined user roles
Allows you to modify data values and forcing of variables
278 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.9.4 Protected Objects
Specific actions governed by each access right depend on the specific component type.
280 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To send an I/O module report
1. From the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click an I/O module and select Troubleshoot and Send Problem Report.
2. When the Send Problem Report dialog box displays, enter information and click OK.
➢ To upgrade a component
After a component has been upgraded, you cannot undo the upgrade. You also cannot
upgrade a component to its current or a previous version.
Attention
1. Install the latest version of the ToolboxST application.
2. Open the ToolboxST application, open the system .tcw file, and double-click a component.
3. From the File menu, select Upgrade, then select the component and appropriate I/O module(s) to upgrade.
To select all I/O modules for upgrade, click the top box in Item column box. From the New column drop -down list,
select the new firmware version .
To select one I/O module, select the box next to the I/ O module name.
Click the document icon next to the
To select multiple I/O modules, press and hold the Ctrl or Shift Key and version to display release notes for the
select each I/O module. selected version .
282 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Click the double-arrow icon and choose to upgrade all selected
components and I/O modules to the most recent version
or
Upgrade all selected I/O modules to the latest version with the
same (matching) I/O and configuration compatibility codes.
(This option applies only to I/O modules.)
284 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4. From the Property Editor, set Enable Auto-Reconfiguration to False.
5. From the toolbar, perform a Build and Download to the Mark VIe controller.
7. From the toolbar, perform a Build and Download to the Mark VIe controller.
8. Repeat these steps for each Mark VIe controller in the system.
286 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.13 Replace I/O Module
➢ To replace the I/O module
1. From the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click the I/O module to be replaced and select Help to display the I/O module
help file.
2. From the help file, refer to the section, Replacement.
A Compare Results: window displays differences between the two selected devices.
288 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.16 Mark VIe Component Menus
Menu Command Use to
Save Save changes to the current system
Print Generate a paper copy of the entire component configuration
Upgrade Change the version of the component support software
Compare the ToolboxST configuration for a controller against the actual configuration
Compare to Controller
downloaded to the controller
File Compare Device by Compare individual program(s) in the ToolboxST configuration for a controller against the
Program(s) same programs in the actual configuration downloaded to the controller
Compare Devices… Compare ToolboxST component configurations
Import an I/O Variable or Configuration report, a Global Variable report, a Block Pin report
Import
from a .csv file, or a Variable Alias report, or Second Language report from a .csv or .xml file
Close End the component editing session and return to the System Editor
Undo Remove the item currently selected in the Tree View
Redo Add a new component to the current system
Cut Cut the selected item in the Tree View
Copy Copy the selected item in the Tree View
Edit
Paste Paste the copied item in the Tree View into the Summary View
Delete Delete the item selected in the Tree View
Find Display the Component Editor for the item currently selected in the Tree View
Bookmarks Mark and toggle between items in the Tree View
Unlinked Programs/User Blocks generates a list of unlinked programs and user blocks
Constants Generate a list of both control constants and undriven variables
Command Event History Display the diagnostic events and command history for this component
Diagnostics Display regular and advanced controller diagnostics, as well as I/O diagnostics and I/O status
290 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Menu Command Use to
Controller Load Profiler Displays the Controller Load Profiler window to monitor controller activities.
I/O CheckOut Verify that Mark VIe I/O points are operational
View the disagreements (for example, exchange vote data and output voting) among
redundant controllers in a TMR or Dual configuration.
Disagreements
292 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
General Tab Configuration Properties (continued)
Property Description
Determines how backup files are handled during the Build and Download commands
Includes:
Controller Backup Option • Automatic (Default): creates backup files in a device.zip file during a Build command, and provides an
option in the Download Wizard to download the device.zip file
• Manual mode: does not create a device.zip file so there is no option to download backup files from the
Download Wizard
Description Functional description of the current controller
Enable Alias Prefix When set to False, the device prefix name is not displayed in CIMPLICITY screens (default is False)
Enable Auto-Reconfiguration When set to False, disables the Auto-Reconfiguration feature (default is True)
Time of the Build command performed after the most recent major change. (Major changes require the
Major Revision
controller to be restarted after download.)
Time of the Build command performed after the most recent minor change (minor changes do not require a
Minor Revision
controller restart)
Name of the current controller. It is read-only in the Mark VIe Component Editor, and can only be changed
Name
from the System Editor
Determines how the Network Time Protocol client synchronizes the controller time
Includes:
• Configuration Manual Override: When set to True, displays the Mode property that allows you to
override the system NTP settings and use the local device settings only
NTP Configuration
• Mode options include:
− Disabled: controller does not perform any time synchronization
− Broadcast: client listens for NTP broadcasts on the network
− Unicast: client uses the specified servers to obtain the time
Platform Type of hardware on which the Mark VIe control code is started
Read-only property that reflects the version of the Mark VIe product associated with the selected component.
Product Version
The version number is set when the configuration is first created, and is updated with each product upgrade.
Profiler Enabled Determines if the Controller Profilers are enabled
− Save Component
− Rename Component
− Build
− Download
− Download DDR
− Controller Setup
− Compress Variables
− Compress NOVRAM
Protection − Change Network settings
− Change I/O pack and terminal board Barcode or Hardware Form
Maintain Component is intended work in combination with Modify Design and Modify Data protection to lock
down all changes to the controller except the above list.
294 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
General Tab Configuration Properties (continued)
Property Description
Determines the frame period in ms. A frame is the basis for Mark VIe scheduling; the frame period determines
Frame Period the fastest scan time, the rate at which first class I/O is scanned, and the fundamental frequency for the
scheduling of all tasks.
Wind Farm Management System†
Enable Wind Farm When set to True, allows a wind turbine to be controlled by the wind farm controller
Management System When set to False, a major configuration difference occurs that forces an offline load.
Primary Wind Farm
Management Server IP Primary IP address of the Wind Farm Management Server
Address
Receive Multicast Address IP address of the multicast group to receive from
Secondary Wind Farm
Management Server IP Secondary IP Address of the Wind Farm Management Server
Address
Wind Control‡
Enable Group Messaging When set to True, enables multicast messaging services
Maximum number of wind turbines for this Wind Control. If this number is reduced after the turbines have
Max Wind Farm Turbines connected, those turbines are disconnected from Wind Control when the timeout parameter set in the Wind
Turbine Timeout (sec) property is reached.
Send Multicast Address IP Address of the multicast group to send to
Wind Farm Master Number Master plant number for this Wind Control
Wind Farm Update Time (ms) Time, in ms, to update all wind turbines
Wind Turbine Timeout (sec) Time, in seconds, at which timeout data is received from the wind turbines
† These properties are only available when the Wind Turbine Control (1.5 MW) application of the Mark VIe controller is running.
‡ These properties are only available when Wind Control application of the Mark VIe controller is running.
Note These properties are displayed in the footer section of logic sheets. Refer to the section Customize Sheet Borders.
296 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.17.3 Password Protection
If passwords were set for this component, changing the following properties requires a password.
Note The first time you attempt a password-protected function, the Enter Password dialog box displays. All protected
functions performed during the remainder of the ToolboxST session do not require re-entering the password.
6.17.4 Attributes
Attributes are device-level values that affect how the configuration is generated. Select the Attributes item in the General tab
Tree View to edit controller attributes in the Summary View data grid.
Attribute Columns
Column Description
Name Unique identifier for the attribute
Description Stores added comments about the attribute
Value displays and modifies the current attribute value
➢ To open the Attribute Value Editor: from an attribute Data Grid, select a Value Cell and click the ellipsis button.
Name of the
attribute being
modified
If checked, the
attribute values
are restricted to
an enumeration
(a predefined set
of allowable
values).
To add a value to
the enumeration,
enter the Name,
and a Description
(optional) and click
OK.
298 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.17.6 Network Adapters
The network adapters in the controller display as items in the Tree View. The number of adapters depends on the controller’s
hardware type and configuration. In most applications, Mark VIe controllers have five network adapters. The first adapter
provides connectivity to the Unit Data Highway (UDH), and any additional adapters are used for I/O networks. Some adapter
properties may be disabled in certain configurations.
The following table describes the properties displayed in the Property Editor when a Network Adapter item is selected in the
Tree View.
Network Adapter Properties
Property Description
Adapter Settings
Enabled If set to False, disables the selected network adapter. Set to True to enable the network adapter.
Host Name Internet Protocol (IP) host name for the selected network adapter
IP Address IP Address for the selected network adapter
Wire Speed Speed of the network to which the selected adapter is connected
Network Settings
Sets the network connected to the selected adapter. (Available networks are determined in the System
Network
Editor.)
Controls which portions of the IP address are deemed significant.
Subnet Mask This property is usually unavailable; for I/O networks, the subnet mask is always a fixed value, and for
other networks defined at the system level, the subnet mask is configured in the System Editor.
Note For more information on EFA, refer to the Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Control Systems Volume II: System Guide for
General-purpose Applications (GEH-6721_Vol_II), the section UCSC Embedded Field Agent (EFA).
For information on the virtual network, refer to GEH-6721_Vol_II, the section Virtual Network.
The following table describes the properties displayed in the Property Editor when a Virtual Network Adapter item is selected
in the Tree View.
Virtual Network Adapter Properties
Property Description
Adapter Settings
Enabled If set to False, disables the selected Virtual Network Adapter. Set to True to enable the network adapter.
IP Address Default IP address for the selected network adapter (not usually changed from default setting)
Network Settings
Network EFA (typically the only type of network)
Subnet Mask Default subnet mask for the network (not usually changed from default setting)
300 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.17.8 Auto-Reconfiguration
The ToolboxST application provides a feature called Auto-Reconfiguration, which downloads the necessary configuration
files when an I/O pack is replaced. It requires no user interaction once power is restored to the I/O pack after replacement.
The Auto-Reconfiguration feature is enabled from the General tab Property Editor.
The Auto-Reconfiguration feature applies only to I/O packs; it is not available for controllers or terminal boards.
The OPC UA server currently only supports anonymous connections. If you are
deploying a Mark VIe controller in a secure state, it is recommended that you set all
variables available through OPC UA to Read-only access, using the External Access
property in the ToolboxST application.
Attention
Note This feature is not available for the UCPA or Mark VIeS UCSBS1A controller.
Use of the OPC UA server will reduce controller idle time, which is directly affected by the following:
• Number of clients
• Sampling intervals of the OPC UA client
• Type and number of variables being used
302 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Note From the OPC UA client connected to the controller (for example, Trender), enter opc.tcp://192.168.101.111:4841
where 192.168.101.111 is the IP address of the controller and 4841 is the port used for the server.
The OPC UA server makes a subset of variables available to OPC UA clients. Set the variable’s Download Info property to
True to make a variable available through OPC UA.
4. Download to the controller and verify that it is online and in the controlling state.
After the OPC UA server has been enabled and the clients are configured and requesting data, the controller idle time should
be observed to ensure adequate performance.
• Make fewer variables available through the OPC UA server by setting Download Info property to False for as many
variables as practical.
• From the client, decrease the number of variables requested or increase the sampling interval.
• From the client, disable OPC UA to reduce the total number of clients requesting data from the Mark VIe controller.
Typical Idle Time Starting at 95.4 with UCSBH4A Controller and 500 ms fixed sampling interval
Typical Idle Time Starting at 95.4 with UCSBH4A Controller and 250 variables
304 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Typical Idle Time Starting at 93.1 with UCSA Controller and 500 ms fixed sampling interval
Typical Idle Time Starting at 93.1 with UCSA Controller and 250 variables
Note The first time you attempt a password-protected function, the Enter Password dialog box displays. All protected
functions performed during the remainder of the ToolboxST session do not require re-entering the password.
306 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.18.2 Network Redundancy
A controller can have one, two or three I/O networks in a simplex, dual or TMR configuration. The configuration of network
redundancy is separate from controller redundancy and I/O module redundancy.
➢ To change the network redundancy: from the Hardware tab Tree View, select the Distributed I/O item.
308 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.18.4 Add I/O Modules
➢ To add an I/O module: from the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click Distributed I/O and select Add Module.
Select an I/O
module type. The
available types
are based on I/O
pack redundancy.
Click Next.
Enter the
Terminal Board
Position.
Bar Code is the unique hardware bar code for the I/O terminal board.
Position is an identifier consisting of 3 or 4 alphanumeric characters that identifies the location of the I/O terminal board
within the cabinet. This information is on a label next to the I/O terminal board. Note: If the position is left blank, it will
default to the module ID.
310 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.18.5 Shared IONet
Beginning with ControlST* V04.06, sharing data between two controller sets on a single Ethernet input/output network
(Shared IONet) is available for some Mark* controllers. Beginning with ControlST V07.06, some Shared IONet Groups may
contain up to four controller sets (in accordance with supported controller combinations). With Shared IONet, an owner
controller configures its owned I/O modules, Writes outputs, Reads Sequence of Events (SOE), and provides diagnostic
information. Owned I/O modules are attached to the owner controller that can configure and Write outputs to them, and they
obtain IP addresses from their owner controller. Only the owner controller can Write outputs for an I/O module it owns.
Note A controller set is a group of controllers (based on redundancy) with a set of owned I/O modules. In the ToolboxST*
System Editor Summary View, a controller set displays as a single controller.
A shared I/O module sends field device inputs to both its owner controller and to all consumer controllers. A consumer
controller receives the field device inputs from the shared I/O modules that are owned by the other owner controller. The
exception to this is a Mark VIeS Safety controller. The Mark VIeS only receives inputs from its own safety-certified I/O
modules. The ToolboxST application is used to configure the controller sets. The computer with ToolboxST communicates
with the I/O devices through a software gateway function residing in the controllers.
Only the following controller combinations are supported by Shared IONet:
• One Mark VIeS Safety controller and up to three Mark VIe controllers
• One MarkStat controller and one Mark VIe controller
• Up to four Mark VIe controllers
Note The UCPA controller platform should not be used in a Shared IONet system.
In a Shared IONet group containing one Mark VIe controller and one Mark VIeS Safety controller, the Mark VIeS Safety I/O
module inputs can be shared between both controllers. However, the safety controller only receives inputs from its owned
safety-certified I/O modules. The safety controller continues to send outputs using a broadcast addressing scheme.
In a Shared IONet group with either two Mark VIe controllers or one Mark VIe controller, either controller can receive each
other's inputs and send outputs in a peer-to-peer communication. The Mark VIe controller delivers outputs to I/O modules
through a multicast packet that contains a specific section for each output device. Multicast is the delivery of a message or
information to a group of destination IONet devices simultaneously in a single transmission from the source. Mark VIe
controllers use multicast addressing to send outputs to I/O modules unless legacy hardware requires otherwise.
After I/O modules have been added to both owning controllers, inputs can be shared to the other Mark VIe controller. Inputs
from Mark VIe controllers can not be shared to a Mark VIeS Safety controller.
Select I/O
modules and
click OK.
312 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.18.6 Organize I/O Modules
I/O modules can be organized into Groups. The Add Group menu option displays only when group mode is selected.
➢ To create a Group: from the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click Distributed I/O and select Add Group.
Enter a
Description
(optional).
2. When the cursor changes to a symbol, release the mouse button to move the module.
314 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
When you select an I/O module from the Tree View, the Summary View provides tabs. The tabs displayed vary according to
the I/O module. The tabs that display for all modules include:
• Summary
• Variables
• Diagnostics
• Status
Note For information about the settings configured by I/O pack-specific tabs, refer to the I/O pack documentation.
The Summary tab displays a graphical overview of the selected I/O module.
Note Some infrequently used parameters are classified as Advanced, and are hidden by default. To display Advanced
parameters, click the Show/Hide Advanced button on the toolbar.
Note For some I/O modules, these tabs are split into more module-specific input/output tabs that better define their function.
The Variables tab displays available variables from the I/O module that have no physical endpoint. These variables exist
only internally in the I/O module, and can be connected to another variable for use in code.
The Extra Circuits tab contains input/output variables found on the I/O module terminal boards, which can be associated
with the application software. For some I/O modules, these tabs are split into more I/O module-specific input/output tabs that
better define their function.
The Input and Output tabs contain input/output variables found on the I/O module terminal boards, which can be
associated with the application software.
The Diagnostics tab allows you to check Alarms and errors on I/O packs. Each I/O pack has a unique set of diagnostic
signals that can be monitored.
Inactive Alarm(s)
Active Alarm(s)
316 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The Status tab allows you to check the I/O pack version and network communication status.
Note A software item (programs, tasks, and such) must be defined in the Software tab before this feature can be performed.
➢ To attach a software variable to an I/O variable: from the Data Grid, select the Variables tab.
318 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Click Yes to
assign the
variable to the
software item
You can also attach a variable by entering the variable name in the Connected Variable column and pressing Enter. If the
variable name entered is a defined variable, it continues to display and the cursor moves to the next field. If the variable name
entered is undefined, click Yes when the Undefined Variable dialog box displays.
320 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6. Wait and reset any alarms, if needed.
7. Perform a Build and Download again, if needed.
8. Wait and reset any alarms, if needed.
9. From the Component InfoView Status tab, review the health and equality status of the controller.
The color of the Status tab indicates overall health and equality status of the controller, including its associated I/O hardware.
A major difference in controller equality means that the configuration in the ToolboxST application is different from the
controller configuration.
• Green indicates that the ToolboxST configuration and the controller configuration are equal.
• Orange indicates the presence of inequalities or diagnostic warnings.
• Red indicates that the configuration in the ToolboxST system, which includes base load, firmware, application code,
and I/O module configuration, is significantly different from the component configuration (a Download will correct
this).
Note Refer to GEH-6721_Vol_I, the chapter Troubleshooting for further assistance. For example, if a particular download
fails, this may be fixed by selecting the pack individually from the download wizard and trying again.
➢ To download parameters to a module: from the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click the module to be
downloaded and select Download Parameters.
Module parameters directly affect the operation of the controller and associated I/O
modules. To reduce the risk of improper operation or damage to the unit, always
check the Compare Parameters dialog box before downloading new parameter values
to a component.
Caution
➢ To open the Compare Parameters dialog box: from the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click a module to
compare and select Compare Parameters.
➢ To upgrade an I/O module: from the Tree View, right-click the I/O module and select Upgrade.
Note You must be online to view all diagnostics, with the exception of reports.
Normal
Inactive Alarm(s)
Active Alarm(s)
Link broken
Link error
Link warning
Link information
Note Place the mouse over the icon to display Tool Tips.
324 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.18.14.2 Create Module Report
➢ To view or print an I/O module report: from the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click Distributed I/O and select
Create Module Report and the report type. Or, from the Summary View, right-click the I/O pack and select Create
Module Report and the desired report.
I/O-related reports include:
• Alarm
• Revision
• Communication
• Hardware
Each report contains configuration or diagnostic details about the I/O hardware.
Note For more information, refer to the section Mark VIe Reports.
Note The first time you attempt a password-protected function, the Enter Password dialog box displays. All protected
functions performed during the remainder of the ToolboxST session do not require re-entering the password.
326 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.19.2 Add Program
➢ To add a program, program group, or existing program: from the Tree View, right-click Programs and select
from the shortcut menu.
If adding a
program group,
enter a name
and click OK
Note The Add Existing Program command reads an .xml file from another system or controller into the current controller.
328 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
OR
When the controller is online, double-click the live value of the variable _Enable for the task, select True to enable the task
or False to disable the task, then click Send & Close.
Disabled
330 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
If the task is disabled and selected in the Tree View, the Summary View displays the text Task Disabled.
Task Disabled
• Function block libraries describe software that is part of the controller firmware
• User block libraries combine these function blocks into user blocks
332 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.19.6 Execution Groups
Execution Groups control how blockware is executed on multi-core controllers. An Execution Group specifies on which core
the tasks in a program are executed and a frame multiplier provides an additional scheduling factor for the tasks in the
Execution Group. The number of allowed Execution Groups depends on the controller platform. The first core (Core 0) on a
multi-core controller has a single, fixed Execution Group called the Primary Execution Group, which runs at controller frame
rate. Additional Execution Groups may be added to any Secondary core.
Note For more information on the frame multiplier, refer to the section Frame Timeline Profiler.
2. From the <Component Name> Execution Groups dialog box, select a Secondary Execution Group from the list, select
the button corresponding to the appropriate action (Add, Remove, Edit), then click OK to perform that action.
Note The Primary Execution Group will always be in Read-only mode because it is a fixed group that cannot be modified or
removed.
334 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
It is not possible to undo this command.
Attention
➢ To instance a user block: from the Tree View, right-click a user block and select Instance.
Note Variables can also be added in the Summary View by directly editing the append row of the variable grid.
336 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.19.9.3 User Block Properties
The Property Editor for a user block displays slightly different information depending on whether it is a task or just a user
block inserted under another user block. Tasks contain scheduling information, but a user block contained within another user
block does not.
User Block Properties
Property Description
Unlink Unlinks the user block from the definition
BlockType Name of the user block definition in the library from which this user block started
Description Description of this user block
Name Name of this user block
Protection Expands to show the access rights for this user block definition
Version User-defined version of a user block
Execution Order Sets the order of execution in the program
Frame Multiplier Number of frames at which the user block runs
Schedule Offset Offset from beginning of frame at which the user block runs
➢ To unlink a program: from the Tree View, right-click a program item and select Unlink Permanently.
The linked icon next to the item in the Tree View changes and the program is unlinked from the library.
Library Type Name of the library definition that this program came from
Properties control the Access Roles, Modify Data, Modify Design, and View Design
Protection
permissions for this program
Task
Block Type Name of the user block definition in the library from which this task started
Help File Allows you to locate the Help file by clicking the ellipsis button
Help Text Locally defined Help that supersedes the global Help
Properties control the Access Roles, Modify Data, Modify Design, and View Design
Protection
permissions for this task
Revision History Allows you to edit the revision history by opening the Edit Text dialog box
Schedule Offset Offset from beginning of frame at which the task runs
User Block
Block Type Name of the library block of which the selected block is an instance
Unique identifier that allows the block to be referenced from other locations in the ToolboxST
Instance Name
application
Instance Script Causes the script to run when the block is instanced
338 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Tree View Item Properties (continued)
Programs
Selected Pin Pin currently highlighted in the diagram
Show Description When set to True, displays the description of the selected block
Enable When set to True, enables variables for the selected block
Version Version number for the source of the selected block instance
Execution Order Determines when this block is started
➢ To add a variable to a program: from the Software tab, expand the Programs item.
User block and task variables are Local by default, and display within the associated user block item in the Tree View.
340 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Data Grid Variable Properties (continued)
Property Description
Appearance
Determines when the pin displays on the block diagram:
• Never: Never show the pin on the block diagram, but it shows up in the Block Pin Connections window
Visibility
• Used: Show the pin when connected to something
This property is only
• Always: Always show the pin on the block diagram
applicable for
• Hidden: Never show the pin anywhere. Depreciated in favor of Internal, but has same effect.
Libraries.
• Internal: Never show the pin anywhere. Used for internal states like totalizer counters.
• Parameter: Only show the pin in the block's parameter list (ControlST V03.03 and later)
Format
Default upper limit for displays on the HMI (for example, bar graph or trending displays). If a Format Spec has been
Display High Limit
specified and this display-high property is not specified, the Format Spec Engineering Max is used.
Default lower limit for displays on the HMI (for example, bar-graph or trending displays). If a Format Spec has been
Display Low Limit
specified and this display-low property is not specified, the Format Spec Engineering Min is used.
Display Screen Default HMI screen for this variable
Format Specifications can be assigned to variables. These are system owned format specifications that are unique for
Format Spec
each measurement system and are grouped into sets.
HMI Resource Allows you to configure access and visibility of variable and alarm data
Determines the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
Precision This is the default for precision when displaying the number on HMI. If a Format Spec has been specified and this
precision attribute is not specified, the Format Spec Precision is used.
Engineering units. If a Format Spec has been specified and Units is not specified, the Format Spec Units is used with
Units
the SDB version of the HMI device. This attribute is not used. Only the format specification's Units string is used.
If set to True, allows the Entry High Limit and Entry Low Limit of a linked numeric variable to be modified
The Override Entry Limits property is only available for numeric variables contained within a linked program,
Override Entry Limits
task, or user block, with the Allow Entry Limits property set to True.
Allow Entry Limits Override must be set True in a Library module for this feature to be available.
Allow Entry Limits If set to True, enables the Override Entry Limits property for the library variable inside a device.
Override The Allow Entry Limits property is only available for numeric global variables inside a Library Container.
General
Variable tag name that can be customized by the user. Aliases are available to the WorkstationST component and the
HMI.
ToolboxST may also be placed in Alias mode so the Alias is displayed instead of the variable name in logic sheets,
Alias
properties, and dialogs. This allows standard application code to be created in one variable naming convention, but
edited and viewed in a second naming convention as needed. (Refer to the section Variable Names and Aliases for
further details.)
Array Number of elements in this array variable
Connection Allows a variable to be connected to another variable
Program variable description in Primary language
Description
This property displays if only one (Primary) language is configured.
Enumerations Values represented in separate CSV records
Fully qualified name of the variable. For example, a variable name gas_fuel_opt in a user block named Config under
Full Name
the Program CORE would have a full name of CORE.Config.gas_fuel_opt.
Inherit Description of
Connected Variable
This property is only If set to True, causes the selected pin to inherit the description of any connected global variable
applicable for
Libraries.
• Not Logged
Controller Collected • Average Linear: This is a linear average {1/N * sum(values)}
• Average Linear Angle: This is an average for angle based variables; it takes into account 0 degrees equals/360
degrees wrap-around for angles.
• Average Cosine Phi: This average calculation is for power factor (cos phi). It effectively calculates the average
of the arccosine of each of the data values during the interval. The value returned is the cosine of this average.
• Data Snapshot: This selection is for end-of-interval values. The last value captured during the specified interval
is returned.
This property is only displayed if the Controller Collected property is set to something other than Not Logged.
Selects the type of collection for a Compressed Data Log (CDL) variable. Options are:
• General: Data is recorded at uncompressed one second resolution (SecRes) for up to 24 hours and in
Data Class compressed form for longer periods (MinAna). The data is available through the CDL’s HTTP API.
• Protected: Data is recorded at one second rates and compressed and is available only through the CDL’s
secure API.
• Both: Data is recorded in both the General and Protected logs and is available through the HTTP and protected
APIs.
If set to True, prevents modify-variable commands from being written into the Command and Event Log (CEL) (default
CEL Command Filter
is False)
342 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Data Grid Variable Properties (continued)
Property Description
Enables the automatic collection by the Historian when:
Historian Deadband Boolean and set to Logged on Change
Analog and set to 0 or higher
Historian Deadband
Defines the deadband value as either engineering units or percent of range
Definition
Enables the automatic collection by the Recorder when:
Recorder Deadband Boolean and set to Logged Continuous or Logged on Change
Analog and set to 0 or higher
Recorder Deadband
Defines the deadband value as either engineering units or percent of range
Definition
Usage
Allows a variable to be designated as a configuration setting.
When set to False, the variable is not a control constant (default is False). If set to True, the variable is a control
Control Constant
constant and the live value can be modified. When set to ReadOnly, the variable is a control constant but the live
value cannot be modified.
If set to True, downloads extended information to the controller that is used by the web server, as well as other
Download Info processes. For example, to view alarms on the touchscreen, the Download Info parameter must be set to True for
each alarmed variable.
EGD Page Used to assign the variable to an Ethernet Global Data Page
Used primarily for EGD:
ReadOnly variable can be read on EGD
External Access
ReadWrite variable can be written to through EGD
NoAccess variable cannot be changed with the ToolboxST application
The variable's global name prefix type (None, Full, Block, Program, Task).
This controls the form of the global name that displays on the EGD page. For example, the name for variable IGVA in
user block VG_Health in task Task1 in program CORE would display (depending on the Global Name Prefix) as:
None: IGVA
Global Name Prefix
Full: CORE.VG_Health.IGVA
Block: VG_Health.IGVA
Program: Task1.IGVAv
Task: Task1.IGVAv
Scope of the variable (Local, Member, or Global):
Local variables can only be used in the program or user block in which it is created.
Scope Global variables can be used in other programs and user blocks. A variable must be Global to be transmitted over
EGD.
Member variables are similar to Local variables, but differ in that they are visible to child tasks and user blocks.
Defines the behavior of pins on a user block:
Usage
Input pins display on the left side of the user block
This property is only
Output pins display on the right side of the user block
applicable for
State pins display on the right side of the user block
Libraries.
Constant entry is a number; no live data is provided for this pin
Virtual HMI Point If set to True, imports the variable into the HMI as a virtual point
Entry High Limit Default upper limit for setpoint entry on the HMI
Entry Low Limit Default lower limit for setpoint entry on the HMI
Is Critical When set to True, the variable is marked as critical to safety or operation, and must be driven and driving a block pin.
From the
Summary View,
select a variable.
From the Type
drop-down list,
select the
variable type.
Or:
from the
Property
Editor,
select Type
and the
variable type
344 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.19.13 Visualization Type
The Visualization Type property configures the display view for graphic files (HTML or WMF) that represent live variable
data. Users can select the form of graphic display from the selected file directory (Path to Visualization). There are three
options available for graphic display:
• Replace the blockware detail view for the task or user block with a graphic
• Add the graphic as a Sheet tab in the block’s detail view
• Display the graphic in a separate window using the eyeglasses button on the toolbar
346 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.19.14 Alarm Configuration
Alarms report abnormal conditions and trips, with descriptions and high-resolution time tags to identify the origin of the event
for troubleshooting. The operator can see and react to alarms and events from any of the equipment within their jurisdiction.
The WorkstationST Alarm Server gathers alarms from the controllers or other sources and makes them available to alarm
clients, such as the CIMPLICITY and WorkstationST Alarm Viewer. The ToolboxST Controller Diagnostics View displays
errors and warnings that occur in the hardware component that may cause improper functionality or communication issues.
Using the ToolboxST software, variables can be configured to generate an alarm or event when designated thresholds or
inputs are exceeded and indicate issues with control system equipment and operation.
Five alarm types can occur in the Mark VIe control system:
• Diagnostic Alarms
• Process Alarms
• Hold List Alarms
• Events
• Sequence of Events (SOE)
Beginning with ControlST V04.04, controller configurations must not exceed the
following limits. If these limits are exceeded, reduce the number of configured Process
Alarms, Events, and Holds.
Note For further details, refer to the Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Controls Systems Volume I: System Guide (GEH-6721_Vol_I),
the chapter Alarm Overview, and the Workstation Alarm Server Instruction Guide (GEI-100626).
Parent and child Alarms can be exported using Alarm Rationalization. Parent alarms only can be imported from a .csv file.
Corresponding child Alarms are automatically placed in the configuration.
348 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.19.15 Table Definitions
Many complex mechanical interactions can be modeled using lookup tables. The controller implements these tables using
table definitions. A table definition is similar to a signal definition, in that both are similarly named and used in instruction
blocks. Table definitions are multi-dimensional variables used on specific interpolator blocks. They have either one or two
input arrays and a matching one or two-dimensional output array. A block input is interpolated against the input array or
arrays, and an output is interpolated from the corresponding output array. A single data structure is provided for this function
instead of a block so that it can be better identified, maintained, and tracked.
Table definitions have special Version and ID text fields. The format for a table definition consists of a name, note,
identification string, revision string, engineering units (EUs), data array dimensions, adjust flag, minimum and maximum Z
values, and data. The data consists of one or two independent arrays (X and Y) and a dependent array (Z). Tables with a single
independent array are sometimes called uni-variant (2D) tables and consist of X and Z linear arrays of the same length. Tables
with two independent arrays are sometimes called bi-variant (3D) tables and consist of X and Y linear arrays and a Z
two-dimensional array.
Table definitions are added to a Program in the Tree View and display in the Summary View. They are normally imported
from a .csv file into ToolboxST by engineering and can be exported to a .csv file, modified, and reimported.
350 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To import a table definition to .csv file
1. From the Software tab Tree View, right-click a Program and select Import Table .CSV File to display the Table
Definition dialog box.
2. Select the desired table definition file and click Open to insert the Table Definition
.csv file into the program.
The Summary View displays all user blocks and associated scheduling information in that program. The Frame Multiplier and
Schedule Offset fields can be changed from this view.
➢ To change the frame multiplier or the schedule offset: from the Summary View, click the Frame Multiplier
or Schedule Offset cell and select from the drop-down list.
Note Since the schedule offset depends on the frame multiplier, it is possible to select a frame multiplier for which the
current schedule offset is invalid. This causes a validation error when you build the application.
352 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIe Component Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 353
Public Information
DDR Properties
Property Description
Name User-defined description for this DDR, which is used for the filename
Description User-defined description for this DDR
If set to True, automatically re-enables the DDR after 60 seconds once it is uploaded.
Auto Enable
If Auto Enable is set to True, all manual enable inputs are ignored.
Controls how and when the data is collected. Options are:
Normal causes the DDR to collect pre-samples before a trigger event, and continues to collect
data until the Enable option transitions to False or the collection fills the buffer.
Circular causes the DDR to collect data indefinitely until the Enable option transitions to False.
Buffer Control
The buffer will be filled with the newest samples. No trigger is used.
Only causes the DDR to evaluate the trigger during each operation, and only collect data when
the trigger condition is satisfied. Data is collected until the Enable option transitions to False or
the collection fills the buffer.
Frame Period Multiplier Extends the sampling period by this value. The base sampling period is the frame period.
Options are:
Manual allows you to manually upload the DDR.
Upload Type
Automatic is an automatic upload by the data collection.
Trip is an automatic upload by the data collection, then added to the trip log.
Setup variable that enables the DDR. If set to True and the Auto Enable property is set to False,
the DDR is enabled for capture. This allows the application code to enable and disable data
Enable
collection. This is an edge-triggered property. Once a DDR has been stopped, the Enable
property must be toggled False and then True again to re-enable the next capture.
Trigger Setup variable that triggers the DDR
Post-trigger Samples Number of samples collected after the trigger, including the trigger sample
Pre-trigger Samples Number of samples collected before the trigger
Options are:
EQ is the value of the trigger variable, which must be equal to the trigger value.
GT is the value of the trigger variable, which must be greater than the trigger value.
Trigger Comparison Type GE is the value of the trigger variable, which must be greater than or equal to the trigger value.
LT is the value of the trigger variable, which must be less than the trigger value.
LE is the value of the trigger variable, which must be less than or equal to the trigger value.
NE is the value of the trigger variable, which must not be equal to the trigger value.
Value compared to the value of the trigger variable to determine the presence of a trigger.
For Boolean trigger variables, the only valid values for the trigger value are 1.0 for TRUE and 0.0
Trigger Comparison Value
for FALSE. If an analog trigger variable of a different data type is configured, it may be possible
to specify a trigger value that cannot be exactly represented by the trigger variable.
Trigger condition setting that drives trigger evaluation. Options are:
Trigger Type Edge is triggered on the rising edge of the trigger variable.
Level is triggered on the true condition of the trigger variable.
Protection Provides access rights
354 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.20.2 Status Variables
Status variables, which indicate the status of the associated DDR, are used to determine when to upload the data. Status
variables are always integers, and are automatically defined and placed on the EGD status page.
Variables can be added to a DDR. When a trigger occurs, these variables are collected by the buffer and subsequently
uploaded by the Recorder or Trender. Each variable is sampled for the total number of samples configured. This means that if
the DDR is set up to record 100,000 samples with three variables assigned, 300,000 items will be acquired. Up to 96 variables
can be assigned to each DDR.
Note There is a 12 MB size limit on the memory that can be allocated to the DDRs. If this memory allocation is exceeded,
an error is reported during validation.
➢ To add a variable
1. From the DDR tab Tree View, right-click the DDR and select Add Variable.
2. Select the desired variables and click OK.
DDRs can be updated separately from the application code download.
➢ To update a DDR: from the Device menu, select Download and Update Dynamic Data Recorder.
Note DDRs cannot be downloaded if there is a major difference in the device. In this case, the application code must be
downloaded.
➢ To import or export a DDR: from the DDR tab Tree View, right-click the desired DDR and select Import
Configuration or Export Configuration.
Note If the .xml file being imported contains the formatting flags %n, it is replaced by the component Design Memo (DM)
number. This is a GE Power Systems project number and can be edited by selecting the General tab and Requisition Info.
4. Create a User Block in the program, and add two FuncGen blocks from the Data Collection section. Set up the pins
on the two blocks as follows. FuncGen1 is set up as a Sine wave generator and FuncGen2 is set up as a Triangle wave
generator.
5. Add the two variables SineOut and TriangleOut to the DDR. Set the Frame Period Multiplier to 3, which means a
sample is collected every 120 ms. The base frame period is typically 40 ms. Set the PreTrigger samples to 20 and the
PostTrigger samples to 100, so that the entire capture takes 14.4 seconds.
356 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The DDR is enabled with the DDREnable variable and the Trigger uses the DDRTrigger variable. The DDR is triggered
when the DDREnable is True and the DDRTrigger is greater than or equal to 5.
9. From the View menu, select Trenders to add a new trend and upload the capture buffer.
10. From the Trender window, select Edit and Add Traces to display the Trender - Add Trace Wizard.
11. From the wizard, select Capture Buffer/Dynamic Data Recorder to select the DDR to upload.
360 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.21 Ethernet Global Data (EGD) Tab
The EGD protocol allows you to share information globally between controller components in a networked environment.
EGD allows one controller component, referred to as the producer of the data, to simultaneously send information to any
number of peer controller components (consumers) at a fixed periodic rate. This protocol supports a large number of
controller components capable of both producing and consuming information.
Note When the first Produced Page is created, it automatically becomes the default page.
Tip � Any variable defined with $Default as the EGD page name is automatically placed on the currently selected default
page.
➢ To delete a page: from the Tree View, right-click the page to delete and select Delete.
362 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To configure a Produced Page: from the Tree View, expand Ethernet Global Data.
The following table lists the properties that are available when a Produced Page is selected in the Tree View.
364 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.21.3 Page Compression
When a page compression is performed, the variables are located in increasing size order, starting with Booleans, then Words,
Double Words, and finally all other variables. A page compression causes an exchange major signature. Consumers normally
mark the exchange variables as unhealthy until the consumed configuration can be rebound.
➢ To compress a single page: from the Tree View, right-click the page to compress and select Compress.
➢ To compress all Produced Pages in a component: from the Tree View, right-click Produced Pages and
select Compress All.
Tip � If the variable to be added to the EGD page is already in use on the Software tab, you can add the variable without
using the EGD tab. To add a variable from the Software tab, select the desired variable(s) in the Summary View and set the
EGD Page property using either the Summary View or the Property Editor.
➢ To add a variable to a produced page: from the Tree View, right click a Produced Page and select Add
Variable to display the Select a Variable dialog box.
➢ To delete a variable from an EGD Page: from the Summary View, right-click the variable to delete and select
Delete Selected Row(s).
➢ To copy variable information from an EGD Page to the clipboard: from the Summary View, right-click a
variable and select Copy Selection. The data is copied in .csv format.
Note To edit exchange signatures and configuration time, set the Layout Mode property to Manual. The Layout Mode
property displays when a Produced Page is selected in the Tree View.
3. Review the warning about manual Exchange Signature editing and click OK.
4. Make any desired changes to the signatures and configuration time and click OK.
366 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.21.5 EGD Diagnostics
The EGD protocol includes a command mechanism that obtains the status of a Class 2 or higher EGD device. Mark VIe is a
Class 3 EGD device. When any EGD item in the Tree View other than a referenced device is selected, the EGD Statistics
from [Device] tab displays the statistics from the open component. When a Referenced Devices item is selected, the statistics
are obtained from that referenced device, and the name of the tab page changes accordingly.
Filter Toggle defaults to a filtered state. It displays items that have the same name but have a different Producer ID as
the open component.
Delete deletes the selected item(s). If the item(s) were saved as part of the configuration, they can be added again.
The EGD configuration server uses the producer ID to store all the documents for an EGD node.
When a component is saved, the EGD configuration is automatically published to the EGD configuration server. To avoid
unintentional overwriting of data, do not configure more than one .tcw file for a server.
• Compare command compares the component's EGD-produced data configuration with the EGD configuration server’s
content.
• UnConsumed Data command generates a report showing variables produced by this component that are not listed in
any other device’s consumed data file.
Note You can select devices to search against. The individual pages, with just variables, perform the same Compare.
The Referenced Devices item on the EGD tab also has a Compare command that compares the consumed variable
information for the open component against the EGD configuration server’s content.
368 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.21.8 Referenced Devices
The EGD variables defined in other components can be added to the current component’s variable list by adding a reference.
References can only be created to EGD-capable devices that are producers of pages.
Note When EGD configurations are edited in remote devices, you must refresh the configuration to ensure that the latest
variable information is used. The configuration is automatically refreshed when a component is opened, and when a Build is
performed in the component.
➢ To refresh the configuration of a referenced device: from the Tree View, right-click the device to be refreshed
and select Refresh.
➢ To create undefined variables for a single or multiple referenced device(s): from the Tree View, right-click
either the device or Referenced Devices and select Create Undefined Variables.
Note Modifying Modbus properties results in a minor difference in the ToolboxST configuration. However, removing all
Modbus points creates a major configuration difference that forces an offline load.
Modbus Properties
Property Description Valid Range
Connection Specifies the time in minutes that the slave remains connected to the master over
1 to 10
Timeout Ethernet when no requests are being received.
Port choices:
Ethernet Port Specifies the Ethernet port to be used for slave-Ethernet communication
502 and 503
Specifies the timeout period expressed as character time X 10. For example, 35
Inter-Character
represents 3.5 character times, or 0.0036 seconds at 9600 baud, 1 start bit, no parity, 1 35 to 1000
Timeout (ICT)
stop bit.
Choices:
None, Odd,
Parity Specifies check character Even,
Mark, and
Space
Response Delay Additional delay time in ms before the slave responds to a master request. 0 to 999
Limits the number of commands processed per second. This is based on commands
Command Limit 0 to 25
that have changed, not commands that are identical to previously received commands.
Data Swapped Changes the transmission order if the data is greater than 16 bits when set to True. True or False
Settings Example
If set to True 32-bit example: 0x01234567 would be transmitted as 0x45 0x67 0x01 0x23
64-bit example: 0x0123456789ABCDEF would be transmitted as 0xCD 0xEF 0x89 0xAB 0x45 0x67
0x01 0x23
If set to False 32-bit example: 0x01234567 would be transmitted as 0x01 0x23 0x45 0x67
64-bit example: 0x0123456789ABCDEF would be transmitted as 0x01 0x23 0x45 0x67 0x89 0xAB 0xCD
0xEF
NAK Code specifies the Negative Acknowledge code to be used if data is requested from a controller that is incapable of
receiving the Modbus request. Possible codes are 4, 6 or None. None is selected only if the Modbus Master needs no reply
when communication fails between the Mark VIe controller and the target processor.
370 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.22.2 Modbus Slave Register Pages
The Modbus Slave tab Summary View contains four tabs used to exchange data with a Modbus Master. The pages differ by
the access the master receives to the data (read-only or read/write) and the type of data (a Boolean or a 16-bit word) as
follows:
The ToolboxST application allows you to specify the variables on each page using a Data Grid. When you add a variable to a
page, both the Modbus Slave and the selected page are enabled on the controller. As you add and remove variables, the
controller is updated so that only pages containing variables are enabled. To completely disable the Modbus Slave, remove all
variables on all pages or from the Property Editor, select None as the Interface.
When a variable is added, the columns that display are listed in the following table.
Variable Columns
Column Description
Variable that is read or written from the device or the referenced device
Connected Variable
A connected variable must be added before the other columns become active.
Determines the variable data type and the registers used to transmit the variable data over a Modbus
connection as follows:
• BOOL is one bit of a 16-bit word (this is the only option if the connected variable is a BOOL.) All
BOOLs within a word must be set to the same Read or Read/Write direction.
• INT is a signed 16-bit word that takes one register
• UINT is an unsigned 16-bit word that takes one register
Point Data Type • DINT is a signed 32-bit word that takes two registers
• UDINT is an unsigned 32-bit word that takes two registers
• REAL is a signed 32-bit float that takes two registers
• LREAL is a signed 64-bit float that takes four registers
If a Modbus Master talking to a Slave will be writing to Booleans being added to a Holding Register, be
sure that all mapped Booleans are set to Read/Write. If the Master sends a command to change a
Boolean that is Read-only, the Slave will not perform any writes, and will return a Slave Exception.
Specifies the register address
When a variable is created, the address is automatically set to a value adjacent to the highest address
previously on the page, but the automatic value can be modified. Data types that are 32 bits or more
Address (DINT, UDINT, REAL, and LREAL) should be placed on odd addresses. The valid range for addresses
is 1 to 65534. When specifying an address for a BOOL variable, the bit 0-15 within the 16-bit word is
represented by a decimal. For example, 1.00 selects register address 1 and bit 0, and 10423.7 selects
register address 10423 and bit 7.
Raw Min Convert Modbus Slave variable data into engineering units
Raw Max The Raw Min and Raw Max columns control the minimum and maximum for the raw data. The Eng Min
Eng Min 0 and Eng Max columns control the minimum and maximum engineering units to which the raw data will
Eng Max be scaled. (The BOOL data type cannot be scaled.)
Read-only identifier automatically generated from the register page name, the address, and, if
Name
necessary, an added unique number
372 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.22.4 Data Scaling
Data scaling converts the Modbus variable into a signal that represents engineering units. Multiple signals can share one
scaling record.
Note The range of the Modbus variable is determined by the data type and not by the scaling record. Each integer data type
has an implied range. The raw data range in the scale dialog box is only used to compute the gain and offset of the variable
when converting it to a signal.
Note To ensure data coherency, LONG Modbus variables should always start on an odd register number, and the master
should send both registers to the controller in the same Modbus transaction.
To ensure data coherency, FLOAT Modbus variables should always start on an odd register number, and the master should
send both registers to the controller in the same Modbus transaction.
Station ID Function Code … Function Specific Data … CRC-16 MSB CRC-16 LSB
Station ID (follower address) is a number from 1 to 255 that specifies the unit with which to communicate.
Function code specifies the purpose and format of the remaining message portion.
CRC-16 are two bytes that complete every serial Modbus message. These bytes check errors and are calculated to ensure that
no transmission error occurred while the message was in transit. The method for calculating the CRC-16 is a public protocol.
Refer to the Gould Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide for information on calculating a correct Cycle Redundancy
Check (CRC).
The same functions are supported over Ethernet and the serial ports. All Modbus messages are received on the specified
Ethernet port. The Ethernet physical layer provides a CRC-32 check on all transmissions so the Modbus CRC-16 is not
included. Modbus over Ethernet adds the following header to the message formats.
374 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.22.5.2 Message Errors
When a message that cannot be acted upon is received, it is either ignored (and the controller waits for the next message) or
an exception message is generated. Any messages that are misunderstood, incomplete, or altered in some manner (framing,
parity, or CRC-16 error) are always ignored because it is not possible to reliably determine the intention of the message. The
master must detect this timeout condition and resend the message as necessary.
Any time a message receipt is being sent over a serial connection and an interval of time corresponding to 3.5 character times
(based on the baud rate) occurs without receipt of a character, the message receipt in progress is aborted and ignored. Other
message failures are responded to with an exception response if no reception error has occurred, and if the message was not a
broadcast (follower address was zero). The following table displays the exception code responses that are supported when a
normal response is impossible.
Function Code (01) Start Coil (MSB) Start Coil (LSB) Number of Coils Number of Coils
(MSB) (LSB)
Starting output coil number is two bytes long, and can be any value less than the highest output coil number available in
the output coil table. The starting output coil number is equal to a number one less than the first output coil returned in the
normal response. For example, to get the first output coil, enter 0 for the starting output coil number. The high-order byte of
the starting output coil number field is sent as the first byte. The low-order byte is sent next.
Number of output coils to return is two bytes long, and must be from 1 to 2000, inclusive. It specifies the number of
output coils returned in the normal response. The sum of the starting output coil value and the number of output coils must be
less than or equal to the highest output coil number available in the output coil table. The high-order byte of the number of
output coils field is sent as the first byte. The low-order byte is sent next.
The normal message reply from the controller is formatted as follows:
Byte count is a binary number from 1 to 250. The specified number of data bytes follow.
Data bytes (data field) are the packed output coil status data. Each byte contains eight output coil values. The LSB of the
first byte contains the value of the output coil whose number is equal to the starting output coil number plus one. The value of
the output coils are ordered by number, starting with the LSB of the first byte and ending with the MSB of the last byte. If the
number of output coils is not a multiple of eight, then the last data byte contains zeros in one to seven of its highest order bits.
376 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.22.6.2 Function Code 02: Read Input Coils
Function code 02 is used to read the input coil table. The message sent from the master is formatted as follows:
Function Code (02) Start Coil (MSB) Start Coil (LSB) Number of Coils (MSB) Number of Coils (LSB)
Starting input coil number is two-bytes long and can be any value less than the highest input coil available in the input
coil table. The starting input coil number is equal to one less than the number of the first input coil returned in the normal
response. For example, to get the first input coil, enter zero for the starting input coil number. The high order byte of the
starting input coil field is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
Number of input coils to return is two-bytes long and must be from 1 to 2000, inclusive. It specifies the number of input
coils returned in the normal response. The sum of the starting input coil value and the number of input coils must be less than
or equal to the highest input coil available in the input coil table. The high order byte of the number of input coils field is sent
as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
The normal message reply from the controller is formatted as follows:
Byte count is a binary number from 1 to 250. The specified number of data bytes follow.
Data bytes (data field) are the packed input coil status data. Each byte contains eight input coil values. The LSB of the first
byte contains the value of the input coil whose number is equal to the starting input coil plus one. The value of the inputs are
ordered by number, starting with the LSB of the first byte and ending with the MSB of the last byte. If the number of input
coils is not a multiple of eight, then the last data byte contains zeros in one to seven of its highest order bits.
Function Code Start Register Start Register Number of Registers Number of Registers
(03) (MSB) (LSB) (MSB) (LSB)
Starting holding register number is two-bytes long and can be any value less than the highest holding register number
available in the holding register table. The starting holding register number is equal to one less than the number of the first
holding register returned in the normal response. For example, to get the first holding register number (holding register
number one) enter zero for the starting holding register number. The high order byte of the starting holding register number
field is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
Number of holding registers value is two-bytes long and must be from 1 to 128, inclusive. It specifies the number of
holding registers returned in the normal response. The sum of the starting holding register value and the number of holding
registers must be less than or equal to the highest holding register number available in the holding register table. The high
order byte of the number of holding registers field is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
The normal message reply from the controller is formatted as follows:
Function Byte Count First Register First Register … Data Registers Last Register (LSB)
Code (03) (MSB) (LSB) Requested …
Byte count is an even binary number from 2 to 254, or 0. If the byte count is 0, then the master assumes 256 data bytes
follow. Otherwise, the specified number of data bytes follow, not including the two CRC-16 bytes (serial mode).
Holding registers are returned in the data field in numerical order, with the lowest number holding register in the first two
bytes and the highest number holding register in the last two bytes. The number of the first holding register is equal to the
starting holding register number plus one. The high order byte is sent before the low order byte of each holding register.
Function Code (04) Start Register Start Register Number of Registers Number of Registers
(MSB) (LSB) (MSB) (LSB)
Number of input registers value is two-bytes long and must be from 1 to 128, inclusive. It specifies the number of input
registers returned in the normal response. The sum of the starting input register value and the number of input registers must
be less than or equal to the highest input register number available in the input register table. The high order byte of the
number of input registers field is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
The normal message reply from the controller is formatted as follows:
Function Code Byte Count First First Register … Data Registers Last Register (LSB)
(04) Register (LSB) Requested …
(MSB)
Byte count is an even binary number from 2 to 254, or 0. If the byte count is 0, then the master assumes 256 data bytes
follow. Otherwise, the specified number of data bytes follow, not including the two CRC-16 bytes (serial mode).
Input registers are returned in the data field in numerical order, with the lowest number input register in the first two bytes
and the highest number input register in the last two bytes of the data field. The number of the first input register in the data
field is equal to the starting input register number plus one. The high order byte is sent before the low order byte.
378 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.22.6.5 Function Code 05: Force Single Output Coil
Function Code (05) Output Coil (MSB) Output Coil (LSB) State (00 or FF) 0
Function code 05 is used to force (or write) a single output coil in the output coil table. The message sent from the master is
formatted as follows:
Output coil number is two-bytes long and can be any value less than the highest output coil number available in the output
coil table. The output coil number is equal to one less than the number of the output coil forced. For example, to change the
first output coil enter 0 for the output coil number. The high order byte of the starting output coil number field is sent as the
first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
State byte is sent by the master with only two possible values. A zero (00h) is sent to turn the specified output coil off (set
false). A value of 255 (FFh) is sent to turn the specified output coil on (set true). The state byte is always followed by a single
byte with value 0.
The format of the normal message reply from the controller is identical to the received message.
Function Code Holding Register Holding Register Register Data (MSB) Register Data (LSB)
(06) (MSB) (LSB)
Holding register number is two-bytes long and can be any value less than the highest holding register number available in
the holding register table. The holding register number is equal to one less than the number of the changed holding register.
For example, to change the first holding register enter 0 for the holding register number. The high order byte of the starting
holding register number field is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
Holding register data field is two bytes long and contains the value to which the holding register specified by the holding
register number field is preset. The first byte in the data field contains the high order byte of the preset value. The second byte
in the data field contains the low order byte.
The format of the normal message reply from the controller is identical to the received message.
Data bytes (data field) are the packed output coil status data. The data byte contains eight output coil values. The LSB of
the byte contains the value of output coil number one. The MSB contains the value of output coil number eight.
Function Code Starting Coil Starting Coil Coil Count (MSB) Coil Count Data Bytes … Data …
(15) (MSB) (LSB) (LSB)
Starting coil number is two-bytes long and can be any value less than the highest output coil number available in the
output coil table. The output coil number is equal to one less than the number of the forced output coil. For example, to
change the first output coil, enter zero for the output coil number. The high order byte of the starting output coil number field
is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
Coil count is two-bytes long. It specifies the number of output coils to set. The sum of the starting output coil value and the
number of output coils must be less than or equal to the highest output coil number in the output coil table. The high order
byte of the number of output coils field is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
Byte count is the number of data bytes to follow.
Data bytes (data field) are the packed output coil data. Each byte contains eight output coil values. The LSB of the first
byte contains the value of the output coil whose number is equal to the starting output coil number plus one. The value of the
output coils are ordered by number, starting with the LSB of the first byte and ending with the MSB of the last byte. If the
number of the holding coils is not a multiple of eight, then the last data byte contains unused data in its highest order bits.
The normal message reply from the controller is formatted as follows:
Function Code (15) Starting Coil (MSB) Starting Coil (LSB) Coil Count (MSB) Coil Count (LSB)
380 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.22.6.9 Function Code 16: Preset Multiple Holding Registers
Function code 16 is used to preset (or write) to multiple holding registers. The message sent from the master is formatted
as follows:
Start register number is two-bytes long and can be any value less than the highest holding register number available in the
holding register table. The holding register number is equal to one less than the number of the changed holding register. For
example, to change the first holding register enter 0 for the holding register number. The high order byte of the starting
holding register number field is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
Number of holding registers value is two-bytes long. It specifies the number of holding registers to set. The sum of the
starting holding register value and the number of holding registers must be less than or equal to the highest holding register
number in the holding register table. The high order byte of the number of holding registers field is sent as the first byte. The
low order byte is sent next.
Byte count is the number of data bytes to follow.
Register data field is two-bytes for each holding register to set. The first byte in the data field contains the high order byte
of each preset value. The next byte contains the low order byte.
The normal message reply from the controller is formatted as follows:
Function Code (16) Starting Register Starting Register Register Count (MSB) Register Count
(MSB) (LSB) (LSB)
Note The Modbus diagnostic utility is available with the Mark VIe controller firmware V03.03 or later.
Network Adapter 1 (located in the General tab Tree View) must be enabled, named,
and addressed. Refer to the section Network Adapters.
Attention
382 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Modbus Controller Slave Advanced Diagnostics Reports
Report
Displays Modbus slave configuration information.
The beginning of the report displays a summary of the total number of coils/register and the highest
and lowest coil/register configured for each of the four Modbus categories (holding coils, input coils,
Modbus Slave holding registers, and input registers). More extensive details are available using the registers
Configuration command. Below this summary, the report displays more configuration data, including command
rate information, data swapping configuration, configured NAK codes, and serial port selections. To
modify the configuration, close the advanced diagnostic window, and from the property page, select
the Modbus Slave tab, and Modbus Slave.
Modbus Slave Clients Displays the currently established Modbus master connections.
Modbus Slave Displays counters for Modbus write information
Command Summary Function codes 5, 6, 15, and 16 are the only codes that perform a write.
Message Format Displays the message formats used in serial Modbus messages to and from the Modbus slave
Summary Error codes are also displayed.
Errors Displays errors and resets errors
Log Displays message logs and resets logs
384 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.23.1 Import Slave Devices and Configure EtherCAT Network
Communication
➢ To import the Slave devices (ENI file) and configure EtherCAT network communication
1. From the Mark VIe component Property Editor, change the Platform to IS420UCSCH1C.
2. Set the Platform Option to EtherCAT.
3. From the Component Editor, select the EtherCAT tab.
5. After the ENI file is imported, the Tree View displays each Slave device. With the top (head) EtherCAT node selected,
the Property Editor displays the EtherCAT Master properties. Set the Cable Redundancy, Frame Loss Limit, and
Port Status Time Interval property values as needed. Refer to the following table for a description of these properties.
386 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6. From the Tree View, select a Slave device node to populate the Data Grid with the points associated with the selected
Slave device. From the Data Grid, configure the connected variables, device tags, and scaling values.
Note When scaling values are changed, the data type of the point automatically becomes REAL.
2. Drag and drop the selection onto the appropriate head device to place the selected elements within a collapsible tree with
the head as the parent element.
388 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Multiple Slave Devices Moved Under One Head Device
Note Any other EtherCAT data type not listed in this table will not be loaded.
390 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.23.7 Change EtherCAT Data Type
If an identified device is not giving you the data type you expect, this can be changed to a compatible data type, as shown in
the following figure.
➢ To display EtherCAT Master status variables: from the EtherCAT tab Tree View, select the EtherCAT head
(top-level) node to display the EtherCAT Master status variables in the Summary View.
As illustrated in the following table, Master Status Variables Corresponding to Diagnostic Alarm Conditions, when a
diagnostic alarm is active, it sets the status variable indicated (checkmarked) in the table to True. For example, if any one of
the diagnostic alarms 2400, 2407, 2408, 2409, or 2410 are active, then MasterFault is True. In contrast, all five of these
diagnostic alarms must be inactive in order for MasterFault to be False.
392 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.23.9 EtherCAT Slave Status Variables
EtherCAT Slave status variables are diagnostics that apply to an EtherCAT Slave device. There are five EtherCAT Slave
status variables per Slave.
➢ To display EtherCAT Slave status variables: from the EtherCAT tab Tree View, select an EtherCAT Slave
node to display the EtherCAT Slave status variables in the Summary View.
OpState is the operational state of the Slave device. This is the same value that drives the status of the Slaves listed in the
Tree View. (Refer to the table Slave Device States for the explanation of the values.)
Device states Port0Status, Port1Status, Port2Status, and Port3Status report the Rx error counters from the devices. The
least significant byte is the CRC error count and the most significant byte is the Rx error count. The update rate is defined in
the EtherCAT Master property Port Status Time Interval (default is 10 minutes). (Refer to the table EtherCAT Master
Properties for a description of this property and other EtherCAT properties.) The counters in the device are cleared upon
every update, which means the Port Status variables are measured in counts since last update. All Rx error counters within the
device are cleared if at least one Port Status on the device has a Connected Variable. Unlike other Slave Points, only Port
Statuses that have a Connected Variable will show live data. If there is not a Connected Variable, the Live Values column
displays the value as Unused. This is done for performance improvements in the runtime.
If you have upgraded from a version of ToolboxST that did not support Port Status
variables, re-import the ENI file to display the Port Status variables in the data grid
for the EtherCAT Slave devices.
Attention
Before performing a port disconnect, verify the state of the EtherCAT network. A port
disconnect could potentially isolate a portion of devices if the Cable Redundancy
property is not set to True, or if there is already a Line Break in the EtherCAT ring.
Caution
2.) If a port disconnect is performed on a device and then that device or another device
on the network is rebooted or if a different network cable is unplugged and
Caution reconnected, this can result in an entire portion of the network to become unavailable
to the Master (with a portion of the Slave devices lost). If this occurs, reboot the
UCSCH1C EtherCAT Master.
➢ To disconnect an EtherCAT port on a Slave device: from the EtherCAT tab Tree View, right-click on an
EtherCAT Slave node and select the appropriate Disconnect Port # from the list.
➢ To determine if there is a Port Disconnect: from the EtherCAT tab Tree View, right-click on the EtherCAT
head (top-level) node and select Find Port Disconnect to display window that indicates which port is disconnected or
indicates that there are no disconnected ports.
394 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To clear a Port Disconnect: from the EtherCAT tab Tree View, right-click on the EtherCAT head (top-level) node
and select Clear Port Disconnect.
A window displays indicating success in clearing the port disconnect, or indicating that there were no active port disconnects
to clear.
Note An active port disconnect is not retained after a Mark VIe control reboot or power cycle.
• Variable
• Block Pin
• I/O
• Alarm
• GE Rationalization
• Hold
• Event
• NVRAM
• IONet EGD
• I/O Pack Peer-to-Peer
• I/O Diagnostics
• Coding Practices
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus Configuration
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Field Device
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus Parameter Reconcile
• Auto-Reconfiguration
• Unlinked Programs/User Blocks
• Global variables
• Variable configuration
• Web
• Compressed data log
• EGD point list
• Alias
• Second language
396 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3. View variable definition data.
Double-click a Global
Variable to go to where
the variable is defined
in the application code.
Note Intrinsic variables are not defined in the application code configuration. The Where Used tab displays locations in the
configuration where the intrinsic variables have been used.
398 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Global Variable Report Columns (continued)
Enables the automatic collection by the Historian when:
Historian Deadband
Boolean and set to Logged on Change Analog and set to 0 or higher
Historian Deadband Definition Definition of Historian Deadband value
If set to True, enables the variable as a Hold, which is similar to an Alarm. The Hold queue contains a
Hold
list of time-tagged Hold states in the turbine startup sequence.
I/O True if value is connected to an I/O
Intrinsic True if variable is intrinsic one
NVRAM Indicates that the variable should be saved in non-volatile RAM
Determines the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. This is the default for precision when
Precision the number displays on the HMI. If a Format Spec has been specified and this property has no
specification, the Format Spec Precision is used.
Read Value is Read from the variable in the code, EGD, or I/O
Enables data collection of this variable in the Recorder if the value is changed from Not Logged to a
non-negative number for analog variables, or changed to Logged on Change or Logged Continuous
Recorder Deadband
for Boolean variables. This value represents the amount that the data value must change before it is
stored.
Recorder Deadband Definition Definition of the Recorder Deadband value
SOE True if variable is configured as an SOE
SOE Description Description of SOE
Units Engineering units
Usage Variable definition usage
Virtual HMI Point If set to True, imports the variable into the HMI as a virtual point
Written Value is written to variable in the code, EGD, or I/O
400 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Double-click a variable
to go to where the
variable is configured
in the application code.
Note Intrinsic variables are not defined in the application code configuration. The Where Used tab displays locations in the
configuration where the intrinsic variables have been used.
402 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.1.3 Web Report
The Web report provides variable name, description, type, alias, second language description, and location in the application
code, as well as where the variable is used and if the variable is written multiple times in the code.
To generate a Variable Web report, Controller Web Pages must be enabled in the
controller Property Editor and the variables must have the Download Info column set
to True for the web report to display the variables.
Attention
1. Generate a Web report.
404 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.1.4 Compressed Data Log Report
The Compressed Data Log report provides Wind turbine controller variables being collected on the compressed data log for
the controller. Variable data collected includes description, type, use in code, written multiple, initial value, alias, second
language description, locator, controller collected, display high, display low, entry number, external access, global name
prefix, units, and usage. This report can be used for troubleshooting and informational reference.
406 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Compressed Data Log Columns
Column Description
Name Variable name
Description Variable description
Type Variable data type
Used in Code Connection used in code
Written Multiple Written more than once in the code
Initial Value Initial value of variable
Variable tag name that can be customized for use with the WorkstationST
Alias
application and all HMIs
Second Language Description in second language (if configured in System Editor)
Locator Full name of the variable
Controller Collected Variable is collected by the controller (type)
Display High Default upper limit for display on HMI
Display Low Default lower limit for display on HMI
Entry No Row entry number
External Access Variable access type
Global Name Prefix Global name prefix
Units Engineering units
Usage Variable definition usage
Data Class Selects the type of collection for a Compressed Data Log variable
408 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
2. Select a variable or point and navigate to the EGD configuration.
410 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.1.6 Alias Report
The Variable Alias report provides the variables and variable alias names. Users can export the report to Excel, enter the
alternative variable alias names, then import the report back into the ToolboxST system to display the alias names in the
Alarm Viewer and other areas where the variable names are available.
2. To enter alias names, save the report as a .csv file, enter alias names, then import the data back into the ToolboxST
system.
412 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.1.7 Second Language Report
The Variable Second Language report provides the variable name, the second language description, and the variable
description. Users can save the report file, enter the second language descriptions, then import the report back into the
ToolboxST system to display the descriptions in the Alarm Viewer.
From the View menu, select Reports, Variable, and Second Language
to generate the Second Language report.
414 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.2 Block Pin Report
The Block Pin report lists all block pins for every variable in the controller software and the associated blocks. Operators use
the block pin report as a cross-reference report containing pin descriptions, programs, tasks, and where the pins are used.
The Software tab displays the program, task, and block in which the pin is used.
Double-click the associated pin to display the connections.
416 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Block Pin Report Columns
Column Description
Pin Pin name
Pin Description Pin description
Block Block name
Block Description Description of the instanced block
Task Task Name
Program Program name
Locator Full name of the I/O variable
Block Execution Determines the order in which the block executes
Connection Pin variable connection
Data Type Pin data type
Entry No Row entry number
Program Execution Determines the order in which the program executes
Usage Usage type (such as input, output, contact, state)
From the variable report, double-click an I/O Variable to display the configuration.
418 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
I/O Variable Report Columns
Column Description
I/O Variable I/O variable name
Description I/O variable description
Direction Direction of the I/O variable (input or output)
Device Tag ID of the device attached to the screw
Screw Name Name of the screw on the terminal board
Screw Number Number of the screw on the terminal board
TB Name Terminal board name
TB Hardware Form Hardware form for the module terminal board
TB Location Terminal board location of the module
Jumpers List of jumpers in the module
Jumper Value Position used to set the module jumpers
Group Name Name of the group where the module resides
Module Name Module name
Wire Jumpers IDs of the external wire jumpers
Screw Note Additional information about the screw
Wire Number ID of the wire attached to the screw
Cable Number ID of the cable attached to the screw
ID of the terminal board junction between the Mark
Interposing TB
VIe control and the I/O
Sense of the connected relay (used only for relay
Sense
and solenoid circuits)
Bar Code Terminal board bar code
Connected Variable Name of the variable attached to the I/O variable
Locator Full name of the I/O variable
Configured redundancy of the I/O pack (simplex,
Pack Redundancy
dual, TMR)
Config Type I/O configuration type
Data Type I/O variable data type
Engr High I/O high value in engineering units
Engr Low I/O low value in engineering units
Entry No Row entry number
Port Name Name of module’s port
Raw High Raw I/O high value
Raw Low Raw I/O low value
SeqOfEvents Sequence of Events (SOE)
Signal Invert Signal inversion
Sub-Assembly Name of module’s sub-assembly
Units Engineering units
If the I/O variable is used by the Control Sequence
Used in Code
Program (CSP), the application code
Mode I/O point configuration mode
420 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
2. Select a variable and navigate to the configuration.
422 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
2. Select an alarm to navigate to the configuration.
424 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.5 GE Rationalization Report
The GE Rationalization report lists GE Rationalization parameters for the current alarms generated for the variables. Users
can export the report to Excel, enter specific information to manage plant-specific alarms, and then import the updated report
back into ToolboxST to make the values available from Alarm Help in the Alarm Viewer.
Alarm Help files are only generated when the Publish Alarm Help property is set to
True in the system Property Editor.
Attention
426 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.6 Hold Report
The Hold report identifies all steam turbine variables marked as Holds for troubleshooting and information reference.
428 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.7 Event Report
The Event report lists digital signals defined as an Event, and provides an alarm History record when a signal transitions from
a 1 to 0. Event notifications provide the date and time stamp for when the Event occurred. This report can be used for
troubleshooting and informational reference.
430 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.8 NVRAM Report
The NVRAM report lists all configured variables that are downloaded and used in the RAM and marked as non-volatile.
NVRAM variable values are saved so in the event of power loss or if you power down and power up, the controller restores
the last stored values.
432 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.9 IONet EGD Report
The IONet EGD report provides network status values for all IONet communication displayed in the current component and
reflects totals of the controller exchange. EGD communication, configuration, and status specific to EGD communication
(system and controller) can be used for troubleshooting and information reference.
From the View menu, select Reports, then select IONet EGD
to display the report results.
434 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.10 I/O Pack Peer-to-Peer Report
The I/O Pack Peer-to-Peer report provides a list of I/O packs that are configured with a peer-to-peer connection as transmit
and receive modules for I/O functions.
From the View menu, select Reports, then select I/O Pack Peer-to-Peer.
• Alarm
• Revision
• Communication
• Hardware
From the View menu, select I/O Diagnostics, then select Alarm.
436 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
b. For a single Group:
2. Locate an alarm and view the details in the Diagnostic Alarm Viewer.
438 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3. View the Diagnostic Alarm Help containing possible causes and solutions for troubleshooting.
From the View menu, select I/O Diagnostics, then select Revision.
440 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
b. For a Group:
2. Locate a module in the report and view the details in the Status Viewer.
442 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the Revision report, double-click a module and
select the Status tab to display the status details.
From the View menu, select Reports, I/O Diagnostics, then select Communication.
444 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
b. For a Group:
From the Hardware tab, right-click the Group, select Create Module Report, then select Communication.
446 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.11.4 I/O Diagnostics (Module) Hardware Report
The I/O Diagnostics Hardware report lists hardware information for an I/O pack at the device, I/O module, or Group level,
such as firmware ID, serial number, used boards, and bar code. The hardware information in the report can be used for
ordering replacement parts, gathering bar codes, maintenance, troubleshooting, and informational reference.
From the View menu, select Reports, I/O Diagnostics, then select Hardware.
From the Hardware tab, select Create Module Report, then select Hardware.
448 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
c. For an I/O module:
• Unwritten variables
• Multiple writes
• Multiple output assigned variables
• Unused I/O
450 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the View menu,
select Reports and
Coding Practices
From the Coding Practices report , double-click a variable to display the configuration.
452 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Coding Practices Report Columns
Column Description
Unwritten Variables Variables used in blockware logic, but have no assigned values
Variables used in multiple locations, such as blockware logic, EGD, or
Multiple Writes
I/O point configuration
Multiple Output Assigned
All variables attached to more than one output
Variables
Unused I/O Connected I/O values that are not used anywhere
Spares Unconnected and unused I/O values
454 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Example FOUNDATION Fieldbus Configuration Report
2. Select a parameter to view the configuration.
456 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.14 FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Field Device Report
The FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Field Device report lists all configured FOUNDATION Fieldbus parameters and values for H1
field devices, as well as device status, linked segment, and associated module. This specific configuration information on each
device can be used for information reference, maintenance, troubleshooting, and parts replacement ordering.
458 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.15 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Parameter Reconcile Report
The FOUNDATION Fieldbus Parameter Reconcile report generates a report of unequal parameters. Using this report, users can
view where the FOUNDATION Fieldbus parameters are defined to resolve issues and reconcile parameter equality for blocks,
H1 devices, segments, linking devices, or systems (single parameter or all). The Parameter Reconcile report also provides the
existing ToolboxST report features, such as print, filter, refresh, and sort columns.
Note Refer to the section Report Features for a description of common report features.
460 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3. The report displays unequal parameters that need to be resolved. Select the value(s) to which you want the ToolboxST
system and device to be set, or select all parameters values.
Note Select All and Clear All works for each parameter in either the Device Value column or the ToolboxST Value column.
Selecting all values in one column will clear any selections in the other column. For example, selecting all Device Values will
clear any selections that have been selected in the ToolboxST Value column.
From the Device Value column or the ToolboxST Value column , select the check box
beside the value(s) to which you want the ToolboxST system and device to be set.
Note: Only one value type can be chosen for each parameter.
5. If there are unresolved parameters, they are indicated as unresolved (unequal) in the report. Refresh the report to display
only the unresolved parameters.
462 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6. Select the values to refresh.
Note Reloading both ToolboxST and FOUNDATION Fieldbus device parameters takes additional time due to the need to
establish communications and read the FOUNDATION Fieldbus parameters from the H1 devices.
Caution
7. After the reconcile operation and report are completed, close the report window.
Note Refer to the section Report Features for a description of common report features.
464 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Example Block Report
b. For an H1 device:
466 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the report, double-click a parameter
to display the configuration details.
• Configuration
• Difference
Note The contents of both types of reports can be exported to a .csv file.
468 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Configuration Report Example
470 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Example Auto-Reconfiguration Difference Report
If no differences exist between the ToolboxST configuration and the Auto-Reconfiguration server, the following message
displays.
472 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.17.3 Auto-Reconfiguration Equality Status
The Component InfoView Status tab displays one of four equality states for Auto-Reconfiguration:
• Equal displays if there are no differences between the ToolboxST configuration and the Auto-Reconfiguration server.
• Not Equal displays if there are differences between the ToolboxST configuration and the Auto-Reconfiguration server.
• Disabled displays if the Auto-Reconfiguration property is set to False in the General tab Property Editor.
• Downloading displays if a download is occurring.
Status Tab
474 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The Find Results tab displays any identified unlinked
programs or userblocks .
• Open report
• Save report
• Retrieve (generate) report
• Export report
• Import report
• Print report
• Sort (modify) columns
• Filter
• Refresh
• Zoom
• Find text
• Help
Toolbar Icons
Icon Description
Zoom in
Zoom out
Get help
476 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To enable the Toolbar
➢ To save a report
➢ To sort a report column: click any column heading to apply a sort to that column. The first click sorts the column in
ascending order; a second click sorts the column in descending order.
478 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To change the order of the report columns
1. From the Report menu, select Change Columns to display the Select [report type] Report Columns dialog box.
Column
names that
display in
blue cannot
be moved.
Or
2. Select a column header and use the drag-and-drop feature.
If selected,
capitalization
in the test
string must
match the
text in the
report exactly
480 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.19.1 Report Filter
Apply a filter to a report to display a specific subset of the original report.
➢ To apply a report filter: from the Report menu, click Apply Filter to open the Edit Report Filter dialog box.
Available Available
columns comparison
(double-click and Boolean
to add to an operators
equation) (double-click
to add to an
equation)
Click to add
parentheses
Click OK to
accept the
filter equation
Enter filter that displays.
equation to
be used. Click Clear
to delete the
equation.
Click Cancel
to cancel the
equation but
keep the
current
settings.
When using the LIKE operator, you can prefix or suffix a wildcard character, either * or
LIKE
%, to the right-hand value. The wildcard character can stand for any number of
alphanumeric characters, including zero. The wildcard character can only be present
at the beginning or the end of the right-hand value (for example, *value or value* or
*value*)
AND Expressions to the left and right of the AND operator must both be True
OR Either the expression to the left or to the right of the operator must be True
NOT Expression to the right of the operator must be False
You can use as many groups of parentheses as necessary to define an expression.
String values must be enclosed in single quotes , for example 'string'
➢ To remove a report filter: from the Report menu, click Remove Filter. The filter is removed and all available rows
display.
482 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.19.2 Import Reports
Reports that can be imported include:
• I/O Variable
• I/O Configuration
• Global Variable
• Block Pin
• Variable Alias
• Second Language
• GE Rationalization
The Variable Alias report and the Second Language report can be imported from either a .csv or an .xml file, but the other
reports can only be imported from a .csv file.
➢ To import an I/O Variable, I/O Configuration, Global Variable, or Block Pin report
1. From the File menu, select Import, then select the desired report.
2. From the Open Report dialog box, select the report and click Open to import the data. Any data that cannot be
modified is highlighted when the report displays.
Note Only the Alias and Second Language properties can be modified.
1. From the File menu, select Import, then select either Variable Alias Report or Second Language Report.
2. From the Open Report dialog box, select either a .csv or an .xml file and click Open to import the data. Any data that
cannot be modified is highlighted when the report displays.
Tip: Change the Save as type to All Files (*.*) so you will
still be able to save the file as a .csv file.
Click Save .
5. Import the file into ToolboxST and verify that all the special characters display correctly.
484 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.24.19.3 Importable Report Data
Certain columns (and their associated data types) in reports can be imported from a .csv file.
If you use Microsoft Excel to modify the .csv file, make sure you save the file back to a
.csv file from an .xls file.
If the .csv file contains UTF-8 special characters, to avoid issues with displaying
special characters after import back into ToolboxST open the file with Notepad and
Attention save the file with Encoding set to UTF-8. Refer to the procedure To avoid issues with
second language special characters during import.
Note GE recommends that users modify .csv files with Notepad or Wordpad rather than Microsoft Excel.
486 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Global Variable Report (continued)
Column Name Type Importable Description
Can be set to Alarmed/Not Alarmed. Otherwise, can be set to Not
Alarm String Yes Alarmed or AnalogAlarmDefault, depending on variable type. A Boolean
can be set to Alarmed/NotAlarmed.
Selects a system-configured Alarm Class, which is used by an HMI to
Alarm Class String Yes
classify and color Alarms
If set to True, causes the Alarm to be generated on a 1–to–0 transition.
Alarm On Zero Boolean Yes
Alarm property must be set to Alarmed (True).
Enum Control
Control Constant Yes Can be set to an enum value (True, False, ReadOnly, and such)
Constant
Default upper limit for HMI displays (bar graph, trending, and such). If a
Display High Double Yes Format Spec has been specified and this property has no specification,
the Format Spec Engineering Max is used.
Default lower limit for HMI displays (bar graph, trending, and such). If a
Display Low Double Yes Format Spec has been specified and this property has no specification,
the Format Spec Engineering Max is used.
Display Screen String Yes Default HMI screen for this variable
NVRAM Boolean Yes Indicates that the variable should be saved in non-volatile RAM.
Determines the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. This is
the default for precision when the number displays on the HMI. If a
Precision Int Yes
Format Spec has been specified and this property has no specification,
the Format Spec Precision is used.
Virtual HMI Point Boolean Yes If set to True, imports the variable into the HMI as a virtual point.
If set to True, prevents modify-variable commands from being written
CEL Command Filter Boolean Yes
into the Command and Event Log (CEL) (default is False)
Enables the automatic collection by the Historian when:
Historian Deadband Double Yes
Boolean and set to Logged on Change Analog and set to 0 or higher
Historian Deadband Enum Deadband Can be set to EngineeringUnits, PercentOfRange,
Yes
Definition Definition RemoveWorkstationOverride
Enables data collection of this variable in the Recorder if the value is
changed from Not Logged to a non-negative number for analog
Recorder Deadband Double Yes variables, or changed to Logged on Change or Logged Continuous for
Boolean variables. This value represents the amount that the data value
must change before it is stored.
Recorder Deadband Enum Deadband Can be set to EngineeringUnits, PercentOfRange,
Yes
Definition Definition RemoveWorkstationOverride
Auto Reset Enum AutoReset Yes Enabled, Disabled
Enum
Alarm Shelving Yes Enabled, Disabled
AlarmShelving
Alarm Shelving Max
UInt Yes Value should be between 1 and 4294967295
Duration
Plant Area IPlantAreas Yes Should be one of the pre-configured value sets in the system
488 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.25 Forced Variables
Forced variables are variables and I/O points whose value is permanently overridden with a specific value. They are managed
using the Forced Variables dialog box while connected to a controller.
Logic forcing procedures can result in personal injury or death, if not strictly
followed. Only adequately trained personnel should modify any programmable
machine. Forcing of control logic for an operating process is strongly discouraged.
Forcing of protective functions is never permissible for an operating unit. All safety
Warning measures should be strictly enforced in conjunction with this procedure.
➢ To display Forced Variables: from the Component Editor View menu, select Forced Variables.
➢ To force a value or change a previously forced value: from the Forced Variables dialog box, double-click a
value to display the Send Value dialog box.
➢ To remove a single forced value: right-click a forced variable and select Remove Selected Forces.
➢ To remove all forced values: right-click anywhere inside the Forced Variables dialog box and select Remove All
Forces.
➢ To display the Global Variables window: from the Component Editor View menu, select Global Variables.
The Global Variables window allows you to modify a property for multiple variables. For example, to move multiple
variables onto an EGD page, select the rows for the desired variables and change the EGD Page property in the Property
Editor. (Refer to the
section Data Grids.)
Because only existing global variables can be changed, new variables cannot be added from the Global Variables window.
You cannot make any change that affects the name of the global variable (like Name or Global Name Prefix). Most properties
of variables that are instanced from a library can only be modified by using the Overridable Properties feature. (Refer to the
section Overridable Properties.)
490 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.27 Alarm Rationalization
Alarm rationalization produces the detail design necessary to manage an alarm lifecycle. During this process, alarm
definitions are systematically compared to criteria (conditions) set forth in the alarm philosophy document for the plant. If an
alarm meets this criteria, the alarm set point, consequence, and operator action are documented, and the alarm is prioritized
and classified according to the philosophy.
The most common uses of Alarm Rationalization are:
Select from the Available Attributes table using the arrows to add them to or remove them from the
Selected Attribute table. Click Export to export alarms for Rationalization.
GE Rationalization is an available selection for export (as displayed in this figure). However, it is only available for
backwards compatibility.
492 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the View menu, select Reports, and GE Rationalization.
Note The GE Rationalization report contains a column for Parent Alarms and for Child Alarms. A large number of
parent/child relationships can cause these two columns in the .csv file to be incompatible with the Excel application. The
application allows a maximum limit of 32,767 characters in a cell.
When a GE Rationalization report is generated, it can be saved as a .csv file, modified, and then imported back into the
ToolboxST application. For the procedures to export and import GE Rationalization reports, refer to the section Export and
Import Reports.
➢ To import alarms to the library: from the System Editor Tree View, open the Library Container Editor.
The report displays all variables found in the library; variables missing from the library display in red. It is possible to
re-export the report to include all rows not found during the original import.
➢ To import the report back into the controller: from the controller File menu, select Import and GE
Rationalization Report.
The report automatically overrides properties in the controller configuration to change the linked library code.
494 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.28 Watch Window
A Watch Window displays a collection of variables, their attributes, and live values, in a stand-alone window. The Watch
Window feature can be accessed from the ToolboxST System Editor, as well as from the individual Component Editors. Once
a Watch Window is created, it can be exported to and imported from .csv files.
➢ To open a stand-alone Watch Window: from the Start menu, select All Programs, , ToolboxST, and Watch
Window.
➢ To create a Watch Window: from the System Editor Tree View, right-click the system and select Insert New,
Tool and Watch Window.
Enter a Name,
and a Description
(optional), and
click OK.
Note If this Watch Window is being opened for the first time, the list is empty. Add or import a new Watch Window.
➢ To open an existing Watch Window: from the System Editor Tree View, right-click the system and select Insert
Existing and Watch Window.
➢ To open a Watch Window: from a Component Editor View menu, select Watch Windows.
If you selected
System
Component in the
previous page,
select the desired
component from
the drop-down list
and click Next.
496 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Click Add.
When the
Select a
Variable dialog
box displays,
select desired
variables and
click OK.
The variables
will display here.
Click Finish .
Once a variable is added to a Watch Window, right-click the variable row header to perform the following actions:
Note When a system component providing signals to a Watch Window is replicated, the Watch Window is replicated as
well.
Forcing of protective functions is never permissible for an operating unit. All safety
Warning measures should be strictly enforced in conjunction with this procedure.
498 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.28.4 Import and Export
A Watch Window can be exported to and imported from a .csv file. From there, other components can use a previously
selected collection of variables.
Note The Watch Window tool only exports grid columns necessary to retrieve variable information. For example,
DatasourceName from the exported file is used to retrieve the variable’s remaining properties from the system. User-defined
columns such as User Comment are also included.
➢ To save a Watch Window: from the <Watch Window name> File menu, select Save As to save the Watch Window
as a .watch file in a user-selected location,
or select Save to save the Watch Window as a .watch file in the Tools folder in the system.
➢ To add an existing LiveView: from the System Editor, right-click the system and select Insert Existing and
LiveView.
➢ To edit a LiveView: from the System Editor, right-click a LiveView and select Edit System Component.
➢ To add a LiveView from a Component Editor: from the View menu, select LiveViews.
500 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To open an existing LiveView in either Edit Mode or Run Mode from the Component Editor
1. From the View menu, select LiveViews.
2. Right-click the desired LiveView and select View.
502 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Additional Controls
Control Description
Image Displays graphics in either bitmap, .gif, .jpeg, or icon format
Panel Allows you to group collections of controls
Flow Layout Panel Dynamically displays contents either horizontally or vertically
504 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To configure bar graph colors
Reference point
Select a Bar
Color for the
High Alarm and
High Warning
range above the
reference point
Select a Bar
Color for the
Normal range
above the
reference point
Select a Bar
Color for the
Low Alarm and
Low Warning
range above the
reference point
If the Behavior
property is set to
Momentary and
the On Push
property is set to
False, the state of
the attached
variable is set to
True when the left-
mouse button is
clicked
506 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.29.8 Controls Properties
Controls Properties
Property Description
Accessibility Name, description and role
Appearance View appearance, including background color, border style, font, and such
Shortcut menu that displays when the user right-clicks, whether controls are automatically validated, and such,
Behavior
and includes whether the control can accept dragged data
Design Contains the Locked property. Locked, if set to True, prevents the control from being moved or resized.
Focus If set to True, enables validation of the control
Layout Includes properties such as location, auto scroll, margin, and maximum and minimum size
If set to True, prohibits objects from being moved or re-sized using the pointer. Values must be changed in the
Locked
Property Editor to enable moving and re-sizing.
Locked enables
or disables the
ability to move
and resize objects
Locked Property
Or
508 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Select the data source for
the variable and clickNext
Variables display
here. Click
Finish
510 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Once variables have been attached to LiveView using the wizard, additional variables can be attached directly from the
system component.
Note You can also attach a variable by entering the variable name in the Property View.
➢ To display constants
512 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To display constants
514 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6.30.4 Reconcile Differences
The Reconcile Differences feature allows you to synchronize the live value and the initial value for constants. The live value
is the value of the constant currently being used in the running controller. The initial value is the value of the constant in the
ToolboxST configuration.
The Reconcile Differences dialog box displays constants with both initial and live values.
• For constants when the ToolboxST initial value was checked, that value is either sent to the controller (where the OK
button is clicked), or a pcode record is created, causing the next online download to change both the initial and live
values.
• For constants when the live value was checked, the ToolboxST initial value is set equal to the controller live value. This
causes a minor revision configuration change to Not Equal. A Build and Download to the controller is required to
complete the reconcile function.
516 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Messages
Message Type Message Content
Undriven Constants Reconcile: Need to Build and Download for the reconcile action to be
complete for ProgUndrivensAndControlConstants.ControlConstantArray. On the next online
Warning
download, the Live Value will change from 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12 to
6,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12.
Undriven Constants Reconcile: Need to Build and Download for the reconcile action to be
Warning complete for ProgUndrivensAndControlConstants.UndrivenReal. The ToolboxST Initial Value has
changed from 9.8 to 11.8.
Undriven Constants Reconcile: Need to Build and Download for the reconcile action to be
Warning complete for ProgUndrivensAndControlConstants.UndrivenTask.ARRAY_SUM_1.ENABLE. The
ToolboxST Pin Connection has changed from True to False.
Undriven Constants Reconcile: ProgUndrivensAndControlConstants.UndrivenBool has a different
Warning Live Value than the last Initial Value downloaded to pcode. A controller reboot could cause the
current Live Value of False to change to True.
Undriven Constants Reconcile: Could not reconcile variable ProgUndrivensAndControlConstants.
Error
UndrivenTask.ARRAY_SUM_1.ENABLE. This variable is not modifiable.
Undriven Constants Reconcile: The live value has been reconciled to match the ToolboxST initial
Info Value for ProgUndrivensAndControlConstants.UndrivenReal. The Live Value has changed from
10.8 to 11.8.
➢ To display I/O values: from the Hardware tab, select an I/O module.
518 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
7 Mark VIe — Working Online
The Mark VIe component provides control, protection, and monitoring of turbine and driven load equipment. Vital
subsystems, such as servo control, vibration protection, and synchronization are embedded in the I/O with on-board
processors to optimize performance.
The ToolboxST application is used to configure the software for the Mark VIe component. The system has a CompactPCI®
controller with networked I/O. The I/O processors are located on the terminal boards instead of in centralized board racks.
This configuration digitizes the signals on the terminal boards, which can be mounted local or remote, individually or in
groups.
➢ To connect to a controller
1. From the System Editor, open an Mark VIe Component Editor.
2. From the Device menu, select Online or click Go On/Offline.
If you are connecting to a simplex controller, a connection is automatically established with the M1 controller. In a Warm
backup or Dual configuration, a dialog box displays to select either a redundant controller (either M1 or M2) or the controller
currently designated as the supplier of initialization data.
Icons Conditions
All controllers functioning normally.
520 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
7.2.1 Status Tab Attributes
If the indicated Control State is not Controlling, rest the cursor over the current state to display additional information or
double-click Control State to display the information in a separate window.
• Adding the first I/O pack to a controller, removing the last I/O module, or deleting all I/O modules
• Compressing variables
• Compress non-volatile RAM (NVRAM)
• Changing the background blockware period
• Changing frame rate
• Changing controller redundancy
• Changing IONet network redundancy
• Changing the platform type
• Changing any NTP configuration
• Changing any controller Network Adapter IP addresses, subnet mask, gateway IP address, scope, media, or transport
• Delete or rename a Network Adapter that the controller was using
• Adding or redirecting optional block library references
• Changing Frame state timeouts
• Removing last point off Modbus slave
• Marking the first I/O module to be shared or clearing the last I/O module from being shared
• Connecting the first controller-to-controller input or output variable
• If the set index of shared IONet changes
• If the controller was set to multicast mode on IONet but an I/O pack that does not support multicast as added, which
resets the configuration back to broadcast mode
• Adding the first FOUNDATION Fieldbus linking device, removing the last FOUNDATION Fieldbus device, or removing all
FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices
• Removing Wind Condition Top Box Monitor (WCBM)
• Disabling web pages
• Disabling compressed data log
• Disabling Wind Farm Management system
522 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
7.2.2 Status Control Attributes
Valid Control States
State Description
Powerup Power up controller
Master initialization Controller is loading its own configuration
Designated controller
Determine which controller is designated in a redundant controller configuration
determination
Perform initialization of non-designated controllers with NVRAM, command variables, and
Data initialization
constants
Inputs enabled Wait in this state for all required I/O packs to start transmitting inputs
Input voting Check voting inputs prior to execution of application code
Exchange initialization Populate redundant controllers with dc state variables prior to voting
Exchange state variables so that a controller joining a running system will not have a step in
Exchanging
its initial calculations
Sequencing Turn on the application code and execute each task at least once before driving outputs
Controlling Turn on outputs
Loading Online load is in progress
Load complete Online load has finished. Wait for re-synchronization of redundant controllers
Fail Failure has occurred
Note When the user certificate expires, refer to the SecurityST* Cyber Security Management System Maintenance Guide
(GEH-6765) for the renewal procedure.
A second server, called a Remote System log (RSyslog), logs all security-related events. To send security-related messages, a
controller must know the IP address of the RSyslog. The RSyslog also receives security-related messages from the
ToolboxST application. Examples of data collected by the RSyslog include:
524 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Additionally, at the device level, the Command Event Log Property must be set to Log to Disk.
For dual and TMR configurations, select Go to Secure for each controller.
Attention
Note When the process is in the Authenticated state, the controller is retrieving a certificate revocation list from the CA
Server to verify that the requestor has a valid certificate.
The Component Info View Status tab displays the Security state for each configured controller.
526 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Example of Controller Security State
A controller cannot communicate on a network until these controller setup tasks are
completed.
Attention
Prerequisites
Verify the following criteria before configuration:
Note If using a Shared IONet system, repeat the procedures in this section for both the Mark VIe and VIeS components.
➢ To change redundancy
1. From the General tab Tree View, select General.
2. From the Property Editor, select Redundancy, and from the drop-down list select the correct option to match the
installed controller hardware (simplex, dual, or TMR). The Summary View displays the set of controllers for the
redundancy selected (one, two, or three).
3. From the Hardware tab, set the Network Redundancy to indicate the number of IONet networks (simplex, dual, or
TMR) that are used with this set of controller(s). Refer to GEH-6721_Vol_I for more information on redundancy options.
528 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4. Click to save the change. From the Component InfoView, the Log tab displays status information.
Note The default IP address is used as an example in this procedure. Because the default IP address assigned to the first
controller is 192.168.101.111, the UDH Ethernet port on the computer running the ToolboxST application must be assigned
an address in the same subnet, or 192.168.101.xxx, where xxx is in the range 002 to 255 (except the addresses used by the
controllers).
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel and Network and Sharing Center.
Select Change
adapter settings to
display the network
connections for the
computer.
Note Administrator privileges are required to access the Properties dialog box.
From the
Networking
tab, select
Internet
Protocol
Version 4
(TCP/IPv4),
then click
Properties.
530 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Select Use the
following IP
address.
In the IP address
field, enter
192.168.101.11,
then confirm the
Subnet mask
255.255.255.0.
3. Set the correct SubnetMask for the site UDH network. The
default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
1. From the System Editor, double-click the controller set to open the Component
Editor.
2. From the General tab Tree View, select Network Adapter 0. The Property
Editor displays the Network as UDH, the Host Name for this device on the
network, and the IP Address. The default IP address assigned to the first
controller in the system is 192.168.101.111. For TMR controllers, this address is
assigned to R controller, with 192.168.101.112 assigned to S controller, and
192.168.101.113 assigned to T.
3. Enter the new IP address for the R controller. If using redundant controllers,
their IP addresses are automatically updated along with the change to the R
controller.
532 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
7.4.1.3 Configure and Transfer IP Address to UCSB / UCSC Controller
Prerequisites
Verify the following criteria before configuration:
• The control system hardware and network cabling have been connected properly
• All system equipment has been successfully powered on
• The controller has been added to the system with the correct redundancy
If this is a new UCSB controller received directly from the factory, or a UCSB that has
not been previously configured, the IP address must be set using a USB flash device.
Skip to step b in this procedure.
Attention
ii. Connect an RJ-45 serial cable adapter from the main board of the controller to a serial port on your computer:
Note The boot LED blinking after this operation is normal and signifies the unit has booted and is waiting for an
application download.
534 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
b. To re-initialize and transfer the configuration from ToolboxST to the controller hardware using a USB device, select
Initialize USB Flash Device and click Next to continue.
i. Insert a non-encrypted removable USB 2.0 (only) flash device with a 4 GB minimum capacity into the HMI
computer USB port.
ii. Initialize the controller.
iii. Remove the USB flash device from the USB port of the HMI computer, then click Finish.
iv. Remove power from the controller.
v. Insert the USB flash device into the controller. For a UCSB, press and hold in the Backup/Restore button. For
a UCSC, press and hold the PHY PRES button.
Note Refer to the Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Control Systems Volume II: System Guide for General-purpose
Applications (GEH-6721_Vol_II), the sections UCSC Restore and UCSB Backup and Restore for these
procedures.
vi. Apply power to the controller while continuing to press the button until the On LED on the front of the
controller becomes solid green, then release the button. The On LED turns off when the process is complete.
vii. Remove power from the controller, remove the USB flash device, then re-apply power to the controller.
viii. If using redundant controllers, repeat this procedure for the S and T controllers (if TMR) or S (if dual). Be sure
to select the correct Channel.
Note The boot LED blinking after this operation is normal and signifies the unit has booted and is waiting for an
application download.
536 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
7.4.1.4 Configure and Transfer IP Address to UCCA / UCCC / UCSA Controller
Prerequisites
Verify the following criteria before configuration:
• The control system hardware and network cabling have been connected properly
• All system equipment has been successfully powered on.
• The controller has been added to the system with the correct redundancy
• The computer that runs the ToolboxST application and the controllers must be configured to be on the same subnet for
UDH Ethernet communication.
Use one of the following methods to configure the TCP/IP address of the UCCA / UCCC / UCSA controller for
communication on the UDH Ethernet network.
ii. Connect an RJ-45 serial cable adapter from the main board of the controller to a serial port on your computer:
• UCCA RJ-45 adapter (GE part number 342A4931ABP1) and controller connector (GE part number
342A4931ABP2) or a miniature D shell, null modem serial cable (GE part number 336A3582P1), connected
with a micro-miniature pigtail (GE part number 336A4929G1)
• UCCC RJ-45 adapter (GE part number 342A4931ABP1)
• UCSA RJ-45 adapter (GE part number 342A4944P1)
iii. Click Next to continue.
iv. The Controller Setup Wizard displays the progress of the connection. When it is complete, click Finish.
v. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the replacement controller’s COM port, and disconnect the serial adapter
from the engineering workstation.
vi. Reboot the controller.
vii. Configure the replacement controller and/or set of controllers with the site-specific controller password. Refer to
the section Controller Password Change for further instructions.
Note On a UCSA, the boot LED blinking after this operation is normal and signifies the unit has booted and is
waiting for an application download.
538 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
b. Select Format Flash to reconfigure the Ethernet settings and transfer the configuration from the ToolboxST
application to the controller hardware using a CompactFlash device (PCMCIA adapter or USB device).
Turn off power to the controller and unplug the CompactFlash from the controller. Insert the CompactFlash into the
card reader, then plug the card reader into the USB port of the computer that is running the ToolboxST application.
Note From a Windows 7 computer, run the ToolboxST application as an Administrator to format a CompactFlash card.
Verify the controller name and the IP address. The IP addre ss is 192.168.101.1xy (where x = controller number;
1 for G1, 2 for G2, and so forth) and y = TMR number; 1 for R, 2 for S, and 3 for T).
540 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Note If the scan cannot locate the flash card, either the card reader is improperly connected or the flash card is faulty.
6. From the Controller Setup Wizard, click Write to format the CompactFlash.
7. Verify that the CompactFlash download completed successfully message displays, then click Finish.
8. Insert the CompactFlash into the controller.
9. Apply power to the controller (red boot LED should flash at 1 Hz).
10. If the Mark VIe control interfaces with a SecurityST platform that is utilizing MAC filtering, update the MAC filtering to
account for the new controller core (as appropriate) per SecurityST guidelines and procedures.
11. Repeat this procedure for each controller (if using a redundant controller set). Be sure to select the correct Channel that
matches the redundant controller.
Note On a UCSA, the boot LED blinking after this operation is normal and signifies the unit has booted and is waiting for
an application download.
The UCPA requires a special serial port cable (GE part number
115T8986P0001) and a DB9 COM port to USB port adapter for the setup of
network IP address. The factory default IP address is 192.168.101.111. The
correct UDH IP address must be properly set up so that the UCPA can
communicate to the site HMIs.
• UCSBH1A, UCSCH2A
• UCSBH4A, UCSCH2A
Note For Simplex configurations, only one platform displays and controller interoperability is not available.
When changing the controller Platform property, for Platform S and T, only valid platforms are available in the drop-down
menu.
When changing Platform R, all available platforms are displayed in the drop-down menu. If the major revision is set and an
incompatible platform is selected, a Warning dialog box indicates that a reboot is required.
Click No to select a valid, compatible platform. Click Yes to change platforms.
542 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Major Revision with Incompatible Interoperable Controllers Platform Warning
After changing the <S> platform type, the <R> controller equality is still Equal and Controlling.
3. From the ToolboxST application, perform a Controller Setup to configure the proper IP address for the new controller by
writing the configuration to a USB flash device.
Note For detailed instructions, refer to the section Configure and Transfer IP Address to UCSB / UCSC Controller.
4. Perform a Build and Download to the S controller. The download will only affect the replacement controller.
Note If you replace a controller with a different controller type (such as UCSBH1A with UCSCH2A) and try to perform
a Download without first performing a Build, you will be prompted to perform a Build. A Build is necessary because you
are still controlling with the replaced controller type (UCSBH1A) as the Designated Controller (R).
After the download completes, the replacement controller automatically restarts and enters the Controlling state.
544 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Redundant Interoperable Controllers Equal and Controlling
5. Because you have made a change to the configuration and the current backup file is only downloaded to the replacement
controller, it is recommended that you send the backup file to all controllers.
To maintain a strong security posture GE recommends the user must change the
factory default controller password for a device. The maximum number of characters
for the new password is limited to 8 characters. The new password cannot be the
factory default password. The factory default password is ge.
For additional details, refer to Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Control Systems Volume II:
Attention System Guide for General-purpose Applications (GEH-6721_Vol_II), the chapter
Controller Diagnostic Alarms, alarm 547.
The Log tab displays password change success or error messages as they occur.
546 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Note For a device configured with redundant controllers, the password applies to all controllers in that device.
Note This password is required for configuring the network address during controller setup.
When the password for the replacement controller is successfully synchronized to the other controller passwords in the set, a
message displays in the Log window.
• Boot Loader starts the operating system for the controller and I/O modules, much like the BIOS on a desktop computer.
Changes to the boot loader are very infrequent.
Note Not all devices have the boot loader. In this case, the boot loader is contained within the base load.
Base Load contains the operating system for the controller and I/O modules. While changes to the base load are more
likely than changes to the boot loader, they still occur infrequently.
• Firmware provides the functionality of the controller and I/O modules. It can be updated over the lifetime of the
controller to incorporate new features and bug fixes.
• Application Code contains the configuration of the controller as created in the ToolboxST application. Whenever a
change is made to the configuration, the application code must be downloaded. There are two types of application code
download: online and offline. An online download (very commonly performed) changes the configuration without
interrupting control and the new configuration takes effect between control frames. An offline download requires a
controller restart (performed less frequently).
• Parameters contain specific configuration for the I/O modules.
Boot loader, base load, firmware, offline application code downloads, and parameter
downloads all require the target device to be restarted. Before downloading new
software to a controller, take the necessary steps to secure the control equipment to
prevent equipment damage and personal injury.
Warning
Note The type of software download needed is determined by which changes have been made to the controller
configuration.
The Download Wizard is used to download software to a Mark VIe component and its distributed I/O modules over an
Ethernet connection. The Download Wizard can automatically examine the system configuration to locate out-of-date
software, or you can manually select individual items to download.
548 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To download software to a controller
Note Certain conditions do not allow a download, such as an incorrect platform type. Check the Component InfoView for
errors that may prohibit a download.
1. Disable the I/O modules from the configuration. It can be easier to download to the I/O modules after the controller is
successfully online.
From the
Component
Editor Hardware
tab, select all I/O
modules
2. From the toolbar, click the Build icon. From the Component InfoView Log tab, verify that there are no errors or
resolve issues before proceeding.
3. From the Component Editor Device menu, select Download and Download Wizard.
Or, from the toolbar, click the Download icon.
Note You can perform a Download without performing the Build command. However, if you have changed
configuration settings since the last Build operation, a message box indicates that the software is out of date. Click Yes to
build the current configuration.
If a change occurred that requires a restart of the controller, a wizard page displays with a Restart Controller after
Download check box selected.
5. When the download has completed, click Finish.
6. Repeat this procedure as needed until the configurations display as equal from the Build.
7. From the toolbar, click the Go On/Offline icon to go online with the controller.
If the configuration being downloaded contains I/O packs with IDs that are different
from the currently running configuration, incorrect firmware can be installed to some
I/O packs. If this occurs, confirm that the controller is running the new configuration,
restart the entire system, then restart the ToolboxST Download Wizard.
Attention
The APP_STATE block can prohibit a download and restart of the controller.
Attention
If the DOWNLOAD_OK input of the APP_STATE block is set to True, all downloads are allowed. If this value is set to
False, all downloads (except Update DDR and Device Backup) are prohibited. This condition also applies to an attempted
download of an I/O pack from the Hardware tab of the Component Editor. If the download is prohibited, a warning displays in
the Component InfoView, and the Download Mark VIe Controller wizard displays the prohibited download. For additional
information on the APP_State block, refer to the Mark VIe Controller Standard Block Library Instruction Guide
(GEI-100682).
550 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Download Prohibited Warning in Component InfoView
➢ To update the DDR: from the Device menu, select Update Dynamic Data Recorder and follow the instructions
on the ToolboxST windows.
➢ To view and set the controller time: from the Device menu, select View/Set Time... and follow the instructions
on the ToolboxST windows.
➢ To back up files to the controller: from the Device menu, select Download, then select Backup Files to
Controller.
552 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIe — Working Online GEH-6703P User Guide 553
Public Information
7.6 Backup/Restore Controller Configuration
If the controller fails, perform one of the following backup and/or restore procedures:
Note Upon shipment from the factory, a controller that supports EFA does not include the software to support
communication from the PHY PRES button to the EFA. To enable this, the user needs to download to the controller at least
once (using ToolboxST).
554 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
7.7 Command Event History
The Command Event History option allows you to display diagnostics events and command history stored in the controller.
Message
time stamp
Message
fault code
Message
status
(0=inactive;
1=active)
Message
description
➢ To display I/O diagnostics: from the component View menu, select Diagnostics and I/O Diagnostics.
Note For more information, refer to the section I/O Diagnostic Viewer.
558 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
7.9 Frame Timeline Profiler
The Frame Timeline Profiler displays the amount of time various controller tasks take to run within a controller frame and an
Execution Group frame. Such tasks include transferring data from I/O into signal space, executing high and low priority
blockware, and generating EGD.
➢ To refresh controller task time frame data: from the Frame Time Profiler dialog box, click the Refresh icon
(located in the upper right corner of the window).
Using the Zoom icon, users can zoom in or out on the timeline data either horizontally only (default), or both horizontally and
vertically.
➢ To control horizon/vertical zoom: from the Frame Time Profiler dialog box, click the Zoom icon (located in
the upper right corner of the window) to switch (toggle) between horizontal only zoom or horizontal and vertical zoom.
Note Before modifying Totalizer values in a redundant controller, connect to the R controller and make sure all other
redundant controllers are healthy and communicating. (Refer to the section Connect to Controller.)
560 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
7.10.1 Totalizer Passwords
All users can view Totalizer values, but modifying the values requires a temporary password obtained from GE.
Note Totalizer passwords are specific to the connected redundant controller (R, S, or T) and cannot be used on other
controllers.
Note Totalizer passwords are usually valid for 24 hours from time of creation.
2. From the Modify Totalizer Value dialog box, enter the new value and click OK.
562 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
8 Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart
(SFC) Editor
A Sequential Function Chart (SFC) is a graphical programming model that allows you to organize an application by creating a
state machine containing three types of components: Steps, Actions, and Transitions.
3. From the Add SFC dialog box, enter a name for the SFC and click OK.
Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 563
Public Information
When the SFC is created, the Initial Step is already defined.
From the Logic Editor, you can configure the properties and edit the SFC.
From the Tree View, click the new From the toolbar, click Edit SFC
sfc to display the SFC Logic Editor to make changes to the logic
564 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
8.1.2 SFC Properties
SFC Properties
Property Description
Appearance
Description Description
Name Name
Step Description Text Defaults Sets the default color, font, and fill style of description text for Steps
Transition Description Text Defaults Sets the default color, font, and fill style of description text for Transitions
Text Shape Defaults Sets the default color, font, and fill style of free-form text shapes
Automation
Instance Script Script that runs when the task is instanced
Sets the default color, font, and fill style of Steps, Transitions, and free-form text. These
Transition Description Text Defaults
settings can be modified and applied to all SFCs.
General
Always Show Descriptions on Steps When set to True, steps and transitions will automatically have a Description text shape
and Transitions next to them
Default Transition Descriptions to When set to True, the Description for each transition defaults to a text equivalent
Show Logic Equations (equation) of the transition condition logic
EGD EGD page that contains all published variables from the SFC
New Transition Condition Options Sets the default contents of the Transition condition logic
Protection Provides access rights
Put Action of Interest Status on EGD When set to True, publishes the Action of Interest status variables on the EGD page
Put Step Active Times on EGD When set to True, publishes the Active Time variable for each Step on the EGD page
Put Transition Progression Status on When set to True, publishes the Transition progression status variable for each
EGD Transition on the EGD page
Version User-defined version of an SFC
HMI Link Source Source file containing visuals for SFC elements
HMI Linked Object for SFC Network HMI object that visualizes the overall SFC network
HMI Linked Object for Steps HMI object that visualizes an SFC step
HMI Linked Object for Transitions HMI object that visualizes an SFC transition
Execution Order Sets the order in which the program is run
Frame Multiplier Number of frames at which the SFC task runs
Schedule Offset Offset from the beginning of the frame at which the SFC task runs
Note Most SFC property settings can be exported to an .xml file that can be modified in a text editor and imported into other
SFCs. For further details on the import and export options, refer to the section SFC Content Menu.
Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 565
Public Information
8.1.3 SFC Context Menu
The SFC context menu displays the available editing commands for an SFC.
➢ To display the SFC context menu: right-click anywhere in the SFC diagram.
566 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
8.1.4 Edit SFC
➢ To edit an SFC: from the SFC toolbar, click Edit SFC.
Note When in editing mode, the Edit SFC button displays as Editing SFC, and additional buttons are displayed on the
toolbar.
SFC Toolbar
Toolbar Buttons
Button Name and Icon Description of Use
Change the orientation and size of the SFC diagram. When printed, the diagram is scaled
Virtual Paper Size and/or rotated to the printer’s paper size.
Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 567
Public Information
Toolbar Buttons (continued)
Button Name and Icon Description of Use
568 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
8.1.6 Add Action
➢ To add an Action: from the SFC toolbar, click the Selection Tool and double-click a step.
Note The Active and Finished fields indicate the status of the Action.
Action Qualifiers
Qualifier Description
N The Action runs every frame that the Step is Active.
The Action runs for a specific number of ms while the Step is Active, indicated by the Time value, then
L
stops running.
The Action does not run until the number of ms indicated by the Time value has been reached, after
D
which the Action runs every frame the Step is Active.
P The Action runs only once and is triggered by a rising edge on the Action’s Pulse Input.
L and D Action Qualifiers: a Time value, either a reference variable or an immediate value, must be specified in the Time
column for the Action.
P Action Qualifier: a Pulse Input Boolean value must be specified in the Pulse Input column for the Action.
By default, a PERMIT block is automatically created in a new Transition. The output of the PERMIT is connected to the
Transition_Condition_Value, and any conditions for the Transition can be connected to the PERMIT’s inputs.
The PERMIT standardizes the Transition conditions so that HMI screens have a common method to display information about
Transitions.
Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 569
Public Information
➢ To define an Action’s logic: from the SFC toolbar, click the Selection Tool and double-click a step.
An Action can be authored in Terms of Blockware in the logic sheet.
Note Always connect the Action_Finished local variable to a Boolean expression. The Action_Finished variable enables the
Actions of Interest feature to know that the Action has finished its operation. This is recommended even if the application
does not use Actions of Interest.
➢ To define a Transition’s condition logic: from the toolbar, click the Selection Tool and double-click a
Transition.
A Transition Condition can be authored in Terms of Blockware.
Note Always connect the Transition_Condition_Value local variable to the result of the Transition Condition Boolean
expression. The Transition_Condition_Value variable enables the SFC to progress if the Transition Condition Value evaluates
True when the Transition is Active.
570 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Connected Transition_Condition_Value Local Variable
➢ To use a Step’s Action of Interest status in a Transition condition: from the toolbar, click the Selection Tool
and double-click a Transition.
Using a Transition condition’s Boolean expression, such as defining whether or not the configured Actions of Interest for the
Initial Step have been completed, add a Move block whose source (SRC) pin is the MySFC.Initial_Actions_Of_Interest_
Status global variable and whose destination (DEST) pin is the Transition_Condition_Value local variable.
A Step’s Action of Interest Status is referenced from a Transition Condition.
Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 571
Public Information
8.1.8 Add End Transition
➢ To add an End Transition
1. From the toolbar, click End SFC Transition Drawing Tool.
2. Move the cursor to the SFC logic sheet to place the End Transition. Enter a name and click OK.
572 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To connect Steps to Transitions: from the toolbar, click the Selection Tool and click the Step to be linked.
Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 573
Public Information
8.1.9 Variable Connections
There are several required variable connections when defining SFCs in the ToolboxST application. For example:
• When defining a Transition’s Transition Condition, always connect the Boolean expression’s output to the Transition_
Condition_Value local variable. This enables the Transition to progress.
• When defining a Step’s Action Logic, always connect a Boolean expression to the Action_Finished local variable. This
enables Actions of Interest Control to be used in the SFC by having the Action state when it has finished. This is
recommended even if Actions of Interest Control is not being used in the application. It makes using the Actions of
Interest Control feature in the application much easier later in development if needed.
3. In the property grid, enter the free-form text and configure the properties for the text shape:
574 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
• Fill Color: select the fill color for the text shape.
• Font: select the text font.
• Foreground Color: select the color of the text.
• Is Filled: set to True to fill the text shape with color, or
False for no fill color.
• Text: enter the text you want displayed in the text
shape.
Note Text shapes can also by created by pasting text from another application such as Microsoft Word or Excel.
3. In the property grid, configure the Geometric Shape properties for the shape:
Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 575
Public Information
• Fill Color: select the fill color for the shape.
• Geometric Shape: select a shape (Rectangle, Ellipse,
or Line)
• Is Filled: set to True to fill the shape with color, or
False for no fill color.
• Line Color: select a color for the shape line.
• Line Thickness: select the line thickness.
576 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
8.1.13 Display Descriptions on Steps and Transitions
Each Step and Transition has a Show Description property. When the Show Description property is set to True, a text shape
is automatically created to store and display the Description text.
Unlike a free-form text shape, the Description text’s position is relative to the Step or Transition to which it is linked, and
moves with it. However, you can resize or move the text relative to the Step or Transition, and adjust the font and colors.
When the Description text is selected, a tooltip hint identifies the link.
Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 577
Public Information
8.1.14 Display Transition Condition Logic in Description
The Description property of a Transition can be set to include a substitution string, {TransitionCondition}, that will be
replaced with a descriptive textual representation (equation) of the transition condition logic in that transition. For example, a
transition driven by a Rung block as follows:
Not all Transition Condition logic can be displayed as text. The equation strings are limited to four block types that can drive
the transition condition:
• LOGIC_BUILDER
• LOGIC_BUILDER_SC
• RUNG
• MOVE
• PERMIT
All other blocks will display (custom logic) in the equation.
Inputs (to the supported block types) must be Named variables. For example, in the illustration used for a transition driven by
a Rung block above, the D input of the Rung is connected to an unnamed pin, AND_1.OUT, so (custom logic) is displayed for
that input in the description equation.
Since the description substitutes the {TransitionCondition}, you can build up more descriptive strings. For example, Wait for
the tank to fill ({TransitionCondition}) would display as Wait for the tank to fill (TankFull OR TankFillFailed).
578 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
8.1.15 Virtual Paper Size
The SFC Logic Editor is designed to display exactly what you will see when printing—pagination and paper size are
indicated in the background of the editor. However, diagrams are usually arranged on one paper size and printed on another.
In this case, the SFC will automatically be scaled and/or rotated to fit on and maximize the use of the printed paper.
Pagination can be inconvenient when designing and using large SFCs. An SFC is often better suited for Portrait or Landscape
paper. Sometimes the paper is too small. For these situations, the SFC Logic Editor can switch between Landscape and
Portrait, normal and large sizes. In the large size (Large Portrait or Large Landscape), the SFC contents are shrunk by 50%, so
you can fit four times as much logic on the paper with smaller font sizes.
➢ To select the virtual paper size: from the SFC toolbar, click the Virtual Paper Size icon and select the size from
the drop-down menu (check mark displays next to the selected item).
Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 579
Public Information
8.2 Online Operations
➢ To run an SFC in a controller from the ToolboxST application
1. From the Mark VIe Component Editor, go online with the controller.
2. From the Software tab Tree View, select the SFC item to open the logic sheet.
3. From the tool bar, click Run the SFC.
4. To pause the SFC, click Pause to display the Pause SFC dialog box and click OK.
➢ To reset an SFC back to its Initial Step: from the toolbar, click Reset to display the Reset SFC dialog box and
click OK. The reset Initial Step displays green.
Attention
580 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To change an SFC mode
1. From the tool bar, click Mode to display the Single Step Mode SFC dialog box and click OK.
2. To place the SFC back into Free Running mode, click Mode again and click OK.
Note When the SFC is placed into Single Step Mode, all Implicit Holds are removed from Transitions, and previously set
Operator Holds are restored.
2. To remove an Operator Hold, right-click on Transition and select Remove HOLD from Transition.
➢ To acknowledge a HOLD applied to a Transition: from the logic sheet, right-click the Transition that has a
HOLD applied and select Acknowledge Hold.
Note If the Transition Condition for Trans1 was set to True at the time the HOLD was acknowledged, the SFC would
continue.
➢ To apply a FORCE to a Transition: from the logic sheet, right-click the Transition and select Force Transition.
Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 581
Public Information
8.3 Publish SFC on EGD Page
An SFC’s Control and Monitor interface, which can be placed on an EGD page, includes:
• Run
• Reset
• Transition Hold
• Transition Hold Acknowledge
• Transition Force variables
In addition, the SFC’s Step Active Flags, Transition Active Flags, and Transition Condition Value are placed onto EGD
automatically.
You have the option to place items from the SFC Monitor Interface on EGD. These items include Action of Interest Status,
Transition Progression Status, and Step Active Times variables. By default, the Step Active Times are automatically placed on
EGD in the ToolboxST application.
➢ To place an SFC and its Control Interface on EGD: from the Software tab Tree View, select an SFC.
To remove the
SFC from EGD,
from the drop-
down list, select
the blank entry
582 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To place other SFC activities on an EGD page
Mark VIe Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 583
Public Information
Notes
584 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9 Mark VIe FOUNDATION Fieldbus™
Interface
9.1 Overview
The Mark* VIe control FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ interface is a fieldbus protocol based on international standards and designed
for applications in manufacturing, process automation, and buildings automation. The guidelines for this fieldbus standard are
published by the Fieldbus Foundation.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus technology provides a standardized communications and controls system to allow the customer the
ability to install components from various manufacturers as they deem necessary. There are a variety of manufacturer’s
components that are certified as compatible with FOUNDATION Fieldbus technology and therefore can be interchanged for a
competitor’s similar component. This allows GE customers to use a wider variety of equipment in the Mark VIe control
system. Refer to the Mark VIe Control FOUNDATION Fieldbus Interface Application Guide (GEH-6761) for additional
information.
The ability to interchange a certified device from one manufacturer with a certified device from another manufacturer
(interoperability) is made possible by the fact that devices and software are conforming to the same standard. The Fieldbus
Foundation tests and registers the devices to ensure interoperability of registered instruments from multiple vendors. This
enables the end user to select the best instruments for the application regardless of the host system supplier.
Note For additional information, refer to the Mark VIe Control FOUNDATION Fieldbus Interface Application Guide
(GEH-6761), the section System Parameters.
Note A major difference occurs when adding the first linking device and requires a restart-required load. Any linking device
added after that is a minor difference and only requires an online load. A major difference also occurs when removing the last
linking device and requires a restart-required load. Any linking device removed other than the last one is a minor difference
and only requires an online load.
586 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
6. From the Type list, select the PFFA module.
Note The Physical Device (PD) tag is a unique, configurable, system dependent name for the device.
Tip � The DeviceID can be entered directly or searched for by using the ellipsis (…) mechanism.
9. In the Configure Device section, from the HW Form drop-down list, leave the default as H1B or select H1A for LDEvR
(Simplex). Repeat for LDevS for a HotBackup configuration.
10. From the LAN Port drop-down list, leave the default as IONet1 or select IONet2 for LDEvR (Simplex). Repeat for
LDevS for a HotBackup configuration (default is IONet 2).
11. From the Position drop-down list, leave the default position as 24 (ToolboxST) or enter another position number for
LDEvR (Simplex). Repeat for LDevS for a HotBackup configuration (default ToolboxST Position is 231).
12. Click Next to continue.
13. Review the configuration summary, then click Finish to add the module.
588 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The PFFA linking device (such as PFFA-21) displays in the Tree View and a graphical representation displays the
Summary View. The Properties display in the Property Editor.
590 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.2.1.2 Modify a Linking Device
➢ To modify a linking device
1. From the System Editor Tree View, double-click the Mark VIe component (such as FF3) to display the Component
Editor.
2. From the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click a linking device and select Modify from the shortcut menu.
592 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.2.2 Attached Segments
An H1 segment (or fieldbus) connects the linking device to the fieldbus device. A segment is a section of a H1 fieldbus. Up to
four H1 segments can be attached to each linking device. Segments can be linked by repeaters to form a longer H1 fieldbus.
Each segment can include up to 16 H1 devices.
Port Properties
Property Description
Identification
Name Name of the selected port
Port Number Number of the port
Port Type Type of port
4. From the Tree View, right-click the Port and select Attach Segment from the shortcut menu.
594 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
5. The attached Segment displays in the Tree View and in the Summary View.
596 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.2.2.2 Configure Attached Segment Macrocycle
A macrocycle is a single iteration of a schedule within a device. The attached segment macrocycle is configured by modifying
the attached segment’s properties in the Hardware tab Property Editor.
➢ To configure an attached segment macrocycle: from the System Editor Tree View, double-click the Mark
VIe component (such as FF3) to display the Component Editor.
Note The desired macrocycle time must be in multiples of the controller’s frame rate to which the segment’s linking device
belongs.
• A generic fieldbus function block is assigned to a fieldbus device placeholder in the segment.
• An assigned fieldbus function block is unassigned from a fieldbus device placeholder in the segment.
The ToolboxST application updates the selected macrocycle time when the desired macrocycle time is updated.
When running at a 320 microsecond macrocycle, input health may be impacted under certain instances. Any failure that
results in the secondary PFFA switching to the primary PFFA may result in missed data for up to and including three
macrocycles. During this period of time, the status can go to UNCERTAIN. This should be accounted for in the application
design when using 320 microsecond macrocycle segments. Events that cause the PFFA to switch are as follows:
598 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The Macrocycle Timeline Viewer displays.
• View which assigned fieldbus function blocks will execute at what time during the macrocycle.
• View time allotted during the unscheduled portion of the macrocycle for the reading of views of assigned fieldbus
function blocks configured for placement on EGD.
• Refresh the macrocycle timeline view by invoking a method which recalculates the macrocycle timeline calculation
algorithm.
• Switch to view a different segment’s macrocycle timeline.
• Print the displayed macrocycle view
• Summary
• Link Settings
• Link Master Information
• System Management Information
➢ To display the attached segment Summary View: from the ToolboxST System Editor Tree View, double-click
the Mark VIe component (FF3) to display the Component Editor.
The Summary tab displays the linking device, attached segment, and any attached H1 devices. The parameters displayed on
the other tabs provide additional configuration options for the linking device and the segments attached to it.
600 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The Link Settings tab displays the Name ,
Description, Range, and Value of the link.
602 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
System Management Information Tab Parameters
Name Description Range
This is the preset value for the SM service timeout timer in 1/32 of a
T1StepTimer millisecond ticks. It defines the time which the SM kernel of the host will 0 – 524288
wait for a response to a SM request to the field device.
The timer T2 is a sequence duration timer. Its purpose is to guarantee
T2Set AddressSequenceTimer that incorrectly performed or incomplete sequences are aborted in the 0 – 3000000
System Management Kernel of the device.
This time is used by the Sm kernel of the host after a new address was
T3SetAddressWaitTimer assigned to a field device to wait before checking for the field device at 0 – 2000000
the new node address.
This variable is the interval in seconds between time messages on the
ApClockSyncInterval 1 - 255
link. It is set by system management during node address assignment.
Note All devices connected to a segment must be deleted before a segment can be detached.
Tip � A linking device can be deleted from the Hardware tab Tree View. This causes all segments to detach under the linking
device.
604 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.2.2.6 Restore Segment Defaults
If multiple changes have been made to an attached segment and you want to return to the original attached segment
configuration, use the Restore Segment Defaults option.
➢ To restore segment defaults: from the ToolboxST System Editor Tree View, double click the Mark VIe
component (such as FF3) to display the Component Editor.
Note Refer to the Device Definition (DD) files or the vendor for a list of compatible devices.
606 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the DD
Importer dialog box ,
fieldbus device DD
files can be sorted by
Manufacturer,
Device Category ,
and Device Name .
Click Close .
Note The .cff file determines which DD files (.ffo, .ff5, .sym, or .sy5) for a device are imported.
Imported DD files can be viewed in the ToolboxST application’s System Editor and in the controller Component Editor from
the View menu using the FOUNDATION Fieldbus DD Manager. They also display during the Add H1 Field Device process which
uses the FOUNDATION Fieldbus DD Manager. The FOUNDATION Fieldbus DD Manager displays the DD files in the DD Importer
dialog box.
If you delete an H1 device that has associated blockware, perform a build of the
controller before you insert a new H1 device on the segment. This build will result in
errors if there are any function blocks on the Software tab that were assigned to the
H1 device that was deleted. These function blocks either need to be deleted or
unassigned and re-assigned to another H1 device block on that segment before a
successful build will occur. If these blocks are not unassigned and re-assigned, then
Attention there is a possibility that an inserted H1 device will generate the PDTags necessary for
the blockware to assume that the original H1 device is present and it will not rebuild
the macrocycle. This could potentially lead to build and download errors.
➢ To instance a fieldbus device placeholder: from the ToolboxST System Editor Tree View, double-click the
Mark VIe component (such as FF3) to display the Component Editor.
608 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the Add H1
Device Wizard ,
highlight the type of
fieldbus device
placeholder ( 848,
Fieldbus
Temperature Device,
Rosemount Inc.).
Click Next .
Click Next .
610 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Review the
operation .
Click Finish.
612 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the Tree View , select
the fieldbus device placeholder .
– If the fieldbus device is not in the Live List, a red X ( ) displays, the fieldbus
device is not online
Note When a fieldbus device is added to a system, it acts as a placeholder until it is commissioned. The commissioning
process makes the fieldbus device live and active in the system.
The ToolboxST application classifies a fieldbus device in one of the following states:
• Uninitialized State
− Fieldbus device does not have a PD_TAG
− Fieldbus device does not have a permanent node address
– Overlay symbol:
• Initialized State
− Fieldbus device has a PD_TAG
− Fieldbus device does not have a permanent node address
− Fieldbus device revisions match placeholder revisions
– Overlay symbol:
• Commissioned State
− Fieldbus device has a PD_TAG
− Fieldbus device has a permanent node address
– Overlay symbol:
• Mismatch State
− Fieldbus device revisions have not been obtained. Check for a communications failure diagnostic to determine if
there is a problem or if it is just taking a while to update.
− Fieldbus device revisions do not match the placeholder revisions. Re-add the placeholder using a DD file matching
the revisions.
− Fieldbus device has a node address collision with a fieldbus device placeholder of a different type
− Fieldbus device has a node address that does not exist in the ToolboxST configuration
− No DD files are available for the fieldbus device in the ToolboxST DD file database
– Overlay symbol:
614 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The following diagram displays the fieldbus state transitions.
616 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
An offline function block application configuration can be built in the Component Editor Software tab using the instanced
function blocks available in the Hardware tab that pertain to the selected capability level of the device placeholder. The
ToolboxST application builds the function block application configuration using the instanced blocks and downloads it to the
device through the Download Wizard.
Once the device placeholder is added with a capability level it cannot be modified in the ToolboxST application. The device
placeholder must be removed and a new one added with the desired capability level. The ToolboxST application handles the
cases in which blocks that were assigned in the Software tab are not available after the placeholder is removed and the new
one added with a different capability level. This is done by first making the blocks unassigned, but keeping the reference tags.
When a new device is added with the same reference tags, the blocks are automatically found and assigned to the device.
From the Hardware tab Tree View , select the fieldbus device placeholder
[3051 (PFFA-21_1_20 )] to display the device in the Summary View .
618 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Examples of possible no_download parameters include:
• XD_CAL_DATE
• XD_CAL_LOC
• XD_CAL_WHO
• (Manufacturer-specific calibration values)
Note A host that conforms to a specification level that precedes the addition of this capability will likely ignore this
capability and may download parameters that are listed in the no_download collection. Such a host may support a
non-FF-standard mechanism to prevent download of certain parameters.
➢ To view or edit device level blocks: from the ToolboxST System Editor Tree View, double-click the Mark VIe
component (such as FF3) to display the Component Editor.
620 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Fieldbus Device Block Properties
Category Property Notes
Block Index Index of block object in object dictionary
Plant site unique value for the block
The block must be taken Out of Service (OOS) to write the value during a
Block Tag
download. When a new block tag value is sent to a fieldbus device, the block that
is receiving the new block tag value must be placed OOS.
DD Revision DD revision of the block
Identification User-entry field to provide a name for a function block on an H1 device
The Device Tag can be used to locate a function block on an H1 device by
Device Tag running a report. The Device Tag field in the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Configuration
Report and the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Parameter Reconcile Report display the
Device Tag.
Number assigned by the fieldbus that uniquely identifies the profile on which the
Profile ID
block is based
Miscellaneous Enable View 1 for EGD When True, enables View 1 variables for EGD
Execution Period Time (in ms) between initiation of block execution (for periodic execution)
Schedule
Execution Time Total time (in ms) required for the block algorithm to run
Context menu It is typically a root menu that pops up on the right-click of the device tree node or block node under the
device.
• Graphs
A graph is used to display a data set that is stored in a device. The main user interface elements of a graph are the X and Y
axis, the waveforms, and the legends.
• Charts
A chart is used to display continuous data values from the device. The main user interface elements of a chart are the X and Y
axis, the waveforms, and the legends.
622 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
• Grids
A grid is used to display vectors of data along with the heading or description of the data in that vector. The vectors can be
displayed horizontally (rows) or vertically (columns).
• Image
The image displays the graphic image on the Menu window.
• Method
A method defines a set of actions to be performed by the host. Methods are a collection of statements that come as scripts in
the DD file given by the device developer. The execution of methods can lead to offline configuration changes or online
parameter value changes. The method wizard in the host application UI allows the user to run the methods step-by-step and
also allows the user to see the messages being sent out by the device to the host. The wizard also has the option of logging all
the messages that were sent back by the device.
624 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.2.5.5 Block Instantiation and Removal
Certain fieldbus devices support block instantiation (it displays in the Hardware tab Property Editor). This means that a
fieldbus device has a particular number of slots to be customized. The user can instance a certain number of supported blocks,
defined in the device’s .cff files, into the fieldbus device. These blocks can then be used throughout the configuration tool.
The ToolboxST application enables block instantiation inside of fieldbus devices that support the feature.
Click OK .
626 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
2. The Hardware tab Tree View displays the instantiated block and the internal data model is updated with the
instantiated block(s).
Instantiated blocks can also be removed.
2. The Hardware tab Tree View is updated, along with the internal data model, removing the instantiated block.
628 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.2.5.6 Sorting of Fieldbus Blocks
A fieldbus device placeholder’s fieldbus resource, transducer, and function blocks are sorted and display in the following
order:
• Resource block
• Transducer blocks by block tag
• Function blocks by profile ID then by block tag
Note The ToolboxST application ensures that all tag names are mutually exclusive throughout a Mark VIe component,
which means all PD tags and block tags are mutually exclusive of each other as well.
➢ To create a Special Fieldbus Task in a Mark VIe component: from the ToolboxST System Editor Tree View,
double-click the Mark VIe component (such as FF3) to display the Component Editor.
630 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the Add FF Task
dialog box , enter a Name
for the task ( Fieldbus).
Click OK .
632 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
A special fieldbus task provides several key items including:
634 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The task displays in the Tree View .
While creating a special fieldbus task inside a library, the following can be performed:
636 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.2.6.2 Instance Generic Fieldbus Function Blocks
Generic fieldbus function blocks can be instanced into the editing space of a special fieldbus task by dragging the appropriate
generic fieldbus block from the FOUNDATION Fieldbus block palette into a special fieldbus task. Refer to the Mark VIe Control
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Block Library Instruction Guide (GEI-100758) for detailed information about the function blocks.
➢ To instance a generic fieldbus function block into a special fieldbus task: from the ToolboxST System
Editor Tree View: double-click the Mark VIe component (such as FF3) to display the Component Editor.
638 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Each unassigned generic fieldbus function block has a question mark icon ( ) as its operational icon. When the generic
fieldbus function block is assigned, the question mark operational icon is replaced with the specific operational icon (such as
for the FF_AI block) that identifies the function of the function block. The ToolboxST application supports the
following generic fieldbus function blocks in standard and enhanced forms:
Arithmetic FF_AR
Integrator FF_IT
640 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Block Label Operational Icon
Multiple Analog
FF_MAI
Input
Multiple Analog
FF_MAO
Output
Multiple Discrete
FF_MDI
Input
Multiple Discrete
FF_MDO
Output
P, PD Controller FF_PD
Signal
FF_SC
Characterizer
Setpoint Ramp
FF_SPG
Generator
Timer FF_TMR
Unassigned Unassigned
642 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.2.6.3 Special Operations
The following operations can be performed while defining fieldbus logic:
➢ To assign a generic fieldbus function block to a fieldbus device placeholder: from the ToolboxST System
Editor Tree View, double-click the Mark VIe component (FF3) to display the Component Editor.
From the Software tab Tree View , expand and select a task ( Fieldbus),
the attached blocks display in the Tree View and Summary View .
Tip � The ToolboxST application only displays linking devices, attached segments, and fieldbus device placeholders which
contain the same type of generic fieldbus function block (AO in this example) trying to be assigned, to filter the selection
paths for the user.
644 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The extended parameters and extended
From the Hardware tab Tree View , select the functionality for the assigned block display
block ( Analog Output) that was assigned. in the Summary View Parameter
Editor in tabs .
Tip � Only the set of parameters that exist in both the previous generic fieldbus function block and the newly assigned
fieldbus function block retain their configured values when being changed from a generic fieldbus function block to an
assigned fieldbus function block.
• The PD tag of the fieldbus device placeholder that the block was assigned to displays (in blue) in the Software tab
Summary View with the fieldbus function block.
• An operational icon (such as ) replaces the question mark icon ( ) in the upper right-hand corner of the
fieldbus function block display.
• The fieldbus task’s execution rate is updated and displays in the Software tab Property Editor.
• The ToolboxST application updates the object model to indicate the current fieldbus task is associated with the segment
that owns the newly assigned fieldbus function block.
➢ To unassign a fieldbus function block from a fieldbus device placeholder: from the ToolboxST System
Editor Tree View, double-click the Mark VIe component (such as FF3) to display the Component Editor.
646 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the Software tab Tree View , expand and select a task ( Fieldbus),
the attached blocks display in the Tree View and Summary View .
The block is
unassigned .
• The PD tag of the fieldbus device placeholder which the block was assigned to is replaced with Unassigned in black.
• The operational icon (such as ) is replaced with the question mark icon
( ).
• The fieldbus task’s execution rate is updated and displays in the Software tab Property Editor.
• The ToolboxST application updates the object model to indicate the fieldbus task is no longer associated with the
segment that owns the unassigned fieldbus function block.
648 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Connect Blocks
Fieldbus function blocks can be connected to ToolboxST function blocks (as long as the data types match on both pins being
connected) by using the standard wiring tool ( ) or the drag-and-drop features that exist in the ToolboxST application.
The following are examples of connections in a fieldbus task:
Fieldbus Function Block to Mark VIe Function Block to Fieldbus Function Block Connection
➢ To place a fieldbus function block on EGD: from the ToolboxST System Editor Tree View, double-click the
Mark VIe component (FF3) to display the Component Editor.
650 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.2.6.4 Block Properties
Fieldbus blocks contain properties which can be configured and applied to commissioned online fieldbus devices. The
fieldbus block properties are edited in the Component Editor in the Property Editor. The fieldbus function, transducer, and
resource blocks are edited in the Hardware tab while the fieldbus function blocks can also be edited in the Software tab.
Fieldbus Block Properties in Hardware Tab Property Editor
Section Property Description
Block Index Index of the block object in the block library
Block Tag A plant site unique name for the block
Identification DD Revision The DD revision of the block
Number assigned by the fieldbus that uniquely identifies the profile on which the
Profile ID
block is based
Miscellaneous Enable View1 for EGD Enables View1 variables for EGD
Execution Period The time between initiation of block execution (for periodic execution) in ms
Schedule
Execution Time The total time required for the block algorithm to run in ms
Fieldbus Alarm Parameters (ending with _ALM) Properties in Software Tab Property Editor
Section Property Description
The value assigned when the alarm is in the active state. Used for filtering and
display in the WorkstationST Alarm Viewer. Valid range is 1-1000 where 1 is the
Active Severity
least severe. The range and usage is defined by OPC® for use in OPC AE
clients and servers.
For a Boolean variable, select the Alarmed string to make the variable an alarm.
Alarm
For an analog variable, select an alarm definition.
Alarm Class Select a System Configured Alarm Class
Alarm Inhibit Group Select the Alarm Inhibit Group for the alarm variable
Alarm On Zero Set to True to cause the alarm on a 1 to 0 transition. Requires Alarm = True
Alarms and Events Event Set to True to enable the variable as an Event.
Hold Set to True to enable the variable as a Hold.
The value assigned when the alarm is in the normal state. Used for filtering and
display in the WorkstationST Alarm Viewer. Valid range is 1-1000 where 1 is the
Normal Severity
least severe. Range and usage are defined by OPC for use in OPC AE clients
and servers.
Used to group variables into logical plant groupings for display in the
Plant Area WorkstationST Alarm Viewer. This is used instead of the HMI Resource due to
string length limitations.
SOE Description Description used for SOE.
Note The tabs are vendor-dependent, so not all of these tabs may display for a device.
652 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The available tabs for each block type and the block parameter configuration columns within these tabs are described in the
following tables.
654 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.2.7 Fieldbus Device Alerts
With the release of the ControlST* CD Version 04.03 the WorkstationST Alarm Viewer can now display fieldbus alerts. These
alerts are configured by alarm class as alarms, diagnostics, and so forth. FOUNDATION Fieldbus technology uses the existing
infrastructure, so all customization features typically available with the Alarm Viewer are available for FOUNDATION Fieldbus
alerts.
The following behaviors are supported from the Alarm Viewer, OPC AE Server, and GSM Server:
• Acknowledge
• Silence and Unsilence
• Lock
• Unlock
• Reset
• Filtering
− By fieldbus and non-fieldbus
− By fieldbus process alarm versus fieldbus device alert
− By device
− By plant area
Note Unacknowledged behavior is not supported because the state machine inside fieldbus devices does not support this
function.
Note Fieldbus Device Alerts (unlike ControlST Boolean alarms, Analog Alarms, Events, and Holds) are not available in
application code, meaning application code cannot be triggered to run when a Fieldbus Device Alert occurs. The Fieldbus
Device Alerts are available for online view and interaction from HMIs, Maintenance Workstations, and third-party software
through OPC AE Server, GSM Server, and WorkstationST Alarm Viewer.
Note To display or otherwise configure the FOUNDATION Fieldbus alerts, they must be enabled in the H1 device.
To use the device alerts they must be added to the application code (FOUNDATION Fieldbus task).
656 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the Summary View Alarm Configuration
tab, click select the functions to enable.
4. From the tool bar, click the Download button to download the controller and the H1 device.
Note Downloading directly to the H1 device is not allowed (different from an I/O pack).
658 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.2.8 Import and Export
The following existing entities that have fieldbus placeholders that are either commissioned or decommissioned, or fieldbus
function blocks that are either assigned or unassigned can be imported or exported:
• Device
• Library Container
• Watch Window
• Live View
• FF Configuration
• Global Variable Report
• Block Pin Report
• Programs
• Trender Data
• Primary and Second Language Descriptions
After the import:
• The Unknown icon displays for any fieldbus device placeholder for which DD files cannot be found.
• A previously assigned fieldbus function block in a fieldbus task becomes unassigned if the fieldbus device placeholder is
not found
Note The imported device does not bring along the DD files it referenced.
Note This feature currently supports a one-to-multiple import; however, the user has to multi-select the individual target H1
devices for import. This is currently limited to a per-segment multi-select function.
Note All parameters in a FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 device have a default value. Currently, the only parameters included in the
exported .xml template file are parameters that have had their default values changed. Any exported parameters with a default
value on the H1 device will not be written into target H1 devices upon import.
For example:
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device 1, TAG_DESCRIPTION = “ ”
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device 2, TAG_DESCRIPTION = “FF Device 2 Tag”
FOUNDATIONFieldbus Device 1 (device being exported) did not change the default value of parameter TAG_DESCRIPTION
from “ ”. FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device 2 imports the template file from FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device 1. FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Device 2 still has TAG_DESCRIPTION = “FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device 2 Tag” because the TAG_DESCRIPTION parameter
for FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device 1 was still the default value, and, as a result, was not exported to the template .xml file.
Any changes made to the default values are written to the template .xml file.
2. Name and save the template .xml files to the default location at the system level.
Note The default naming convention is FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Name_FOUNDATION Fieldbus Device Type_
DeviceRevision; however, this name can be changed to provide more detail to the contents of the template .xml file.
660 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Example Template .xml File Name
2. Import the H1 device template from the default location containing the template XML file is at the system level.
Note The Info tab indicates import status and notifies the user when import is complete or if errors occurred.
662 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3. After the import is complete, enter a Tag description.
Example Log Message — Successful Import, Matching Devices Types, Matching Device Revisions
Example Log Message — Successful Import, Matching Devices Types, Different Device Revisions
• All fieldbus parameters import the HelpText using the language codes for the Primary Language from the DD files (if
available).
• All fieldbus parameters import the alternate HelpText using the language codes for the second language from the DD
files (if available).
• If an item in the DD files only gives one string with no language code, it is assumed to be English. In this case the
alternate HelpText remains blank.
Note The primary and second language descriptions are user-editable text. These fields are not filled out from the DD files.
• Linking device
− Schedule
− General configuration
− IP address
• Fieldbus device
− Parameter configuration
− VCRs to publish and subscribe data
− Node address
− Block tags
− Capability level
• Mark VIe controller
− Control data publish and subscribe information
− Fieldbus function blocks on EGD
− Alarm and diagnostic configuration
− Application code
− DHCP client table
− NTP configuration file
664 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.3 Online View and Interaction
9.3.1 Linking Devices
Information about linking devices is displayed in the ToolboxST application Component Editor Hardware tab. An online
linking device displays error, warning, and informational symbols in the Hardware tab Tree View and the Summary View
Diagnostics tab. This information is driven from the alarm and diagnostic subsystems inside the Mark VIe controller for use
in the ToolboxST application.
If a fieldbus device placeholder is emitting a device alert or process alarm, active block alerts display an icon ( ) in the
Tree View at the block level and the following locations:
• The Fieldbus Block inside the Fieldbus Device Placeholder emitting the Device Alert or Process Alarm
• Fieldbus Device Placeholder which contains the emitting Function Block
• Linking device H1 Segment which contains the emitting Fieldbus Device Placeholder
• Linking device which contains the emitting linking device H1 Segment
The ToolboxST application classifies a fieldbus device in one of four states:
• Uninitialized ( )
• Initialized ( )
• Commissioned ( )
• Mismatch ( )
Decommissioned devices display in the Hardware tab as follows:
• From the Tree View under a linking device’s attached segment in an expandable item for decommissioned devices
• A warning icon on the attached segment’s icon
• A warning icon on the linking device’s icon to which the attached segment belongs
Note Refer to the section Fieldbus Device Placeholders for additional information, including fieldbus device state
transitions.
666 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.3.2.1 Commission Fieldbus Devices
Fieldbus devices must be commissioned when they are put in service.
If an H1 Device is received from the factory with an already assigned permanent node address, it is possible that it will not
display in the decommissioned list of the ToolboxST application's Hardware View. The following background information
and procedure should be used to clear this condition and allow the user to commission H1 devices.
Normally, H1 devices come from the factory without a permanent node address assigned. This allows the Link Active
Scheduler (LAS) to assign one of the FOUNDATION Fieldbus specified four default addresses (248, 249, 250, or 251) so they can
be added to the live list and then commissioned by the host system.
The H1 Datalink Layer addresses are defined as follows:
FUN to FUN+Number of Unpolled Nodes Range of unused addresses defined in ToolboxST Link Settings. H1 devices
(NUN=210 default) in this range will not be in the live list.
The ToolboxST application (by default) has link settings configured to optimize the communications with commissioned
devices on each H1 segment. This means that the First Unpolled Node (FUN) is set to be the highest node address that the
ToolboxST application assigns during the commissioning process (FUN = 37). It follows that the Number of Unpolled Nodes
(NUN) is set to the default value of 210.
In this way the default ToolboxST application's link settings with FUN=37 and NUN=210 makes it so that any H1 device with
a previously assigned permanent node address between the values of 37-247 will not be added to the live list and therefore
will not be displayed in the decommissioned list.
To change this the link settings can be modified so that the range of unpolled node addresses is set to zero until after the H1
device with the previously assigned permanent address has been cleared and is then displayed in the live list with one of the
default addresses (248, 249, 250, or 251).
668 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
After the link settings have been changed and downloaded, the device displays in the decommissioned list where it can be
Cleared.
➢ To clear a device
After it is cleared, the device can be commissioned using the normal commissioning process for H1 devices.
Note Commissioning a new device follows the same procedure except the new device is selected instead of one from the
Decommissioned Devices list.
Note Devices configured for use with FOUNDATION Fieldbus cannot display actual device and DD revision information until
they have been commissioned in the ToolboxST application. Therefore, all available placeholders by the same manufacturer
display in the H1 Device Commissioning Wizard. Verify the correct revisions before selecting the placeholder to ensure the
correct one is selected.
670 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Tip � If the device's Device ID, Manufacturer ID, Device Revision, and DD Revision match a pre-configured H1 device
placeholder, the matching H1 device placeholder is highlighted. If any of these do not match a single H1 device placeholder,
H1 device placeholders that exist on the H1 segment which match the decommissioned live H1 device's Manufacturer ID and
Device Type display.
672 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Note Instead of commissioning a mismatched device, if you perform a Clear operation and then a Commissioning operation,
the H1 Device Commissioning Wizard displays with placeholders of the same manufacture with different device type, device
revision and DD revision, in which the wrong placeholder used earlier to perform the commissioning operation matches the
Device ID with that of the live device. This results in a Mismatch state. In this case, perform the commissioning steps again as
previously described.
• To move a commissioned H1 device to the uninitialized state, the ToolboxST application clears the commissioned
H1 device.
• If something fails, the status column displays a red error icon and failure text.
5. Click Close. (The Close button displays on the Wizard whether the decommissioning succeeds or fails.)
When a device is decommissioned:
674 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.3.2.4 Simulate Inputs from Fieldbus Devices
The VARSIM block can be used to simulate inputs from FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 field devices. This can be used to test logic
in the controller without having the actual field devices.
There are four input block types that this technique applies to: FF_AI, FF_DI, FF_MAI, and FF_MDI. These block types
create global variables which are logically connected to the output pin(s). The names of the global variables are determined
by combining the Device and BlockSuffix attributes of the block. Example: If an FF_AI block is instanced with the following
attributes:
If the linking device or the field device associated with the block (by block assignment) is not present, then the live value of
the output has a Bad status such as 24 (NOT_LIMITED-NO_COMM_WITH_NO_USABLE_VALUE-BAD) as displayed in
the following figure:
To simulate a good value on the output pin, add a VARSIM block to the field device. Two connections must be made with a
VARSIM block: one for the value and one for the status. For the value, connect an output of the VARSIM block to the global
variable created previously in the FOUNDATION Fieldbus block. For the status, connect to the same global variable but add .
Status to the end of the variable name.
Example: To simulate a value of 17 with good status (128) for the FF_AI block discussed previously, create a VARSIM block
as displayed in the following figure:
676 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.3.3 Fieldbus Enabled Application Code
The following application code is available for use:
Watch Window can be used with the fieldbus function block pins connected to ToolboxST variables. For additional
information, refer to the section Watch Window in the chapter Mark VIe Component Editor.
Trender can be used with the following:
Tip � Trender signals which are not of interest can be removed. For additional information, refer to the Trender Instruction
Guide (GEI-100795).
Custom Block Drawings are supported in the Software tab for fieldbus function blocks which provide the following
indicators:
678 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Database Differences Analysis at System Level
When a user performs a download for FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices using the Download Wizard, they can select from one of
the following download options:
• Incremental Parameter Download runs a system comparison and identifies which parameters were modified and
downloads only the parameters that were changed.
• Full Parameter Download performs a full system device download of all parameters for the device.
Note Users can run a Reconcile report to run a system comparison and determine if a full download is needed.
• PFFA Schedule Download performs a full parameter download to a PFFA (including all segments and H1 devices
configured on the PFFA) and ignores any non-commissioned H1 device placeholders. This download can be used when
scheduled communication (Software tab) issues are encountered. This option will clear and reset the PFFA schedule links
and any H1 device communications from the PFFA will be interrupted during the download.
Note The options selected on the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Download Options dialog window are stored locally. The next
FOUNDATION Fieldbus download will retain the previous download selections.
Additionally, users have the option to select the number (1-5) of PFFA modules that will be downloaded in groups at one time
(in parallel). Downloading multiple PFFA modules at one time reduces the total time of the download process. However, the
amount of time an individual PFFA module takes to download can take longer than a serial download. In a parallel download,
all PFFA modules share the unused bandwidth on the H1 network for the download, in a serial download the PFFA module
being downloaded has access to all of the unused bandwidth on the H1 network for the download.
The Download Wizard does the following:
• Displays linking devices that need to be downloaded using the orange not equal sign
• Displays linking devices that do not need to be downloaded using the green equal sign
• Displays fieldbus devices that need to be downloaded using the orange not equal sign
• Displays fieldbus devices that do not need to be downloaded using the green equal sign
• Displays the status of the download
• Updates the download log as the download progresses
• Scans for differences in the ToolboxST configuration versus the actual configuration
• Places appropriate fieldbus resource, transducer, and function blocks OOS and then places them back in service as part of
the download procedure
• Displays red X icons on H1 device placeholders, listed by PD_TAG, that do not display on the live list as
commissioned to indicate it cannot find a matching commissioned H1 device
• Downloads multiple H1 devices in a download batch
• Instantiate blocks during the block instantiation phase of download
680 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
• All H1 devices that are downloaded successfully have their ST_REV copied from the live list to display device equality
in the Controller I/O Status window. However, the ST_REV read is not considered part of the download process. Devices
that need updated ST_REVs read are initiated by the download but are not necessary for a successful download. ST_
REVs are read on a background thread.
Note It is possible for a database differences analysis to show that no downloads are necessary; however the controller
I/O Equality may show as Not Equal. There are certain cases in which when a change is made to a block, which results in
flagging the device's Resource Block as Needs to be Downloaded, and the change is undone. A Download scan will
display nothing to be downloaded but the Needs to be Downloaded flag does not get cleared by the undo action.
Performing a forced download to the device or reconciling parameters using a Parameter Reconcile report can establish
controller equality again.
Note If the download options are changed on the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Download Options dialog window of the Download
Wizard, after the download is completed, the Save icon is enabled. If the user does not save the system and tries to perform
another download, the system notifies the user that the system has not been saved from the previous download. The user must
save before they are able to proceed with another download. Changes made on the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Download Options
dialog window will be remembered for the next download.
• PD_TAG
• Link information
• Write the NTP MIB object with the correct time server IP address based on the configured redundancy information. The
following rules are used to determine the correct NTP time server:
− If the linking device is simplex then give the IONet addresses of whatever is on that IONet. (Example: if TMR
controllers and a simplex linking device are on T IONet, assign 192.168.3.10 and 192.168.3.9 or 8.)
− If a simplex controller and simplex linking device are on the IONet assign 192.168.1.8 and 192.168.2.8. Port
forwarding the linking devices can actually get to the different subnets, but if possible it makes sense to give the
address on the same subnet trying to span across multiple controllers to give redundancy.
• Write the transmission delay time
• Write the redundancy message configuration
• Write the optimized T3 timer and set the FF T3 timer=0
Note The CIT tool kit does not download the T3 timer so it has to be written to using FMS writes.
• Download the first unpolled node ID (FUN) and number of unpolled node ID's (NUN) based on the number of existing
nodes per segment if the user enters 0 for both of these settings.
Linking devices must be fully assigned (downloads complete) before fieldbus devices on H1 segments can be commissioned
and display live in the ToolboxST application. Using the Download Wizard, the rest of the linking device download occurs as
part of the download process to send schedule information.
682 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.3.4.2 Download Fieldbus Devices
The ToolboxST application performs the download of fieldbus devices. The linking device must be fully assigned before
fieldbus devices can be downloaded. Fieldbus devices have the following information downloaded to them:
• Parameters download each time they are changed by the user and whenever the defaults read from the DD files are not
null or empty.
− Always set LIM_NOTIFY = MAX_NOTIFY unless it is less than 3. Then set LIM_NOTIFY=3
− Always set REPORTS to enabled in the FEATURE_SEL parameter.
− Always set CONFIRM_TIME = 640000.
Note The FOUNDATION Fieldbus Alarm Confirm Time option is set in the system settings for the Mark VIe control.
Refer to the section Controller Settings.
• The wait stops when the linking device is found in the appropriate live list.
• The wait can be cancelled by the user.
9.3.5 Upload
The ToolboxST application is used to perform the upload of a controller’s configuration that contains fieldbus function blocks
and fieldbus devices. If the ToolboxST application does not have the DD files for a specified fieldbus device inside the
placeholder, the following happens:
If a fieldbus device placeholder is emitting a device alert or process alarm, active block alerts display an icon ( ) in the
Tree View at the block level and the following locations:
Attached segment
Fieldbus device
Block
Tip � When device alerts display in the Alarm Viewer they are time stamped (synched). The only time they are not synched
is when a download has been done to a device and they have not yet resynched. At that time they display a 1972 time stamp.
684 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The Alarm Viewer Variable Name displays in the following format:
Controller/H1 Device (PD Tag)/Block Tag/Fieldbus Parameter Name.
• The Hardware and Software tabs’ Summary View, in the Parameter tabs
• Trender
• Watch Window
• The Software tab’s Summary View, in the diagram editing space
Double-clicking on a live value when online displays the Change Live Value dialog box.
The following operations are performed from the Change Live Value dialog box:
Note If the fieldbus parameter cannot be written (for example, because of the fieldbus function block’s current
mode), the response displays from the fieldbus device to which the write was attempted.
Logic forcing procedures can result in personal injury or death, if not strictly
followed. Only adequately trained personnel should modify any programmable
machine. Forcing of control logic for an operating process is strongly discouraged.
Forcing of protective functions is never permissible for an operating unit. All safety
Warning measures should be strictly enforced in conjunction with this procedure.
The following figure gives a visual indication of which items can be forced:
686 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
9.4 Other Functions and Features
9.4.1 Drag-and-drop to CIMPLICITY Screen
The ToolboxST application allows the drag-and-drop of assigned fieldbus function blocks configured to put View 1 on EGD
onto a CIMPLICITY HMI screen. The ToolboxST application populates the clipboard with the proper data to enable the
CIMPLICITY smart object to:
• Indicate the PD tag of the device to which the fieldbus function block is assigned
• Display the description of the assigned fieldbus function block
• Display the assigned fieldbus function block’s View 1 parameters over EGD
• Write to an assigned fieldbus function block’s View 1 parameters over EGD using Command Message Protocol (CMP)
which can be written to indicated by the DD files. (This is how HMIs write values over EGD to Mark VIe Controllers
through CIMPLICITY Screens.)
• Perform the Goto Logic Function
• Print macro cycle viewer: A view similar to the macro cycle viewer display area spread across multiple pages with
selected macrocycle, block execution, publish/subscribe duration, and so forth are printed.
3. A Warning dialog box indicates that FOUNDATION Fieldbus device communications will be interrupted during or after the
next Download following compression, which may cause processes under control to fail or trip. Click OK to continue.
688 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Before performing a Download, make sure all FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices and
processes are in a Safe state.
Caution
4. After the compression command is completed, perform a Build before the next Download.
Since the new, reorganized schedule is not created until the next Build is performed, the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Schedule
need only be executed once between Builds. All FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices that indicate differences during the
Download scan should be downloaded during the next Download to ensure that the new schedule is fully deployed, and
all communications are restored.
• Dynamic help documentation for each supported block type when the Info tab is selected while targeting a FOUNDATION
Fieldbus resource, transducer, or function block in both standard and enhanced forms
• Dynamic help for FOUNDATION Fieldbus parameters
− Descriptions from DD files
− Other help from DD files
• Documentation on DD attributes in block and parameter displays as well as conditional expressions. DD attributes
include:
− Validity
− Handling
− MIN_VALUE, MAX_VALUE
− DISPLAY_FORMAT
− EDIT_FORMAT
− Enumeration / Bit Enumeration Lists
690 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10 Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced
I/O Functions
Several I/O functions are available with the Mark VIe or Mark VIeS component.
The ToolboxST application monitors the calibration permissive and calibration command. If the permissive is lost, all
calibration and verification buttons on the dialog box are disabled. If the calibration command cannot be activated or is lost,
all calibration and verification buttons, with the exception of the Calibration Mode button, are disabled.
Refer to the Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Control Systems Volume II: General-purpose Applications, the sections:
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 691
Public Information
➢ To calibrate valve circuits
1. From the Component Editor, select the Hardware tab.
2. From the Tree View, select the desired PSVO, PSVP, PCAA, or PMVE with an attached MVRA or MVRF.
3. From the Summary View, select the Variables tab, then click Go On/Offline.
4. In the Variables tab, scroll to CalibEnab# and double-click it in the row header.
5. Change the value to True.
Note Only enable one valve for calibration at one time. When the procedure is repeated, set the previously calibrated valve
to False.
6. From the Summary View, click the Regulators tab and enable the desired regulator. Select the appropriate regulator
type from the drop-down list.
7. Verity that the Enable check box is selected.
Do not make any changes to the regulator configuration during valve calibration.
Each calibration command is monitored by the ToolboxST application to verify
performance.
Attention
8. Click Calibrate to display the Calibrate Valve dialog box.
The following figure displays the calibration of ratiometric LVDTs for an LMPosition regulator on a simplex PMVE MVRA
I/O module. Different regulator types, redundancies, and servo I/O modules will display slightly different results.
9. From the dialog box, click Calibration Mode to enable all command buttons and start the calibration command in each
I/O module. A Trender window displays dynamic signals. For further details, refer to the Trender Instruction Guide
(GEI-100795).
LVDT voltages are the values that represent the minimum and maximum actuator positions stored in the I/O module. These
values are not live data. They display after a Save command is performed.
692 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Note PulseRate regulator types only support Manual mode (Step 11c). When entering Calibration Mode for PulseRate
regulators, do not perform an auto-calibration sequence. Go directly to Manual mode.
10. If you are performing auto-calibration, complete the following steps in this sequence:
a. Click Minimum End and wait for the actuator to reach its minimum end position.
b. Click Fix Minimum End to collect the voltage value at the minimum end position.
c. Click Maximum End and wait for the actuator to reach its maximum end position.
d. Click Fix Maximum End to collect the voltage value at the maximum end position.
e. Click Calibrate to apply the minimum and maximum values collected.
f. Click Save to save the calculated values. The calculated values are saved for each servo module.
Note Voltage minimum and maximum values are saved for all servo modules. The PSVO and PSVP modules also save
RCoilOpen and RCoilShort thresholds on the Servo tab. The PCAA module saves ExcitMonCal values on the LVDT tab.
Note Only one command state can be active at any one time.
11. After calibrating the LVDTs, complete the following in any order to verify servo performance.
a. Click Position to apply open loop current steps to the valve actuator, and monitor the position as the actuator moves
from Min to Max and back to Min.
b. Click Current to apply a closed loop position ramp to drive the valve actuator, and monitor the current as the
actuator moves from Min to Max and back to Min.
c. Click Manual to enable closed loop position steps. Input a position in the SetPoint text box, click Send, and
monitor the position feedback as it moves to the SetPoint.
d. Click OFF to exit verification mode.
12. When calibration is complete, click the X in the upper right corner. Click OK to save the calibration trend, which is saved
in the system directory in the Tools folder for the applicable controller. The calibration window then closes.
Repeat this procedure for each associated servo valve.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 693
Public Information
10.2 HART Device Configuration
10.2.1 Module Configuration for HART Devices
The following modules support HART devices:
• PHRA (Simplex)
• YHRA (Simplex)
• PUAA/YUAA (Simplex)
• YSIL (TMR)
1. From the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click Distributed I/O, select Add Group, make sure the Group Type
Cabinet is selected from the Type drop-down menu, then click OK.
694 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
7. From the Summary View, click the Parameters tab to configure the module for an AMS, if applicable.
8. Enable and configure each input and/or output as needed for the HART device:
a. For PHRA and YHRA modules, configure from the Inputs and Outputs tabs.
b. For YSIL, configure from the Analog Inputs tab.
c. For PUAA, configure from the Current Inputs and Current Outputs tabs.
Attention
➢ To upload HART device IDs: from the Tree View, right-click the I/O module and select Upload HART IDs.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 695
Public Information
10.2.2 HART Process Variables and Extended Status Bytes I/O
Configuration
Note This does feature does not apply to the YSIL module.
By default, HART inputs and outputs do not display the HART process variables and extended status bytes. The user must
configure a number greater than zero (0) in the HART Control Variables column and the Status Variables column, per point,
for the I/O channel configuration to display the HART variables in the connected variable grid.
696 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Example of Configured HART Control Variables Outputs
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 697
Public Information
Example of Configured HART Extended Status Byte Inputs
698 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Example of Configured HART Extended Status Byte Outputs
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 699
Public Information
10.3 PPRF PROFIBUS Communications Configuration
The PROFIBUS master gateway (PPRF) is a PROFIBUS DP-V0 or DP-V1, Class 1 master that maps I/O from PROFIBUS
slave devices to Mark VIe controllers on the I/O Ethernet. Only one I/O pack can be actively communicating with its
associated PROFIBUS network. PPRF can be configured in the following redundancies:
Note The GSD Manager is not available until a PPRF module has been added.
2. From the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click Distributed I/O and select GSD Manager.
700 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the Hardware tab Select the PROFIBUS Network
Tree View, select the PPRF tab to configure the network Slave device
3. From the Device view, insert the slave device in the network by selecting and dragging the device to the purple-colored
line in the PROFIBUS Network view.
To begin configuration,
double-click the slave device
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 701
Public Information
10.3.2 Configure PROFIBUS Slave Device
Note Groups and DPV2 are not supported by the PPRF. Signal Configuration is not required.
The slave device opens with the Modules view displayed. Click the Help button on each page for detailed configuration
information. Configuration pages include the following:
• Modules Page
• General Page
• Parameters Page
• DPV1 Page
702 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10.3.2.2 General Page
Select
General.
Note The default time interval before fail-safe mode for a DP device is 200 ms. For a PROFIBUS PA device, the setting
should be 5000 ms.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 703
Public Information
10.3.2.3 Parameters Page
704 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10.3.2.4 Extensions Page
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 705
Public Information
10.3.2.5 DPV1 Page
If DPV1 is supported by this device, the following screen displays. The PPRF must be an H1B (BPPC) I/O pack.
Select the Enable DPB1 check Click Help for configuration information.
box for each DPV1 device. Click OK to return to the Hardware tab.
706 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10.3.2.6 Device Description
Device Description displays information about the Slave device.
Click OK to return to
the Hardware tab.
Click OK to return to
the Hardware tab.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 707
Public Information
10.3.3 Configure PPRF Master Device
➢ To configure the master device
Bus Parameters
displays
PROFIBUS
network
properties.
Bus Monitoring
displays how
the PROFIBUS
network is
monitored by
the gateway.
708 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
If any changes are made to the master device configuration and you click OK, the I/O
pack must be restarted after the controller and the I/O pack are downloaded.
Attention
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 709
Public Information
10.3.5 Display PROFIBUS Network
➢ To display the PROFIBUS network overview
710 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To configure I/O variables
The Variables data grid displays the PROFIBUS configuration, which is defined as a number of module input and output
bytes or words. By default, slave inputs are followed by slave outputs. Successive rows may be grouped as necessary to create
actual point values that span multiple rows. Packed Boolean values are expanded into a separate data grid so that Boolean
Mark VIe variables can be attached to the individual bits.
Variables Tab Columns
Column Description
Connected Variable Displays the connection to other defined variables in the ToolboxST application
Displays the data type of the variable configured in the Mark VIe component
Var Data Type Space can be reserved for unused inputs and outputs, enabling subsequent online
loads when variables are added.
Displays the data type of the slave device I/O point
If the size of the point spans multiple rows of input or output bytes or words, subsequent
Fieldbus Point Data Type
rows display Continued. The default byte data type for rows associated with
configuration bytes must be changed to a supported data type.
Raw Min, Raw Max, Eng Min, Eng Values used to calculate scaling from raw units (the PROFIBUS point) to engineering
Max units (the Mark VIe variable)
Transfers are expanded into individual bits and displayed in the Booleans tab below the
Boolean
Variables tab
If set to True, enables input event scanning on a Boolean transfer
An input event is similar to an SOE, but has a 10 ms resolution.
Input Event Enabled
Any field except Var Data Type and Fieldbus Point Data Type It can be modified without
restarting the controller or I/O pack.
Note The Direction, Module, and Fieldbus Point Offset columns are Read-only.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 711
Public Information
Supported Fieldbus Point Data Types
PROFIBUS Point Data Type Mark VIe Variable Data Type Scaling
Boolean Boolean —
Integer
Integer16
Float √
Double integer
Integer32
Float √
Unsigned integer
Unsigned16
Float √
Unsigned double integer
Unsigned32
Float √
Floating point (32 bits) Float √
If any PROFIBUS device generates a non-status only diagnostic, the ProfibusDiag variable has a value of True. For
applications that require diagnostic presence indication, attach a defined BOOL-type variable to ProfibusDiag.
Non-status diagnostics are ones that indicate problems. Status-only diagnostics contain only the standard portion (the first six
octets). These, in addition to the master address and identification number, have one or more of the following diagnostics
values set.
Note The connected variable may be added, changed, or removed and loaded without restarting the controller or I/O pack.
➢ To display additional tabs: from the Tree View, select a slave device to display tabs in the Summary View.
1. From the Tree View, select a slave device.
2. From the Summary View, select the Standard Diagnostics tab.
3. In the Connected Variables column, add desired variables. Entries in all columns are read-only.
712 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10.3.6 Standard Diagnostics Tab
The values that display in the Standard Diagnostics tab are the standard portion of a PROFIBUS diagnostic message (the first
six octets). Except for the Master_Addr (master address) and Ident_Number (identification number) values, which are UINT
types, the remaining values are BOOL types. The connected values must have matching data types.
The last value in the Standard Diagnostics tab, Station_Diagnostic, is not part of the PROFIBUS standard diagnostic message.
It provides a station diagnostic present indication. It is set to True if the slave device generates a non-status only diagnostic.
For applications that require station diagnostic presence indication, attach a defined Boolean-type variable to the Station_
Diagnostic.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 713
Public Information
Identifier Diagnostics Tab
The Identifier Diagnostics tab, which is initially empty, is used to connect variables to bits within the Identifier-related portion
of a diagnostic message. Each bit, which corresponds to a module in the slave device, is set to True to indicate a problem. The
data type for a connected variable must be a BOOL. The Identifier Number range is 0 to 495.
Note If lines are added or removed from the Data Grid, the I/O pack must be restarted after being downloaded.
Existing Data Grid modifications (adding, removing, or changing connected variables, changing the Identifier Number and
such) can be downloaded without restarting the controller or the I/O pack.
To add a line without specifying the connected variable, you must enter a space in the Connected Variable field to enable the
other fields for data entry.
Note The system must be running, and the ToolboxST application must be able to connect to the Mark VIe component.
➢ To display advanced diagnostics: from the Tree View, right-click PPRF and select Troubleshoot Module and
Advanced Diagnostics.
714 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10.3.9 Export Configuration
You can export a configured PROFIBUS network to reduce the configuration time required to create multiple PROFIBUS
networks.
To avoid configuration conflicts and corruption of data, do not edit exported files
outside the ToolboxST application.
Attention
➢ To export a PPRF configuration: from the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click the existing PPRF with network
devices already defined and select Export Configuration.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 715
Public Information
From the Browse
for Folder
window, either
select an empty
folder or click
Make New Folder
to create a folder
to export the
configuration to.
716 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10.3.10 Import Configuration
You can also import a network configuration to duplicate that network. Two import options are available:
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 717
Public Information
10.3.11 Advanced Import
The Advanced Import option provides an additional dialogue box during an import, and allows different GSD versions to be
used during an import when multiple versions are available. It also allows exported devices to be skipped during the import.
After you select the export folder, the following dialog box displays. To enable the Advanced Import option, Show Advanced
Importer Screen must be set to True in the controller settings dialog box.
Note The GSD file must be imported into the configuration for that selection to display in the DTM Device column.
A main feature is selecting a specific GSD from the DTM column. This is useful when the Device Type ID or Ident Number
is identical for multiple versions of a specific device. If two revisions of a device have the same device ID, the same revision
will be selected for both devices being imported. You can select the appropriate GSD in the DTM Device column for each
device.
An additional feature is the capability to skip the import of a device that was exported.
Note For Creation Mode, use the Use Hilscher generic DTMs if available default selection only.
718 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10.4 PCNO I/O Module Configuration
The CANopen I/O pack (PCNO) is a network management master that maps I/O from CANopen devices to Mark* VIe
controllers on the IONet.
Only the following devices are currently supported on the PCNO CANopen network:
Note Mixing these devices on the same CANopen network is not supported.
Note For further details, refer to the Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Control Systems Volume II: System Guide for
General-purpose Applications (GEH-6721_Vol_II), the chapter PCNO CANopen Master Gateway.
➢ To add a PCNO I/O module and devices: from the Component Editor Hardware tab, right-click Distributed
I/O and select Add Module.
Select
PCNO and
click Next.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 719
Public Information
From the drop-down list,
select the module version.
720 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Review the
configuration
information and
click Finish.
Devices 1-25
and 125 are
configurable
The selected baud rate affects the number and type of devices that can exist on the CANbus. For a list of supported devices
per network, refer to the Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Control Systems Volume II: System Guide for General-purpose
Applications (GEH-6721_Vol_II), the chapter PCNO CANopen Master Gateway, the section Installation, the table Supported
Devices per Network.
Note The Woodward Dual DVP and GS40/GS50 fuel valves can only be used with the PCNOH1B version.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 721
Public Information
Right-click a device (1-25), select Attach,
and select the desired device from the list.
722 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To connect variables
The Variables tab contains a list of counters that provide an indication of CANopen message transmission and reception. Each
time the I/O pack sends a message to a slave device, the corresponding RPDO count is incremented. Each time the I/O pack
receives a message from a slave device, the corresponding TPDO count is incremented. In the case of the GE Sensing DPS
pressure sensors, RPDOs are not supported so they do not display in the Variables tab.
A connected variable can be changed with an online load. Adding or removing CANopen devices requires an offline load.
➢ To display external CANopen device configuration details: from the Tree View, select PCNO and press F1.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 723
Public Information
➢ To go online with PCNO without an attached device
724 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10.5 PSCA I/O Module Configuration
Note Refer to Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Control Systems Volume II: System Guide for General-purpose Applications
(GEH-6721_Vol_II), the section PSCA Serial Communication Module.
The Serial Communication Input/Output (PSCA) module provides the electrical interface between one or two I/O Ethernet
networks and a serial communications terminal board.
Select PSCA
and click Next.
2. From the wizard page, select configuration information and click Next.
3. Confirm the configuration and click Finish.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 725
Public Information
➢ To attach a device: from the Tree View, expand the PSCA to display the seven ports.
726 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10.6 PIOA I/O Module Configuration for ARCNET Support
➢ To configure a PIOA I/O module
1. From the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click Distributed I/O and select Add Module.
Configure the
terminal board.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 727
Public Information
From the Tree View, select From the Summary View, select
the PIOA I/O module ARCNET as the Network Type
728 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10.7 PUAA/YUAA I/O Configuration
The Universal Analog (PUAA/YUAA) I/O module can be configured to function like any I/O pack (such as PAIC/YAIC,
PAOC, PRTD, PTCC/YTCC, and so forth) or a combination of I/O modules. There are 16 available channels (I/O points) that
can be configured in various modes through the ToolboxST application. For further details, refer to the Mark VIe and Mark
VIeS Control Systems Volume II: System Guide for General-purpose Applications (GEH-6721_Vol_II).
Note The PUAA/YUAA I/O module does not have to be rebooted after configuration, with one exception. A reboot is
required the first time HART is enabled on any point, 1-8 or 9-16. For example, using points 1-8, if you enable HART on
point 1, a reboot is required. Enabling HART on any subsequent point in group 1-8 would not require a reboot. Using the
same scenario for points 9-16, if you enable HART on point 9, a reboot is required again. If HART is enabled on any
subsequent points in group 9-16 would not require a reboot.
Furthermore, a reboot is required if the last point with HART enabled in either group 1-8 or 9-16 is disabled, meaning there
are no longer any HART enabled points within a group of points (group 1-8 or group 9-16). For example, if points 1 and 2
have HART enabled, disabling HART on point 2 would not require a reboot. However, disabling point 1, which is the last
point with HART enabled in group 1-8, would require a reboot.
• Unused
• Current Input
• Voltage Input
• Digital Input
• Pulse Accumulator
• RTD
• Current Output
• Thermocouple
Note Current Inputs and Current Outputs support HART devices. For a list of I/O modules that support HART devices, refer
to the section HART Device Configuration.
Digital Inputs support SOEs.
When the channels are configured (a mode other than Unused is selected for a channel), Summary View displays
configuration tabs for the selected modes.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 729
Public Information
➢ To configure a PUAA/YUAA I/O module
Note The PUAA/YUAA I/O module must be added within a Hardware Cabinet Group. If a Cabinet Group already exists,
skip step 1 in this procedure. For additional information on Groups, refer to the section Organize Modules.
1. Add a Group to contain the module. From the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click Distributed I/O, select Add
Group, make sure the Group Type Cabinet is selected from the Type drop-down menu, then click OK.
2. Add a PUAA/YUAA I/O module. Right-click the Cabinet Group and select Add Module.
3. From the Module Redundancy drop-down menu, select the appropriate redundancy.
4. From the Select Type list, select the PUAA/YUAA module and click Next.
5. In the Terminal Board Position column, enter the cabinet position value(s) (for example, 1A1A) and click Next.
6. Review the module configuration, then click Finish to add the PUAA/YUAA I/O module.
The Summary tab displays the PUAA/YUAA I/O module and indicates that channels (1/O points 1–16) are not yet configured
From the Hardware Configuration tab, place your cursor in the Mode column
in the row for an I/O point. From the drop-down menu, select the appropriate
mode (CurrentInput is selected for this example).
To modify an I/O point mode after initial configuration the following procedure must
be performed to prevent damage to hardware during transition between I/O point
modes:
a.) Set the mode to Unused and perform a successful Build and Download.
b.) Change the field wiring to match the new I/O point mode.
Caution c.) Once the wiring is completed, select the appropriate mode from the drop-down list
and perform a successful Build and Download.
If the Unused mode is not selected first, and successfully built and downloaded, the
new configuration will not be accepted and a diagnostic will be generated.
730 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The ToolboxST application displays a mode tab for each selected mode type, and lists the I/O points that are configured with
that mode.
Tip � Double-clicking on a row in the Configuration tab Summary View displays the specific I/O point mode tab.
8. To view all I/O points that are configured for a specific I/O point mode, select a mode tab.
The Current Input tab contains the selected Current Input points on the I/O module terminal board that can be individually
configured. Additionally, variables can be connected to the I/O points and associated with the blockware application code.
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 731
Public Information
The Summary tab displays the configured I/O points with the symbols that represent their selected modes.
732 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
10.8 Universal I/O Shared IONet Configuration
All Universal I/O packs (such as PUAA) support sharing inputs using the Shared IONet feature. Just as changing a point
mode on a Universal I/O pack will clear the minor revision of the owning device, the consuming device will also have a
cleared minor revision. The consuming device will also be marked dirty, requiring a Save the next time it is opened in the
ToolboxST application. Any connected variables attached to a shared point on the consuming device will be removed when a
change is made to the point mode. A warning displays in the Log window to notify the user which variables were removed.
Note For further details on Shared IONet, refer to the Mark Controllers Shared IONet User Guide (GEH-6812).
Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Advanced I/O Functions GEH-6703P User Guide 733
Public Information
Notes
734 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11 Mark VIeS Component Editor
The Mark VIeS Component Editor provides a comprehensive user interface for configuring a Mark VIeS controller. The
elements of the configuration are grouped by specific function tabs. Areas of the editor provide various displays, depending
on the currently selected item.
➢ To create a component
1. From the System Editor Tree View, right-click the system and select Insert New, Controller, and Mark VIeS
Controller.
2. Enter a Name, select the Version, and click Finish.
Tree View
lists the items
that can be
configured.
The list
changes when
a different tab
is selected.
Property
Editor
allows you to
edit the item
currently
selected in
the Tree
View.
Component
InfoView
displays
information
about the
currently
selected item.
➢ To edit the component: select an item in the Tree View. The configuration information for that item displays in the
Summary View and Property Editor.
➢ To import an existing component: from the Tree View, right-click a parent component and select Insert Existing
and select Device. Select the Device.xml file for the component to be imported and click Open.
736 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.3 Tree View
The Tree View displays different information based on the selected tab. An item selected in the Tree View determines the
properties (if any) that display in the Property Editor, and whether data or information displays graphically in the Summary
View or in a Data Grid (table format).
Note If no button displays, edit the value directly in the corresponding text box on the right side of the Property Editor.
➢ To edit a property in the Property Editor: select an item by clicking its value field.
Click the ellipsis button to change the value from a dialog box.
Click the drop-down list button to change the value from a drop-down list.
Log Tip � If there is a build problem, the error is listed on the Log tab. Double-click the error. The input focus goes
to the location in the component configuration where the error occurred.
Status Displays operating state and equality information about the component
Keeps a navigation history for each user session and allows you to return to different places in the
History editor. Each time an item is selected in the Tree View or Summary View, the name of that item is added
to the top of this list.
Finds all uses of a variable within a Library Container
The write icon at the beginning of some lines indicates that the variable is being written at that location.
Where Used
Tip � From the Where Used tab, double-click the desired item. The input focus goes to the view represented by
that line and the item is selected.
738 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.6.1 Log Tab
The Log tab contains three additional tabs: Errors, Warnings, and Messages. Each time a Build command is performed, the
Log tab is updated with errors, warnings, and general information (messages). Concurrently, with each Build command, a file
is generated in the Component folder that reflects the contents of the Log tab. The file (build.log) updates each time a Build
command is performed.
Each time a Build is performed, a message displays that allows you to view the Change log.
When Errors or Warnings are present, the Log tab notifies the user by displaying the current count, as well as a description.
Click each button to hide the corresponding item. For example, click Warning to hide the warnings listed in the Log tab;
Click Warnings again to display the warnings in the Log tab.
Note Some Data Grids, especially those without an Append Row, may not support all available features.
Quickly set a property to the Left-click the row header for the first row to be edited. Then, while pressing the CTRL key,
same value for multiple rows left-click added row headers. After selecting all desired rows, use the Property Editor to
change properties for all selected rows. (Some properties are omitted when a group of rows is
selected, and properties with conflicting values will display no value in the property editor.)
740 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.7.2 Organize Columns
The columns of a Data Grid can be customized. You can select the columns that display, the column order from left to right,
the column width, and the sort criteria.
To... Do this:
Resize a column Drag the vertical bar on the right of the column header to a new location.
Quickly remove a single column Right-click the column header and select Hide Column.
Move a column to a different location Drag the column header to a new location.
Sort by a column Click a column header. The column sorts in ascending order. To sort in descending
order, click the column header again.
Reset columns to the original Right-click any column header and select Default Column Organization.
configuration
Add or remove columns Right-click any column header and select Organize Columns to display the
Organize Columns dialog box.
Select a
column name
and use the up
arrow to move
it to the left-
most side of
the Data Grid.
in the destination grid and select Paste Row(s) to insert the row into its new
location.
Copy and paste multiple rows Left-click the row header for the first source row. Then, while pressing the CTRL key,
left-click added row headers. After selecting all desired rows, continue to hold down the
CTRL key and right-click any selected header. From the shortcut menu, select Copy
Selected/Current Rows to place the rows on the clipboard. Then, right-click the header
for the append row in the destination grid and select Paste Row(s) to insert the rows into
their new location.
Copy and paste a range of two or Click the top left cell of the desired range and drag to the bottom right cell. Right-click the
more cells selected region and select Copy Selected/Current Rows to place the cells on the
clipboard. Then, click the top left cell of the destination range and drag to select the
same number of columns and rows that were copied to the clipboard. Right-click inside
the destination region and select Paste Row(s).
Move rows between data grids Arrange windows on screen so both the source and destination grid are visible. (An
entry in a Tree View is acceptable as a destination). Left click the row header for the first
row. Then, while pressing CTRL, click any added row headers to be moved. Release the
CTRL key and drag a row header to the new data grid.
Add a variable to a block diagram, Arrange windows on screen so both the source grid and a destination block diagram,
Trender window or Watch Window Trender window or Watch Window are visible. Then, drag the row header for the variable
from a data grid to the destination window.
Tip � You can copy and paste rows between different data grids if the columns match by following the above procedures and
navigating to a different data grid before pasting the data.
Tip � Cells in a data grid can also be copied to and pasted from Microsoft Excel. The copied data is stored in .csv format,
which contains no information about column names. To make sure pasted data is placed into the proper columns, do not
change column ordering, and always select the exact destination range in the ToolboxST configuration before pasting data
from Excel.
742 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.8 Controller Settings
The ToolboxST application provides settings that change the way various functions within the component operate.
➢ To open the Settings dialog box: from the Component Editor, select the Options menu, then select Settings.
Property Description
Controller Parallel Online When set to True, allows you to download application code to redundant controllers in
Download parallel
Show Boot Loader Displays the boot loader in the Download Wizard when it does not have to be downloaded
Enable I/O diagnostic Alarm When set to True, makes available I/O diagnostic alarm events for automatic updates in
Events the I/O Diagnostic Viewer.
When set to True, displays diagnostic icons in the Tree View and serves as a permissive to
Show Diagnostic Icons
show more enhanced diagnostic icons in both the Tree View and the Summary View.
Show More Enhanced Diagnostic When set to True, displays enhanced diagnostic icons in the Tree View and the Summary
Icons View (Show Diagnostic Icons must be set to True for this option to be enabled).
Access Rights
Access Rights Description
Allows you to set Modify Data and Modify Design access rights to pre-defined user roles. Once roles
Access Roles
have been assigned to a protected object, only users with those roles can access the object.
Allows you to make changes to data values associated with an object without changing how it works.
Modify Data For example, it protects the initial value of a variable defined in a controller. The purpose of this right is
generally to keep unauthorized persons from making unsafe changes to settings.
Allows you to change the way a protected object works. For example, this protects block creation and
Modify Design editing of connections within a library block diagram. The purpose of this right is to limit the ability to
change how the system works to authorized persons.
744 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.9.1 Passwords
Whenever you attempt to perform an operation on a protected object, the Enter Password dialog box displays.
Note Passwords are case-sensitive – secret and Secret are not considered to be the same password.
Tip � If you have performed an operation in the ToolboxST application that requires entering a password, it is
recommended to close the protected component when you are done so that an unauthorized user does not gain inappropriate
access.
➢ To clear all passwords and protect the component: from the Device menu, select Restore Password
Protection.
Protection Properties
Property Description
Access Roles Allows you to set modifying data and design rights to previously defined user roles
Allows you to modify data values and forcing of variables
746 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.9.4 Protected Objects
Specific actions governed by each access right depend on the specific component type.
748 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.11 Upgrade Component and I/O Modules
ControlST supports a variety of control equipment, including updated firmware and configuration tools that are available as
component editors within the ToolboxST application. During installation of a new ControlST release version, newer versions
of some components may be installed as well. To use the new versions, you must upgrade each component separately. You
may also upgrade multiple I/O modules for a component at the same time.
➢ To upgrade a component
Redundant Safety I/O packs mounted on the same terminal board must all be the
same hardware form, and running the same firmware version.
Do not attempt this replacement unless you have enough I/O packs with the newer
hardware form available, including spares.
Attention It is recommended that you back up the ToolboxST .tcw file prior to upgrading the
system.
After a component has been upgraded, you cannot undo the upgrade. You also cannot
upgrade a component to its current or a previous version.
Attention
1. Install the latest version of the ToolboxST application.
2. Open the ToolboxST application, open the system .tcw file, and double-click a component.
3. From the File menu, select Upgrade.
4. Select the component(s) and appropriate I/O modules to upgrade.
In the Version Upgrade dialog box, the New column defaults to the highest compatible version that supports the existing
I/O module hardware.
If any version does not support the hardware of the existing I/O module, a Caution
symbol is displayed in the New column. This notifies the user that they should only
upgrade the version if the intent is to replace the existing I/O module with supported
hardware.
Attention
When any of the I/O modules are selected for upgrade to a version
that does not support the hardware , a Warning dialog box displays
requesting user confirmation to proceed . If you select Yes , the
selected I/O modules will be upgraded .
5. From the Version Upgrade dialog box, click OK to upgrade the component.
750 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.12 Compare to Controller
This feature allows you to generate a report that compares the configuration in the ToolboxST software to the controller
configuration.
752 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.14 Mark VIeS Component Menus
Mark VIeS Component Menu Items (continued)
Menu Command Use
Save Save changes to the current system
Print Generate a paper copy of the entire component configuration
Upgrade Change the version of the component support software
Compare to Controller Open the Select Channel dialog box to begin the compare.
Compare Device by Program
Open the Select Channel dialog box to begin the compare.
File (s)
Compare Devices… Compare ToolboxST component configurations
Imports an I/O Variable or Configuration report, a Global Variable report or a Block Pin
Import report from a .csv file, or a Variable Alias report, or Second Language report from a .
csv or .xml file.
Close End the component editing session and return to the System Editor
Undo Remove the item currently selected in the Tree View
Redo Add a new component to the current system
Cut Cut the selected item in the Tree View
Copy Copy the selected item in the Tree View
Edit Paste Paste the copied item in the Tree View into the Summary View
Delete Delete the item selected in the Tree View
Find Display the Component Editor for the item currently selected in the Tree View
Select All Select all available items.
Bookmarks Mark and toggle between items in the Tree View
Go Back Return to the view that immediately preceded the current view in the history
Go Forward Return to the view that immediately follows the current view in the history
Forced Variables Display a list of forced variables
Variable generates a list of all global or configuration variables. You can also generate
a Web variable report, a Compressed Data Log variable report, an EGD variable list
report, Alias report, or a Second Language report.
Block Pin generates a list of all block pins in the controller software.
View IONet EGD provides network status values of all IONet communication displayed in
the current component
Coding Practices opens the Options for Coding Practice Report dialog box.
Generate a list of both control constants and undriven variables (refer to the section
Constants
Constants).
Diagnostics Display regular and advanced controller diagnostics, as well as I/O status.
IO CheckOut Open the IO CheckOut dialog box
Display state exchange voting and output disagreements for the dual and TMR
Disagreements
controllers
Export Alarms for
Compare alarm criteria in plant alarm philosophy
Rationalization
Opens the PFD Calculator spreadsheet (.xls) used to calculate the Probability of
Failure on Demand and Risk Reduction Factor (PFD-RRF) for Mark VIeS Functional
Safety System components and determine the Safety Integrity Level (SIL) of the
PFD Calc
Safety Integrity Function (SIF)
Users must have Microsoft Excel 2010 (Standard) or higher installed to open the PFD
Calculator.
754 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIeS Component Menu Items (continued)
Menu Command Use
Online Connect or disconnect from a controller
Convert the current configuration into binary files that can be downloaded to a
Build
controller
Perform the following functions:
Controller Setup opens a wizard that allows you to perform basic configuration tasks.
Change Controller Password... allows the user to change the controller password for
Download the device.
Download Wizard downloads base load, firmware, and application code to the
controller and distributed I/O modules.
View/Set Time displays a dialog box that manages the controller time.
Device
Retrieve configuration information from the controller and uses it to create a new
Upload
controller component in the system
Compress Rearrange variables to minimize the amount of space used
Restore Password
Clear all passwords and protect the component
Protection
Security State Go from Open state to Secure state
Lock / Unlock Toggle the controller between Lock and Unlock mode
Return the current CRC of the application code files in the controllers. This is used to
Brand verify if the application code loaded into the controllers and I/O packs is a previously
certified version
Options Settings Display a dialog box with controller settings
Contents Open the Mark VIeS help file
Controller Help Open the Mark VIeS controller help file
Distributed IO Help Displays a list of pack help files to open
Options include:
756 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
General Tab Properties (continued)
Property Description
Includes:
Active Diagnostics Severity defines the OPC AE severity value for a diagnostic alarm in the
OPC Properties active condition. This value displays in alarm clients.
Normal Diagnostics Severity defines the OPC AE severity value for a diagnostic alarm in the
normal condition. This value displays in alarm clients.
When set to True, allows the Mark VIeS controller to accept routed network packets.
Enable Routing This property is only necessary when the component and the producing component are not on
the same physical network.
Background Period Reflects the timeframe, in seconds, of blocks with background methods
Determines the frame period in ms. A frame is the basis for controller scheduling;
Frame Period the frame period determines the fastest scan time, the rate at which first class I/O is scanned,
and the fundamental frequency for the scheduling of all tasks.
Note The first time you attempt a password-protected function, the Enter Password dialog box displays. All protected
functions performed during the remainder of the ToolboxST session do not require re-entering the password.
Attributes Columns
Column Description
Name Unique identifier for the attribute
Description Stores added comments about the attribute
Value Displays and modifies the current attribute value
➢ To open the Attribute Value Editor: from an attribute Data Grid, click a Value Cell and click the Ellipsis button.
Name of the
attribute
being
modified
If selected, the
attribute values
are restricted to
an enumeration
(a predefined
set of allowable
values).
758 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.15.4 Network Adapters
The network adapters present in the controller display as items in the Tree View. The number of adapters depends on the
controller hardware type and configuration. In most applications, Mark VIeS controllers have four network adapters. The first
adapter provides connectivity to the Unit Data Highway (UDH), and any additional adapters are used for I/O networks. Some
adapter properties may be disabled in certain configurations.
The following table describes the properties displayed in the Property Editor when a Network Adapter item is selected in the
Tree View.
Network Adapters Properties
Property Description
Adapter Settings
Enabled If set to False, disables the selected network adapter. Set to True to enable the network adapter.
Host Name Internet Protocol (IP) host name for the selected network adapter
IP Address IP address for the selected network adapter
Wire Speed Speed of the network to which the selected adapter connects
Network Settings
Sets the network connected to the selected adapter (available networks are determined in the System
Network
Editor)
Controls the significant portions of the IP address
Subnet Mask This property is usually unavailable; for I/O networks, the subnet mask is always a fixed value, and for
other networks defined at the system level, the subnet mask is configured in the System Editor.
Note The first time you attempt a password-protected function, the Enter Password dialog box displays. All protected
functions performed during the remainder of the ToolboxST session do not require re-entering the password.
760 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.16.2 Network Redundancy
A controller can have one, two or three I/O networks in a simplex, dual or TMR configuration. The configuration of network
redundancy is separate from controller redundancy and module redundancy.
➢ To change the network redundancy: from the Hardware tab Tree View, select the Distributed I/O item.
762 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Note If the module being added does not have an auxiliary terminal board, the page below will not display.
764 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To configure a YSIL I/O module
1. From the Tree View, right-click Distributed I/O and select Add Group to display the Add Group dialog box.
With TMR
selected,
select the
YSIL I/O pack
and click Next
Note The YSIL I/O module cannot be selected unless the module redundancy is TMR.
766 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Enter the Position
(I/O pack location).
The format is:
Click Next
The Summary tab displays a graphic representation of the YSIL I/O module.
768 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIeS Component Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 769
Public Information
11.16.4.1 Modify YSIL I/O Module
➢ To modify a YSIL I/O module
1. From the Tree View, right-click the YSIL I/O module and select Modify to display the Modify dialog box.
Bar Code
Position
Physical Position
Position
Bar Code
ENET1 Port
ENET2 Port
• Alarm
• Revision
• Communication
• Hardware
770 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.16.5 Organize Modules
I/O modules can be organized into Groups. The Add Group menu option displays only when group mode is selected.
Click to toggle
between layout
mode and
group mode
➢ To create a Group: from the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click Distributed I/O and select Add Group.
Enter a
Description
(optional).
2. When the cursor changes to a symbol, release the mouse button to move the module.
Modifiable properties
include:
Terminal Board Type
Bar Code
Position
TB Connector
Summary View
displays I/O modules in
either group or network
layout. Click the folder
icon to toggle between
the two views
772 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Note For information about the settings configured by I/O pack-specific tabs, refer to the I/O pack documentation.
When you select a module from the Tree View, the Summary View provides tabs. The tabs that display vary according to the
I/O module. Tabs that display for all I/O modules include:
• Summary
• Variables
• Diagnostics
• Status
The Summary View toolbar is as follows:
The I/O module in this example is a YAIC. The Summary tab displays a graphical overview of the selected module,
including any diagnostics.
Note Some infrequently used parameters are classified as Advanced, and are hidden by default. To display Advanced
parameters, click the Show/Hide Advanced button on the toolbar.
Note For some I/O modules, these tabs are split into more module-specific input/output tabs that better define their function.
The Variables tab displays available variables from the I/O module that have no physical endpoint. These variables exist
only internally in the I/O module, and can be connected to another variable for use in code.
The Extra Circuits tab contains input/output variables found on the I/O module terminal boards, which can be associated
with the application software. For some I/O modules, these tabs are split into more I/O module-specific input/output tabs that
better define their function.
The Input and Output tabs contain input/output variables found on the I/O module terminal boards, which can be
associated with the application software.
The Diagnostics tab allows you to check Alarms and errors on I/O packs. Each I/O pack has a unique set of diagnostic
signals that can be monitored.
Inactive Alarm(s)
Active Alarm(s)
774 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The Status tab allows you to check the I/O pack version and network communication status.
Note To upgrade multiple I/O modules simultaneously, refer to the section Upgrade Component and I/O Modules.
➢ To upgrade a module: from the Tree View, right-click the module and select Upgrade.
776 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.16.9 Diagnose I/O Modules
When a problem with a module is detected, symbols display in the Summary tab. All symbols provide Tool Tips.
The I/O Diagnostic viewer provides a utility to interrogate I/O pack faults, version, and diagnostic communication data.
Diagnostic I/O pack reports can be generated on a pack, module, or component level.
Normal
Inactive Alarm(s)
Active Alarm(s)
Link broken
Link error
Link warning
Link information
Note Place the mouse over the icon to display Tool Tips.
➢ To download parameters to a module: from the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click the module to be
downloaded and select Download Parameters.
Module parameters directly affect the operation of the controller and associated I/O
modules. To reduce the risk of improper operation or damage to the unit, always
check the Compare Parameters dialog box before downloading new parameter values
to a component.
Caution
778 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To open the Compare Parameters dialog box: from the Hardware tab Tree View, right-click a module to
compare and select Compare Parameters.
Note The first time you attempt a password-protected function, the Enter Password dialog box displays. All protected
functions performed during the remainder of the ToolboxST session do not require re-entering the password.
If adding a
program group,
enter a name
and click OK
Note The Add Existing Program command reads an .xml file from another system or controller into the current controller.
780 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.17.3 Add Task
Tasks can be inserted within a program.
➢ To add a task: from the Tree View, right-click the name of an embedded or unlinked program and select Add Task.
Enter a Name to
insert an
embedded task
or
select the Select
Library Block
check box to insert
a linked task.
Select a
category and a
definition from
that category.
Enter a name
for the linked
task.
Click All to
display all
categories and
definitions.
Click None to
clear all
categories.
When the controller is online, double-click the live value of the variable _Enable for the task, select True to enable the task
or False to disable the task, then click Send & Close.
782 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
When the controller is online, the task icon in the Tree View indicates the executing state of the task as either enabled or
disabled.
Disabled
Task Disabled
784 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.17.6 Library References
A controller has two types of libraries:
• Function block libraries describe software that is part of the controller firmware
• User block libraries combine these function blocks into user blocks
The Instance All command creates a new copy of all linked user blocks from the referenced user block libraries. In addition to
updating the user blocks, this command causes the instance scripts and text substitutions to run.
The Protection
property defines
access rights to
the properties list.
786 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.17.9 User Block
The user blocks of a controller program display in the Tree View within the Programs item under tasks, or other user blocks.
Instancing a user block updates it to the latest version from the user block library. Embedded and unlinked user blocks are
disconnected from the library, so instancing goes through the blocks in that user block and instances the linked user blocks.
➢ To instance a user block: from the Tree View, right-click a user block and select Instance.
Note Variables can also be added in the Summary View by directly editing the append row of the variable grid.
User block attributes only display on linked or unlinked user blocks whose user block definition contained attributes in the
library. They can be modified so that when their parent user block is instanced, the modified attributes are used in the scripts
and text substitutions that access them.
Note Linked tasks and user blocks can also be unlinked permanently.
➢ To unlink a program: from the Tree View, right-click a program item and select Unlink Permanently.
The linked icon next to the item in the Tree View changes and the program is unlinked from the library.
788 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.17.12 Property Editor
The Property Editor displays the properties of the item selected in the Tree View.
➢ To add a variable to a program: from the Software tab, expand the Programs item.
790 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
User block and task variables are local by default, and display under the associated user block item in the Tree View.
Note Variables can also be added in the Summary View by directly editing the last row of the variable grid.
Variables can be edited both in the Data Grid and the Property Editor. The Data Grid is used to view or edit variable
definitions, and can be configured to display a subset of the variable properties.
792 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Data Grid Variable Properties (continued)
Property Description
General
Variable tag name that can be customized by the user. Aliases are available to the WorkstationST component and the
HMI.
ToolboxST can also be placed in Alias mode so the Alias is displayed instead of the variable name in logic sheets,
Alias
properties, and dialogs. This allows standard application code to be created in one variable naming convention, but
edited and viewed in a second naming convention as needed. Refer to the section Variable Names and Aliases for
further details.
Array Number of elements in this array variable
Connection Allows a variable to be connected to another variable
Program variable description in Primary language
Description
This property displays if only one (Primary) language is configured.
Enumerations Values represented in separate CSV records
Fully qualified name of the variable. For example, a variable name gas_fuel_opt in a user block named Config under the
Full Name
Program CORE would have a full name of CORE.Config.gas_fuel_opt.
Inherit Description
of Connected
Variable
If set to True, causes the selected pin to inherit the description of any connected global variable
This property is
only applicable for
Libraries.
Initial Value Allows array length, data type, and enumeration editing
Name Variable name
Nonvolatile Indicates that the variable should be saved in non-volatile RAM
Type Refer to the following table, Variable Data Types
Keep During
Instance
This property is When set to True, keeps this variable during instance, even if unused.
only applicable for
Libraries.
Override Properties If set to True, identified overridable properties (set for each device) in instanced linked code in a device will not be
This property is updated with new values from the library when code is re-instanced, but instead will maintain any changes made to that
only applicable for instance.
a device. This property is only valid for a linked object.
Override Value Determines if the setting for Value overrides the setting in the library
This property is This property only displays in the data grid for a library, but it cannot be modified in the library.
only applicable for This property is only valid for a Control Constant in a linked object and hysteresis is the sub-variable for analog
a device. alarms.
Description
Primary Language Variable description in primary language
Second Language Variable description in secondary language
794 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Variable Data Types
Data Type Description
Any (ANY) Any data type
Boolean (BOOL 8–bit Boolean
Integer (INT) 16–bit signed integer
Double Integer (DINT) 32–bit (long) signed integer
Real (REAL) 32–bit floating point
Long Real (LREAL) 64–bit (long) floating point
Unsigned Integer (UINT) 16–bit unsigned integer
Unsigned Double Integer (UDINT) 32–bit (long) unsigned integer
Numeric (ANY_NUM) Any data type except Boolean
Analog or Boolean (Simple) Any simple data type
From the
Summary View,
select a variable.
From the Type
drop-down list,
select the
variable type.
Or:
from the
Property
Editor,
select Type
and the
variable type
796 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.18.2 Produced Pages
Produced Pages are data samples configured to be available to other components on the network.
Note When the first Produced Page is created, it automatically becomes the default page.
Tip � Any variable defined with $Default as the EGD page name is automatically placed on the currently selected default
page.
➢ To delete a page: from the Tree View, right-click the page to delete and select Delete.
798 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To configure a Produced Page: from the Tree View, expand Ethernet Global Data.
The following table lists the properties that are available when a Produced Page is selected in the Tree View.
➢ To compress a single page: from the Tree View, right-click the page to compress and select Compress.
➢ To compress all Produced Pages in a component: from the Tree View, right-click Produced Pages and
select Compress All.
Tip � If the variable to be added to the EGD page is already in use on the Software tab, you can add the variable without
using the EGD tab. To add a variable from the Software tab, select the desired variable(s) in the Summary View and set the
EGD Page property using either the Summary View or the Property Editor.
➢ To add a variable to a produced page: from the Tree View, right click a Produced Page and select Add
Variable to display the Select a Variable dialog box.
➢ To delete a variable from an EGD Page: from the Summary View, right-click the variable to delete and select
Delete Selected Row(s).
➢ To copy variable information from an EGD Page to the clipboard: from the Summary View, right-click a
variable and select Copy Selection. The data is copied in .csv format.
800 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.18.4 Edit Exchange Signatures and Configuration Time
The exchange signature is typically managed automatically. The major signature must be incremented when the exchange
content changes in any way other than additions to the end. If you are using the EGD Device Editor to configure EGD for a
device and the device signature changes only when the manufacturer updates the configuration, you may need to manually set
the signature.
Note To edit exchange signatures and configuration time, set the Layout Mode property to Manual. The Layout Mode
property displays when a Produced Page is selected in the Tree View.
3. Review the warning about manual Exchange Signature editing and click OK.
4. Make any desired changes to the signatures and configuration time and click OK.
Filter Toggle defaults to a filtered state. It displays items that have the same name but have a different Producer ID as
the open component.
Delete deletes the selected item(s). If the item(s) were saved as part of the configuration, they can be added again.
The EGD configuration server uses the producer ID to store all the documents for an EGD node.
When a component is saved, the EGD configuration is automatically published to the EGD configuration server. To avoid
unintentional overwriting of data, do not configure more than one .tcw file for a server.
• Compare command compares the component's EGD-produced data configuration with the EGD configuration server’s
content.
• UnConsumed Data command generates a report showing variables produced by this component that are not listed in
any other device’s consumed data file.
Note You can select devices to search against. The individual pages, with just variables, perform the same Compare.
The Referenced Devices item on the EGD tab also has a Compare command that compares the consumed variable
information for the open component against the EGD configuration server’s content.
The EGD variables defined in other components can be added to the current component’s variable list by adding a reference.
References can only be created to EGD-capable devices that are producers of pages.
Note When EGD configurations are edited in remote devices, you must refresh the configuration to ensure that the latest
variable information is used. The configuration is automatically refreshed when a component is opened, and when a Build is
performed in the component.
➢ To refresh the configuration of a referenced device: from the Tree View, right-click the device to be refreshed
and select Refresh.
➢ To create undefined variables for a single or multiple referenced device(s): from the Tree View, right-click
either the device or Referenced Devices and select Create Undefined Variables.
802 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.19 Modbus Slave Tab
The Modbus Slave feature allows a Modbus Master to Read data directly from the Mark VIeS Safety controller using the
Modbus protocol over Ethernet. (The Write command from the Modbus Master is not supported.)
Note Modifying Modbus properties results in a minor difference in the ToolboxST configuration. However, removing all
Modbus points creates a major configuration difference that forces an offline load.
Modbus Properties
Property Description Valid Range
Specifies the time in minutes that the slave remains connected to the master over
Connection Timeout 1 to 10
Ethernet when no requests are being received.
Port choices:
Ethernet Port Specifies the Ethernet port to be used for slave-Ethernet communication
502 and 503
Specifies the timeout period expressed as character time X 10. For example, 35
Inter-Character Timeout
represents 3.5 character times, or 0.0036 seconds at 9600 baud, 1 start bit, no 35 to 1000
(ICT)
parity, 1 stop bit.
Choices:
None, Odd,
Parity Specifies check character Even,
Mark, and
Space
Response Delay Additional delay time in ms before the slave responds to a master request. 0 to 999
Limits the number of commands processed per second. This is based on commands
Command Limit that have changed, not commands that are identical to previously received 0 to 25
commands.
Data Swapped Changes the transmission order if the data is greater than 16 bits when set to True. True or False
Settings Example
If set to True 32-bit example: 0x01234567 would be transmitted as 0x45 0x67 0x01 0x23
64-bit example: 0x0123456789ABCDEF would be transmitted as 0xCD 0xEF 0x89 0xAB 0x45 0x67
0x01 0x23
If set to False 32-bit example: 0x01234567 would be transmitted as 0x01 0x23 0x45 0x67
64-bit example: 0x0123456789ABCDEF would be transmitted as 0x01 0x23 0x45 0x67 0x89 0xAB
0xCD 0xEF
NAK Code specifies the Negative Acknowledge code to be used if data is requested from a controller that is incapable of
receiving the Modbus request. Possible codes are 4, 6 or None. None is selected only if the Modbus Master needs no reply
when communication fails between the Mark VIeS Safety controller and the target processor.
The ToolboxST application allows you to specify the variables on each page using a Data Grid. When you add a variable to a
page, both the Modbus Slave and the selected page are enabled on the controller. As you add and remove variables, the
controller is updated so that only pages containing variables are enabled. To completely disable the Modbus Slave, remove all
variables on all pages or from the Property Editor, select None as the Interface.
When a variable is added, the columns that display are listed in the following table.
Variable Columns
Column Description
Variable that is read or written from the device or the referenced device
Connected Variable
A connected variable must be added before the other columns become active.
Determines the variable data type and the registers used to transmit the variable data over a Modbus
connection as follows:
• BOOL is one bit of a 16-bit word (this is the only option if the connected variable is a BOOL.) All
BOOLs within a word must be set to the same Read direction.
• INT is a signed 16-bit word that takes one register
Point Data Type
• UINT is an unsigned 16-bit word that takes one register
• DINT is a signed 32-bit word that takes two registers
• UDINT is an unsigned 32-bit word that takes two registers
• REAL is a signed 32-bit float that takes two registers
• LREAL is a signed 64-bit float that takes four registers
Specifies the register address
When a variable is created, the address is automatically set to a value adjacent to the highest address
previously on the page, but the automatic value can be modified. Data types that are 32 bits or more
Address (DINT, UDINT, REAL, and LREAL) should be placed on odd addresses. The valid range for addresses
is 1 to 65534. When specifying an address for a BOOL variable, the bit 0-15 within the 16-bit word is
represented by a decimal. For example, 1.00 selects register address 1 and bit 0, and 10423.7 selects
register address 10423 and bit 7.
Raw Min Convert Modbus Slave variable data into engineering units
Raw Max The Raw Min and Raw Max columns control the minimum and maximum for the raw data. The Eng Min
Eng Min 0 and Eng Max columns control the minimum and maximum engineering units to which the raw data will
Eng Max be scaled. (The BOOL data type cannot be scaled.)
Read-only identifier automatically generated from the register page name, the address, and, if
Name
necessary, an added unique number
804 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.19.3 Data Format
All variables handled by the controller Modbus I/O are transferred to the controller signal space at the start of each task if
they are referenced in the control code. This method allows data type conversions and scaling. The data type conversion is
controlled by the type of Modbus variable and controller signal data type.
Float values are rounded prior to being stored in short or long registers. Short and long registers are clamped to their
minimum and maximum limit if the conversion exceeds their specified range.
Note The range of the Modbus variable is determined by the data type and not by the scaling record. Each integer data type
has an implied range. The raw data range in the scale dialog box is only used to compute the gain and offset of the variable
when converting it to a signal.
806 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
A UDINT variable is an unsigned 32-bit number. The value is transmitted on Modbus as two consecutive 16-bit integers with
the least significant word in Register N and the most significant word in Register N+1. Controller signals are converted into
DINT Modbus variables by applying the scaling information, rounding the values to the nearest integer value, and then
clamping the result in the range of 0 to +4294967295.
A REAL variable is a signed 32-bit IEEE 754 standard number. The value is transmitted on Modbus as two consecutive
16-bit integers with the least significant word in register N and the most significant word in register N+1. In this mode, the
most significant bit is treated as a sign bit and the next eight bits are a biased exponent followed by a 23-bit significant.
Controller signals are converted into FLOAT Modbus variables by applying the scaling information.
Note To ensure data coherency, LONG Modbus variables should always start on an odd register number, and the master
should send both registers to the controller in the same Modbus transaction.
To ensure data coherency, FLOAT Modbus variables should always start on an odd register number, and the master should
send both registers to the controller in the same Modbus transaction.
Station ID Function Code … Function Specific Data … CRC-16 MSB CRC-16 LSB
Station ID (follower address) is a number from 1 to 255 that specifies the unit with which to communicate.
Function code specifies the purpose and format of the remaining message portion.
CRC-16 are two bytes that complete every serial Modbus message. These bytes check errors and are calculated to ensure that
no transmission error occurred while the message was in transit. The method for calculating the CRC-16 is a public protocol.
Refer to the Gould Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide for information on calculating a correct Cycle Redundancy
Check (CRC).
The same functions are supported over Ethernet and the serial ports. All Modbus messages are received on the specified
Ethernet port. The Ethernet physical layer provides a CRC-32 check on all transmissions so the Modbus CRC-16 is not
included. Modbus over Ethernet adds the following header to the message formats.
808 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.19.6 Function Code Descriptions
The nine function codes implemented in the controller are used to read from the four Modbus table types. The following table
lists the function codes included in the messages sent from the DCS that are supported by the controller. Each function code
and the controller reply are described in this section.
Function Code (01) Start Coil (MSB) Start Coil (LSB) Number of Coils Number of Coils
(MSB) (LSB)
Starting output coil number is two bytes long, and can be any value less than the highest output coil number available in
the output coil table. The starting output coil number is equal to a number one less than the first output coil returned in the
normal response. For example, to get the first output coil, enter 0 for the starting output coil number. The high-order byte of
the starting output coil number field is sent as the first byte. The low-order byte is sent next.
Number of output coils to return is two bytes long, and must be from 1 to 2000, inclusive. It specifies the number of
output coils returned in the normal response. The sum of the starting output coil value and the number of output coils must be
less than or equal to the highest output coil number available in the output coil table. The high-order byte of the number of
output coils field is sent as the first byte. The low-order byte is sent next.
The normal message reply from the controller is formatted as follows:
Byte count is a binary number from 1 to 250. The specified number of data bytes follow.
Data bytes (data field) are the packed output coil status data. Each byte contains eight output coil values. The LSB of the
first byte contains the value of the output coil whose number is equal to the starting output coil number plus one. The value of
the output coils are ordered by number, starting with the LSB of the first byte and ending with the MSB of the last byte. If the
number of output coils is not a multiple of eight, then the last data byte contains zeros in one to seven of its highest order bits.
Function Code (02) Start Coil (MSB) Start Coil (LSB) Number of Coils (MSB) Number of Coils (LSB)
Starting input coil number is two-bytes long and can be any value less than the highest input coil available in the input
coil table. The starting input coil number is equal to one less than the number of the first input coil returned in the normal
response. For example, to get the first input coil, enter zero for the starting input coil number. The high order byte of the
starting input coil field is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
Number of input coils to return is two-bytes long and must be from 1 to 2000, inclusive. It specifies the number of input
coils returned in the normal response. The sum of the starting input coil value and the number of input coils must be less than
or equal to the highest input coil available in the input coil table. The high order byte of the number of input coils field is sent
as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
The normal message reply from the controller is formatted as follows:
Byte count is a binary number from 1 to 250. The specified number of data bytes follow.
Data bytes (data field) are the packed input coil status data. Each byte contains eight input coil values. The LSB of the first
byte contains the value of the input coil whose number is equal to the starting input coil plus one. The value of the inputs are
ordered by number, starting with the LSB of the first byte and ending with the MSB of the last byte. If the number of input
coils is not a multiple of eight, then the last data byte contains zeros in one to seven of its highest order bits.
Function Code Start Register Start Register Number of Registers Number of Registers
(03) (MSB) (LSB) (MSB) (LSB)
Starting holding register number is two-bytes long and can be any value less than the highest holding register number
available in the holding register table. The starting holding register number is equal to one less than the number of the first
holding register returned in the normal response. For example, to get the first holding register number (holding register
number one) enter zero for the starting holding register number. The high order byte of the starting holding register number
field is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
Number of holding registers value is two-bytes long and must be from 1 to 128, inclusive. It specifies the number of
holding registers returned in the normal response. The sum of the starting holding register value and the number of holding
registers must be less than or equal to the highest holding register number available in the holding register table. The high
order byte of the number of holding registers field is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
The normal message reply from the controller is formatted as follows:
Function Byte Count First Register First Register … Data Registers Last Register (LSB)
Code (03) (MSB) (LSB) Requested …
Byte count is an even binary number from 2 to 254, or 0. If the byte count is 0, then the master assumes 256 data bytes
follow. Otherwise, the specified number of data bytes follow, not including the two CRC-16 bytes (serial mode).
Holding registers are returned in the data field in numerical order, with the lowest number holding register in the first two
bytes and the highest number holding register in the last two bytes. The number of the first holding register is equal to the
starting holding register number plus one. The high order byte is sent before the low order byte of each holding register.
810 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.19.6.4 Function Code 04: Read Input Registers
Function code 04 is used to read input registers. The message sent from the master is formatted as follows:
Function Code (04) Start Register Start Register Number of Registers Number of Registers
(MSB) (LSB) (MSB) (LSB)
Number of input registers value is two-bytes long and must be from 1 to 128, inclusive. It specifies the number of input
registers returned in the normal response. The sum of the starting input register value and the number of input registers must
be less than or equal to the highest input register number available in the input register table. The high order byte of the
number of input registers field is sent as the first byte. The low order byte is sent next.
The normal message reply from the controller is formatted as follows:
Function Code Byte Count First First Register … Data Registers Last Register (LSB)
(04) Register (LSB) Requested …
(MSB)
Byte count is an even binary number from 2 to 254, or 0. If the byte count is 0, then the master assumes 256 data bytes
follow. Otherwise, the specified number of data bytes follow, not including the two CRC-16 bytes (serial mode).
Input registers are returned in the data field in numerical order, with the lowest number input register in the first two bytes
and the highest number input register in the last two bytes of the data field. The number of the first input register in the data
field is equal to the starting input register number plus one. The high order byte is sent before the low order byte.
Data bytes (data field) are the packed output coil status data. The data byte contains eight output coil values. The LSB of
the byte contains the value of output coil number one. The MSB contains the value of output coil number eight.
• Variable
• Block Pin
• I/O
• Alarm
• GE Rationalization
• Hold
• Event
• NVRAM
• IONet EGD
• I/O Diagnostics
• Coding Practices
• Unlinked Programs/User Blocks
• Global variables
• Variable configuration
• Web
• Compressed data log
• EGD point list
• Alias
• Second language
812 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.20.1.1 Global Variable Report
The Global Variable report lists all Global variables used in the application code. Operators can view the variable definition
for variable descriptions and parameter data.
Double-click a Global
Variable to go to where
the variable is defined
in the application code.
Note Intrinsic variables are not defined in the application code configuration. The Where Used tab displays locations in the
configuration where the intrinsic variables have been used.
814 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Global Variable Report Columns
Column Description
Name Global Variable name
Alias Variable tag name that can be customized for use with the WorkstationST application and all HMIs
Second Language Description Description in second language (if configured in System Editor)
Description Variable description
Type Variable type (BOOL, REAL, UINT)
Used in Code If True, any connection used in the code
Written Multiple If True, indicates the variable is written more than once in the code
Control Constant If True, indicates the variable is a control constant
EGD Page Configured EGD page
Initial Value Initial value of the variable
Alarm Indicates either alarmed or not alarmed (for Booleans), and provides the definition for Analog alarms
Locator Full variable name, used to find the I/O point in the device
If enabled, causes the Alarm to be cleared before the operator acknowledges the Alarm condition when
Auto Reset the process returns to normal limits.
Refer to the WorkstationST Alarm Viewer Instruction Guide (GEI-100620).
Alarm Shelving If enabled, allows the operator to temporarily remove the alarm from the Alarm Viewer display
Alarm Shelving Max Duration Maximum time, in minutes, that an alarm can remain shelved
Plant Area Defined string that associates a variable to an area or function of a plant
Parent Alarms Alarms configured as parent to the variable (variable should be alarm)
Child Alarms Alarms configured as child to the variable (variable should be alarm)
Consequence of Inaction Consequence if operator does not address the alarm
Operator Urgency How important for operator to address the alarm
Operator Action Action the operator should take to avoid defined consequences
Potential Causes What may have occurred to cause this alarm
Second Language Consequence of
Consequence in second language if operator does not address the alarm
Inaction
Second Language Operator Urgency How important in second language for operator to address the alarm
Second Language Operator Action Action in second language the operator should take to avoid defined consequences
Second Language Potential Causes What may have occurred to cause this alarm in second language
Access Variable access type
Alarm Class Selects a system-configured Alarm Class, which is used by an HMI to classify and color Alarms
Alarm Inhibit Group Alarm Inhibit Group with which this variable is associated
If set to True, causes the Alarm to be generated on a 1–to–0 transition. Alarm property must be set to
Alarm On Zero
Alarmed (True).
Array If set to True, variable is an array
Default upper limit for HMI displays (bar graph, trending, and such). If a Format Spec has been
Display High
specified and this property has no specification, the Format Spec Engineering Max is used.
Display Low Default lower limit for HMI displays
Display Screen Default HMI screen name
Entry High Upper limit for setpoint entry on HMI
Entry Low Lower limit for setpoint entry on HMI
Entry No Row entry number
If set to True, enables the variable as an Event. Events are stateless messages not queued in the
Event controller. When an Event occurs, a time-tagged transition message is sent to all HMIs configured for
Events.
Format Spec Name of the Format specifications used to control the method of presenting variables in an HMI
Global Name Prefix Importable value is a predefined enum; it can be set to None, Full, Program, Block, and Task
If set to True, prevents modify-variable commands from being written into the Command and Event Log
CEL Command Filter
(CEL) (default is False)
816 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.20.1.2 Variable Configuration Report
The Variable Configuration report lists all configured variables used in the Mark VIe control application code. Operators can
view the variable definition for variable descriptions and configuration data.
Double-click a variable
to go to where the
variable is configured
in the application code.
Note Intrinsic variables are not defined in the application code configuration. The Where Used tab displays locations in the
configuration where the intrinsic variables have been used.
818 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Variable Configuration Report Columns
Column Description
Name Variable name
Type Variable type (for example, BOOL, REAL, UINT)
Enum If set to True, indicates that the variable has an enumeration
Units Indicates engineering units
Precision Indicates the variable precision
Control Constant If set to True, indicates that the variable is a control constant
Used In Code If set to True, is any connection used in the code
Written Multiple If True, indicates that the variable is written more than once in the code
EGD Page Configured EGD page
Indicates either alarmed or not alarmed for Booleans, and provides the definition for Analog
Alarm
alarms
Alarm On Zero If set to True, indicates that the Alarm occurs on a 1–to–0 transition
Event If True, indicates that the alarm is an Event
Hold If True, indicates that the alarm is a Hold
SOE If True, indicates that the alarm is an SOE
NVRAM If True, indicates that the alarm is a NVRAM
Initial Value Initial value of the variable
Array If True, indicates that the Alarm is an array
Alarm Class Indicates a group of alarms that share a common priority and color scheme
Display Screen HMI screen name
Display High Default upper limit for HMI screens
Display Low Default lower limit for HMI screens
Entry High Default upper limit for the set-point entry on the HMI
Entry Low Default lower limit for the set-point entry on the HMI
Recorder Deadband Enables data collection of a variable in the Recorder if the value changes
If set to True, prevents modify-variable commands from being written into the Command and
CEL Command Filter
Event Log (CEL) (default is False)
Historian Deadband Enables data collection of a variable in the Historian if the value changes
Variable tag name that can be customized for use with the WorkstationST application and all
Alias
HMIs
Second Language
Second language, if configured in the System Editor
Description
Locator Full name of the variable
If enabled, causes the Alarm to be cleared before the operator acknowledges the alarm
Auto Reset
condition when the process returns to normal limits
Alarm Shelving If enabled, allows the operator to temporarily remove the alarm from the Alarm Viewer display
Alarm Shelving Max
Maximum time, in minutes, that an Alarm can remain shelved
Duration
Plant Area Defined string that associates a variable to an area or function of a plant
The Web report provides variable name, description, type, alias, second language description, and location in the application
code, as well as where the variable is used and if the variable is written multiple times in the code.
To generate a Variable Web report, Controller Web Pages must be enabled and the
variables must have the Download Info column set to True.
Attention
1. Generate a Web report.
820 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3. View variable definition and configuration data.
Double-click a variable to go
to where the variable is used
in the application code.
822 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the Compressed Data Log report, double-click
a variable to view the configuration details.
824 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
EGD Point List Report Example
826 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
EGD Point List Report Columns
Column Description
Entry No Row entry number
Variable Variable name
Point Name EGD point name
Point Offset EGD point address
Direction Access, either Read-Write or Read-only
Data Type EGD variable data type (BOOL, REAL, UINT)
CIMPLICITY
HMI screen
Resource
Units Units of the EGD variable
Producer ID Unique address of the producing device
Period (ms) Time frame for the EGD points to be updated
Exchange Name Name of the exchange
Destination Destination IP address
Description Variable description
Variable tag name that can be customized for use with the
Alias
WorkstationST application and all HMIs
Second Language
Second language, if configured in the System Editor
Description
Path Location path (or the full name of the item)
Format Specification System-owned format specification assigned to a variable
Exchange Length Length of the exchange
Exchange Number Number of the exchange
Exchange Revision Revision of the exchange
828 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The Alias Report displays the variables and
associated alias names.
2. To enter alias names, save the report as a .csv file, enter alias names, then import the data back into the ToolboxST
system.
From the View menu, select Reports, Variable, and Second Language.
830 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Example Second Language Report
832 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
2. Select a block pin and navigate to the pin connections.
The Software tab displays the program, task, and block in which the pin is used.
Double-click the associated pin to display the connections.
834 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Example I/O Variable Report
836 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
I/O Variable Report Columns (continued)
Column Description
Connected Variable Name of the variable attached to the I/O variable
Locator Full name of the I/O variable
Configured redundancy of the I/O pack (simplex,
Pack Redundancy
dual, TMR)
Config Type I/O configuration type
Data Type I/O variable data type
Engr High I/O high value in engineering units
Engr Low I/O low value in engineering units
Entry No Row entry number
Port Name Name of module’s port
Raw High Raw I/O high value
Raw Low Raw I/O low value
SeqOfEvents Sequence of Events (SOE)
Signal Invert Signal inversion
Sub-Assembly Name of module’s sub-assembly
Units Engineering units
If the I/O variable is used by the Control Sequence
Used in Code
Program (CSP), the application code
Mode I/O point configuration mode
838 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
2. Select a variable and navigate to the configuration.
From the variable report, double-click an I/O variable to display the configuration.
The Alarm report provides a list of all alarms in the current configuration and the aspects associated with them. Users can
view the module(s) associated with the alarms in the Alarm Viewer for alarm troubleshooting.
840 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
2. Select an alarm to navigate to the configuration.
842 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.20.5 GE Rationalization Report
The GE Rationalization report lists GE Rationalization parameters for the current alarms generated for the variables. Users
can export the report to Excel, enter specific information to manage plant-specific alarms, and then import the updated report
back into ToolboxST to make the values available from Alarm Help in the Alarm Viewer.
Alarm help files are only generated when the Publish Alarm Help property is set to
True in the system Property Editor.
Attention
844 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.20.6 Hold Report
The Hold report identifies all steam turbine variables marked as Holds for troubleshooting and information reference.
846 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.20.7 Event Report
The Event report lists digital signals defined as an Event, and provides an alarm History record when a signal transitions from
a 1 to 0. Event notifications provide the date and time stamp for when the Event occurred. This report can be used for
troubleshooting and informational reference.
848 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.20.8 NVRAM Report
The NVRAM report lists all configured variables that are downloaded and used in the RAM and marked as non-volatile.
NVRAM variable values are saved so in the event of power loss or if you power down and power up, the controller restores
the last stored values.
850 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.20.9 IONet EGD Report
The IONet EGD report provides network status values for all IONet communication displayed in the current component and
reflects totals of the controller exchange. EGD communication, configuration, and status specific to EGD communication
(system and controller) can be used for troubleshooting and information reference.
852 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.20.10 I/O Diagnostics (Module) Report
The I/O Diagnostics reports list all diagnostic alarms for the device that need attention. The following sections describe the
Mark VIeS I/O diagnostics-specific reports:
• Alarm
• Revision
• Communication
• Hardware
From the View menu, select Reports, I/O Diagnostics, and Alarm.
From the Group Level, select Create Module Report, and Alarm.
854 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
2. Locate an alarm and view the details in the Diagnostic Alarm Viewer.
3. View the Diagnostic Alarm Help containing possible causes and solutions for troubleshooting.
From the View menu, select Reports, I/O Diagnostics, and Revision.
856 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
b. For a Group:
From the Group Level, select Create Module Report, and Revision.
2. Locate a module in the report and view the details in the Status Viewer.
858 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.20.10.3 I/O Diagnostics (Module) Communication Report
The I/O Diagnostics Communication report provides informational status of the I/O module communication at the device, I/O
module, or Group level that the operator uses to detect and resolve communication issues.
From the View menu, select Reports, I/O Diagnostics, and Communication.
From the Group Level, select Create Module Report, and Communication.
860 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
I/O Communication Report Columns
Column Description
Module Module name
Pack Logical I/O pack name associated with the module
Required? Module required for controller boot: True or False
Prod ID Unique address of the producing device of I/O pack IONet EGD
Exch ID Exchange ID of I/O pack IONet EGD
Health Health state of I/O pack IONet EGD: Healthy or Unhealthy
Period I/O pack IONet EGD period
Size I/O pack IONet EGD data length
Recv Cnt Number of times EGD received the data exchange
Missed Cnt Number of times EGD did not receive the data exchange
Late Cnt Number of times EGD received the exchange later than expected
Connection IONet number
Bad Data Time Stamp? Bad data is a time stamp: True or False
Bad Minor Sig? Bad minor signature: True or False
Bad Major Sig? Bad major signature: True or False
Healthy? Data exchange status healthy: True or False
Is Bad Config Time Stamp? Bad configuration is a time stamp: True or False
Long? Data too long: True or False
Never Sent? Data exchange never sent: True or False
On Preferred Sender? Data exchange is sent on the preferred IONet: True or False
Out of Order Cnt Number of address changes that occurred
Producer? Data exchange is produced by this producer: True or False
Stale Data Cnt Number of stale data messages
Stale Data? Exchange data is stale: True or False
Time Out? Exchange has timed out: True or False
Too Long Cnt Number of messages that are too long
Too Short? Exchange data is too short: True or False
Unequal Minor Sig? Unequal module is a minor signature: True or False
From the View menu, select Reports, I/O Diagnostics, and Hardware.
862 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
b. For a Group:
From the Group Level, select Create Module Report, and Hardware.
864 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.20.11 Coding Practices Report
The Coding Practice report allows the user to check the variables in the ToolboxST configuration to review for invalid coding
(configuration). The following four types of coding practices reports can be generated:
• Unwritten variables
• Multiple writes
• Multiple output assigned variables
• Unused I/O
866 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
2. Select a variable and navigate to the configuration.
From the Coding Practices report , double-click a variable to display the configuration.
868 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The Find Results tab displays any identified unlinked
programs or userblocks .
• Open report
• Save report
• Retrieve (generate) report
• Print report
• Sort (modify) columns
• Filter
• Refresh
• Zoom
• Find text
• Help
Toolbar Icons
Icon Description
Zoom in
Zoom out
Get help
870 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To enable the Toolbar
➢ To save a report
ToolboxST system.
➢ To sort a report column: click any column heading to apply a sort to that column. The first click sorts the column in
ascending order; a second click sorts the column in descending order.
Column
names that
display in
blue cannot
be moved.
872 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Or
2. Select a column header and use the drag-and-drop feature.
➢ To apply a report filter: from the Report menu, click Apply Filter to open the Edit Report Filter dialog box.
Available Available
columns comparison
(double-click and Boolean
to add to an operators
equation) (double-click
to add to an
equation)
Click to add
parentheses
Click OK to
accept the
filter equation
Enter filter that displays.
equation to
be used. Click Clear
to delete the
equation.
Click Cancel
to cancel the
equation but
keep the
current
settings.
When using the LIKE operator, you can prefix or suffix a wildcard character, either * or
LIKE
%, to the right-hand value. The wildcard character can stand for any number of
alphanumeric characters, including zero. The wildcard character can only be present
at the beginning or the end of the right-hand value (for example, *value or value* or
*value*)
AND Expressions to the left and right of the AND operator must both be True
OR Either the expression to the left or to the right of the operator must be True
NOT Expression to the right of the operator must be False
You can use as many groups of parentheses as necessary to define an expression.
String values must be enclosed in single quotes , for example 'string'
➢ To remove a report filter: from the Report menu, click Remove Filter. The filter is removed and all available rows
display.
➢ To save a filtered report: from the File menu, click Save Report.
874 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.20.13.2 Find Report Data
The Find feature performs text searches within a report.
➢ To search for text within a report: from the Report menu, click Find to display the Find dialog box.
If selected,
capitalization
in the test
string must
match the
text in the
report exactly
• I/O Variable
• I/O Configuration
• Global Variable
• Block Pin
• Variable Alias
• Second Language
• GE Rationalization
Only the Alias and Second Language properties can be modified. The Variable Alias report and the Second Language report
can be imported from either a .csv or an .xml file. The other reports can only be imported from a .csv file.
➢ To import an I/O Variable, I/O Configuration, Global Variable, or Block Pin report
1. From the File menu, select Import and the desired report.
2. From the Open Report dialog box, select the report and click Open to import the data. Any data that cannot be
modified is highlighted when the report displays.
876 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To avoid issues with second language special characters during import
1. Make sure the file is a .csv file.
2. Open the .csv file with Notepad.
3. From the Notepad File menu, click Save As.
4. Save the file with Encoding UTF-8.
Tip: Change the Save as type to All Files (*.*) so you will
still be able to save the file as a .csv file.
Click Save .
5. Import the file into ToolboxST and verify that all the special characters display correctly.
If you use Microsoft Excel to modify the .csv file, make sure you save the file back to a
.csv file from an .xls file.
If the .csv file contains UTF-8 special characters, to avoid issues with displaying
special characters after import back into ToolboxST open the file with Notepad and
Attention save the file with Encoding set to UTF-8. Refer to the procedure To avoid issues with
second language special characters during import.
878 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
I/O Variable and I/O Configuration Report (continued)
Can Be
Column Name Type Description
Imported
Can be set to Alarmed/Not Alarmed. Otherwise, can be set to Not Alarmed
SeqOfEvents Enum Yes or AnalogAlarmDefault, depending on variable type. A Boolean can be set to
Alarmed/NotAlarmed.
Entry Low Double Yes Default lower limit for setpoint entry on HMI
Entry High Double Yes Default upper limit for setpoint entry on HMI
Default upper limit for HMI displays (bar graph, trending, and such). If a
Display High Double Yes Format Spec has been specified and this property has no specification, the
Format Spec Engineering Max is used.
Default lower limit for HMI displays (bar graph, trending, and such). If a
Display Low Double Yes Format Spec has been specified and this property has no specification, the
Format Spec Engineering Max is used.
I/O device connected to the I/O variable as identified in the device summary
Device Tag String Yes
drawing
Jumper Value String Yes Should be a predefined jumper value to import this column
Cable Number String Yes
Wire Number String Yes
Wire Jumper String Yes To import this column, screw is located using Screw Name column data
Interposing TB String Yes
Screw Note String Yes
880 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Block Pin Report
Column Name Type Importable Description
Pin Description String Yes Pin Description
Block Description String Yes Description of instanced block
Data Enum
Data Type Yes Pin Type
Type
➢ To open a stand-alone Watch Window: from the Start menu, select All Programs, , ToolboxST, and Watch
Window.
➢ To create a Watch Window: from the System Editor Tree View, right-click the system and select Insert New,
Tool and Watch Window.
Enter a Name,
and a Description
(optional), and
click OK.
Note If this Watch Window is being opened for the first time, the list is empty. Add or import a new Watch Window.
➢ To open an existing Watch Window: from the System Editor Tree View, right-click the system and select Insert
Existing and Watch Window.
➢ To open a Watch Window: from a Component Editor View menu, select Watch Windows.
882 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.21.1 Add Variable
➢ To add a variable: from the Watch Window Edit menu, select Add Variable and Using Add Wizard . When the
Welcome page displays, click Next.
If you selected
System
Component in the
previous page,
select the desired
component from
the drop-down list
and click Next.
The variables
will display here.
Click Finish .
Once a variable is added to a Watch Window, right-click the variable row header to perform the following actions:
Note When a system component providing signals to a Watch Window is replicated, the Watch Window is replicated as
well.
884 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To organize columns in a Watch Window: from the View menu, select Organize Columns.
Forcing of protective functions is never permissible for an operating unit. All safety
Warning measures should be strictly enforced in conjunction with this procedure.
Note The Watch Window tool only exports grid columns necessary to retrieve variable information. For example,
DatasourceName from the exported file is used to retrieve the variable’s remaining properties from the system. User-defined
columns such as User Comment are also included.
➢ To save a Watch Window: from the <Watch Window name> File menu, select Save As to save the Watch Window
as a .watch file in a user-selected location,
or select Save to save the Watch Window as a .watch file in the Tools folder in the system.
11.22 LiveView
The LiveView feature allows you to display a graphical representation of live data from various sources in the system.
LiveViews can be added to a ToolboxST system, to a component, or opened as a standalone editor.
886 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the Tree
View, right-click the
system item and
select Insert new,
Tool , and LiveView
➢ To add an existing LiveView: from the System Editor, right-click the system and select Insert Existing and
LiveView.
➢ To edit a LiveView: from the System Editor, right-click a LiveView and select Edit System Component.
➢ To add a LiveView from a Component Editor: from the View menu, select LiveViews.
888 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.22.4 Standard Toolbar
New Save Copy Delete Redo Stop Tools
Properties
Window
Open Cut Paste Undo Start Log View
890 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Analog Meter is the pointer Status Indicator Bar Graph displays
deviated with respect to the indicates the status the live value of the
live value of the variable of a Boolean variable variable
Reference point
Select a Bar
Color for the
High Alarm and
High Warning
range above the
reference point
Select a Bar
Color for the
Normal range
above the
reference point
Select a Bar
Color for the
Low Alarm and
Low Warning
range above the
reference point
892 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
If the Behavior
property is set to
Toggle and the On
Push property is
set to True, the
state of the
attached variable is
set to True when
the left-mouse
button is clicked
If the Behavior
property is set to
Momentary and
the On Push
property is set to
False, the state of
the attached
variable is set to
True when the left-
mouse button is
clicked
Locked enables
or disables the
ability to move
and resize objects
Locked Property
894 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.22.9 Attach Variable
➢ To attach a variable
Or
896 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
If you selected System Component in the
previous page, select the desired component
from the drop-down list and clickNext
Variables display
here. Click
Finish
Note You can also attach a variable by entering the variable name in the Property View.
898 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.23 Constants
Constants include both control constants and undriven variables.
➢ To display constants
➢ To display constants
900 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mark VIeS Component Editor GEH-6703P User Guide 901
Public Information
11.23.3 Import and Export Constants
Constants for a controller can be exported to a comma separated value (.csv) file for external viewing and changes. Previously
exported constant files can be imported back into the controller. During an Import, the initial values Entry High Limits and
Entry Low Limits are updated according to the values in the .csv file. A sample .csv file is provided below to illustrate the
output format:
Name, Description, Live Value, ToolboxST Initial Value, Value Override, Connection, Data
Type, Units, Access, Format Specification, Entry Low Limit, Entry High Limit, Entry Limits
Override, Shelve_Prog1_1.Shelve_LProg_Anlg.LLL_SP, Low Low Low SP, —90, —90, False, INT,,
ReadOnly,,,,False
ControlConstant1,0,,,BOOL,,,
ControlConstant2,30,10,51,REAL,,,
ControlConstant3,True,,,BOOL,,,
ControlConstant4,13,8,20,INT,,,
ControlConstant5[0],14,5,12,54,REAL,,,
ControlConstant5[1],34,12,54,REAL,,,
The Reconcile Differences dialog box displays constants with both initial and live values.
902 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The Controller Value is the value in Select the check box next
the running controller. to the correct value to
The ToolboxST Initial Value is the synchronize the constant,
value in the ToolboxST configuration. then click OK
• For constants when the ToolboxST initial value was checked, that value is either sent to the controller (where the OK
button is clicked), or a pcode record is created, causing the next online download to change both the initial and live
values.
• For constants when the live value was checked, the ToolboxST initial value is set equal to the controller live value. This
causes a minor revision configuration change to Not Equal. A Build and Download to the controller is required to
complete the reconcile function.
904 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
11.24 I/O CheckOut
The I/O CheckOut feature allows you to verify the operation of each I/O value.
➢ To display I/O values: from the Hardware tab, select an I/O module.
906 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
12 Mark VIeS — Working Online
The Mark VIeS component provides control, protection, and monitoring of turbine and driven load equipment. Vital
subsystems, such as servo control, vibration protection, and synchronization are embedded in the I/O with on-board
processors to optimize performance.
The ToolboxST configuration is used to configure the software for the Mark VIeS component. The system has a
CompactPCI® controller with networked I/O. The I/O processors are located on the terminal boards instead of in centralized
board racks. This configuration digitizes the signals on the terminal boards, which can be mounted local or remote,
individually or in groups.
Note For further details, refer to the Mark VIeS Safety Control Functional Safety Manual (GEH-6723), the section Branding.
➢ To switch a controller to Lock or Unlock mode: from the Device menu, select the Lock/Unlock command to
display the Lock / Unlock dialog box. A dialog box displays asking you to confirm:
Click Unlock
and Close
The Locked attribute shows the status as Yes or No for the controllers.
908 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To brand a controller: from the Device menu, select the Brand command, or from the toolbar, click the Brand
icon. The Brand attribute shows the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) values for the controllers, which verifies the
integrity of the data.
Color Conditions
All controllers functioning normally.
- Control state is controlling
- Controller and DDR Equality equal
One or more of the following:
- Control state not controlling
- Controller and DDR Equality not equal
- Idle or Frame Idle Time < 20%
One or more of the following:
- Control state is failed
- Controller Equality has a major difference
Major difference
910 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
12.3.1 Status Tab Attributes
If the indicated Control State is not Controlling, rest the cursor over the current state to display additional information or
double-click Control State to display the information in a separate window.
• Compressing variables
• Changing frame rate
• Changing the background blockware period
• Adding the first I/O pack to a controller
• Changing redundancy type
• Changing the platform type, which changes the number of Ethernets
• Changing any NTP configuration on a controller
State Description
Powerup Power up controller
Master initialization Controller is loading its own configuration
Designated controller determination Determine which controller is designated in a redundant controller configuration
Perform initialization of non-designated controllers with NVRAM, command variables,
Data initialization
and constants
Inputs enabled Wait in this state for all required I/O packs to start transmitting inputs
Input voting Check voting inputs prior to execution of application code
Exchange initialization Populate redundant controllers with dc state variables prior to voting
Exchange state variables so that a controller joining a running system won’t have a
Exchanging
step in its initial calculations
Turn on the application code and execute each task at least once before driving
Sequencing
outputs
Controlling Turn on outputs
Loading Online load is in progress
Load complete Online load has finished. Wait for re-synchronization of redundant controllers
Fail Failure has occurred
912 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
12.4 Secure State
Note This feature is available if it is supported by your version of the Mark VIeS control.
The ToolboxST application can be used to increase security protection for controllers. Controllers can be run in either of two
states: Open or Secure. When the controller is in the Open state, it processes all commands received. In the Secure state,
certificates are used to verify both the identity of the user accessing the controller and the actions that the user is allowed to
perform.
The Secure state requires that certificates be assigned to both the controller and the user accessing the controller. Certificates
are issued by a Certificate Authority (CA) Server.
Controllers request certificates directly from the CA Server using the IP address and CA name that was configured in the
system. The CA Server must be available when the controller requests a certificate and switches from the Open to the Secure
state. When the controller certificate expires, a new one is obtained by taking the controller from Secure to Open state and
back again.
The user certificate is also issued from the CA Server and stored in the user certificate store. The ToolboxST application
retrieves the certificate from the store, and uses it to establish a secure connection to the controller. User access levels are
defined in the certificate. The controller uses this information to determine which user commands to accept and which to
reject.
Note When the user certificate expires, refer to the SecurityST* Cyber Security Management System Maintenance Guide
(GEH-6765) for the renewal procedure.
A second server, called a Remote System log (RSyslog), logs all security-related events. To send security-related messages, a
controller must know the IP address of the RSyslog. The RSyslog also receives security-related messages from the
ToolboxST application. Examples of data collected by the RSyslog include:
914 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Click Go to Secure.
For dual and TMR configurations, select Go to Secure for each controller.
Attention
Note When the process is in the Authenticated state, the controller is retrieving a certificate revocation list from the CA
Server to verify that the requestor has a valid certificate.
The Component Info View Status tab displays the Security state for each configured controller.
916 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
12.5 Download Controller Configuration
The Download item in the Device menu is used to download the component and configuration settings to the controller and
I/O modules.
A controller cannot communicate on a network until these controller setup tasks are
completed.
Attention
Prerequisites
Verify the following criteria before configuration:
Note If using a Shared IONet system, repeat the procedures in this section for both the Mark VIe and VIeS components (or
Mark VIe and MarkStat components).
• The control system hardware and network cabling have been connected properly
• All system equipment has been successfully powered on.
• The controller has been added to the system with the correct redundancy
If this is a new UCSB controller received directly from the factory, or a UCSB that has
not been previously configured, the IP address must be set using a USB flash device.
Skip to step b in this procedure.
Attention
i. Enter the device password and select a COM port and the appropriate Channel.
918 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
ii. Connect an RJ-45 serial cable adapter from the main board of the controller to a serial port on your computer:
Note The boot LED blinking after this operation is normal and signifies the unit has booted and is waiting for an
application download.
i. Insert a non-encrypted removable USB 2.0 (only) flash device with a 4 GB minimum capacity into the HMI
computer USB port.
ii. Initialize the controller.
920 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Click Scan to search for available USB devices.
iii. Remove the USB flash device from the USB port of the HMI computer, then click Finish.
iv. Remove power from the controller.
v. Insert the USB flash device into the controller. For a UCSB, press and hold in the Backup/Restore button. For
a UCSC, press and hold the PHY PRES button.
Note Refer to the Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Control Systems Volume II: System Guide for General-purpose
Applications (GEH-6721_Vol_II), the sections UCSC Restore and UCSB Backup and Restore for these
procedures.
vi. Apply power to the controller while continuing to press the button until the On LED on the front of the
controller becomes solid green, then release the button. The On LED turns off when the process is complete.
vii. Remove power from the controller, remove the USB flash device, then re-apply power to the controller.
viii. If using redundant controllers, repeat this procedure for the S and T controllers (if TMR) or S (if dual). Be sure
to select the correct Channel.
Note The boot LED blinking after this operation is normal and signifies the unit has booted and is waiting for an
application download.
• The control system hardware and network cabling have been connected properly
• All system equipment has been successfully powered on.
• The controller has been added to the system with the correct redundancy
• The computer that runs the ToolboxST application and the controllers must be configured to be on the same subnet for
UDH Ethernet communication.
922 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
i. Enter the device password, then select a COM port and the appropriate controller Channel.
ii. Connect a UCCC RJ-45 adapter (GE part number 342A4931ABP1) from the main board of the controller to a
serial port on your computer.
iii. Click Next to continue.
iv. The Controller Setup Wizard displays the progress of the connection. When it is complete, click Finish.
v. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the replacement controller’s COM port, and disconnect the serial adapter
from the engineering workstation.
vi. Reboot the controller.
vii. Configure the replacement controller and/or set of controllers with the site-specific controller password. Refer to
the section Controller Password Change for further instructions.
b. Select Format Flash to reconfigure the Ethernet settings and transfer the configuration from the ToolboxST
application to the controller hardware using a CompactFlash device (PCMCIA adapter or USB device).
Turn off power to the controller and unplug the CompactFlash from the controller. Insert the CompactFlash into the
card reader, then plug the card reader into the USB port of the computer that is running the ToolboxST application.
Note From a Windows 7 computer, run the ToolboxST application as an Administrator to format a CompactFlash card.
924 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
If the Controller Setup Wizard displays this message , close ToolboxST .
From your desktop , right -click the ToolboxST icon and select Run as Administrator.
Re-open the system .tcw file in ToolboxST and begin the Controller Setup procedure again .
Verify the controller name and the IP address. The IP addre ss is 192.168.101.1xy (where x = controller number;
1 for G1, 2 for G2, and so forth) and y = TMR number; 1 for R, 2 for S, and 3 for T).
6. From the Controller Setup Wizard, click Write to format the CompactFlash.
7. Verify that the CompactFlash download completed successfully message displays, then click Finish.
8. Insert the CompactFlash into the controller.
9. Apply power to the controller (red boot LED should flash at 1 Hz).
10. If the Mark VIeS control interfaces with a SecurityST platform that is utilizing MAC filtering, update the MAC filtering
to account for the new controller core (as appropriate) per SecurityST guidelines and procedures.
11. Repeat this procedure for each controller (if using a redundant controller set). Be sure to select the correct Channel that
matches the redundant controller.
926 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
12.5.2 Controller Password Change
If the controller password is still set to the factory default password, a controller diagnostic alarm message, Default user
password detected, displays in the Status tab to prompt the user to change the password.
To maintain a strong security posture GE recommends the user must change the
factory default controller password for a device. The maximum number of characters
for the new password is limited to 8 characters. The new password cannot be the
factory default password. The factory default password is ge.
For additional details, refer to Mark VIe and Mark VIeS Control Systems Volume II:
Attention System Guide for General-purpose Applications (GEH-6721_Vol_II), the chapter
Controller Diagnostic Alarms, alarm 547.
Note For a device configured with redundant controllers, the password applies to all controllers in that device.
Note This password is required for configuring the network address during controller setup.
When the password for the replacement controller is successfully synchronized to the other controller passwords in the set, a
message displays in the Log window.
928 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
12.5.3 Download to Controller
The ToolboxST application is used to configure the Mark VIeS component and its distributed I/O modules. Depending on the
components used, the following software can be downloaded:
• Boot Loader starts the operating system for the controller and I/O modules, much like the BIOS on a desktop computer.
Changes to the boot loader are very infrequent.
Note Not all devices have the boot loader. In this case, the boot loader is contained within the base load.
Base Load contains the operating system for the controller and I/O modules. While changes to the base load are more
likely than changes to the boot loader, they still occur infrequently.
• Firmware provides the functionality of the controller and I/O modules. It can be updated over the lifetime of the
controller to incorporate new features and bug fixes.
• Application Code contains the configuration of the controller as created in the ToolboxST application. Whenever a
change is made to the configuration, the application code must be downloaded. There are two types of application code
download: online and offline. An online download (very commonly performed) changes the configuration without
interrupting control and the new configuration takes effect between control frames. An offline download requires a
controller restart (performed less frequently).
• Parameters contain specific configuration for the I/O modules.
Boot loader, base load, firmware, offline application code downloads, and parameter
downloads all require the target device to be restarted. Before downloading new
software to a controller, take the necessary steps to secure the control equipment to
prevent equipment damage and personal injury.
Warning
Note The type of software download needed is determined by which changes have been made to the controller
configuration.
The Download Wizard is used to download software to a Mark VIeS component and its distributed I/O modules over an
Ethernet connection. The Download Wizard can automatically examine the system configuration to locate out-of-date
software, or you can manually select individual items to download.
Note Certain conditions do not allow a download, such as an incorrect platform type. Check the Component InfoView for
errors that would prohibit a download.
1. From the Component Editor Device menu, select Download and Download Wizard.
Note If the controller is in Unlock mode, the download continues. If it is locked, refer to the section Safety Controller
Operations.
2. If you have changed configuration settings since the last Build operation, a message box displays indicating that the
software is out of date. Click Yes to build the current configuration.
3. When the welcome page displays, click Next.
Select Show
All to display
all software to
be downloaded
Click Next
4. Click Next when the following message displays: Downloading application code offline will shut the selected
controller(s) down. This will result in a process trip if running. I/O outputs will change during this
operation. Ensure that the process is secure prior to continuing.
5. When the Controller Download Status dialog box displays a completed download, click Close.
6. When the download is complete, click Finish. The Component InfoView Log tab displays any warnings or errors
that occurred during the download.
➢ To view and set the controller time: from the Device menu, select View/Set Time... and follow the instructions
on the ToolboxST windows.
930 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
12.6 Upload Controller Configuration
The ToolboxST application can retrieve existing configuration information from a component using the upload wizard. When
a configuration is uploaded, it is stored as a new component in the currently open system. The uploaded configuration allows
you to compare components and retrieve existing code.
➢ To replace an I/O module: from the Component Editor Device menu, select Upload. When the welcome page
displays, click Next.
Note Upon shipment from the factory, a controller that supports EFA does not include the software to support
communication from the PHY PRES button to the EFA. To enable this, the user needs to download to the controller at least
once (using ToolboxST).
In a TMR or dual
configuration,
select from the
drop-down list the
desired
redundancy
component from
which to retrieve
diagnostic
messages.
Displays
message:
• Timestamps
• Fault codes
• Status
(0=inactive
• 1=active)
• Human-
readable
descriptions
934 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
12.8.3 I/O Diagnostics
The I/O Diagnostics View displays diagnostic messages for a component’s I/O module. Retrieve these messages to diagnose
problems with hardware I/O.
➢ To display I/O diagnostics: from the component View menu, select Diagnostics and I/O Diagnostics.
Note For more information, refer to the section I/O Diagnostic Viewer.
936 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
13 Mark VIeS Black Channel Safety
Communication
Black Channel is a safety communications approach in which the new safety functionality is built over existing protocol
without impact to existing safety applications. The Black Channel feature provides the transfer of Safety control data between
two Mark VIeS Safety control devices without using the standard UDH network, providing a safer, less congested network. A
matching pair of transmitter and receiver blocks, BLACK_TX and BLACK_RX, are configured for the two Mark VIeS Safety
control devices in the application. The data is passed through Ethernet (similar to UDH EGD), and the BLACK_TX and
BLACK_RX blocks run a data integrity check on each respective side of the Black Channel. For more information on these
blocks, refer to the Mark VIeS Safety Control Block Library (GEI-100691), the chapters Black Channel Transmitter (BLACK_
TX) , Black Channel Receiver (BLACK_RX), and Black Channel Example.
Mark VIeS Black Channel Safety Communication GEH-6703P User Guide 937
Public Information
Notes
938 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
14 Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix
14.1 Overview
The Cause and Effect Matrix can be used to program the Mark VIeS Safety control system to perform tasks and operations as
needed using a Cause triggers Effect algorithm. The configuration is represented as follows:
• Causes that trigger an Effect are located in the rows on the left side of the Cause and Effect Matrix; the control system
detects these issues.
• Effects of the Causes are located in the column rows; these are the result if even one of the undesirable Causes occurs).
• The Intersection between a Cause and Effect indicates which Causes are tied to which Effects; an X indicates the Effect
is Active and a red X indicates the Effect is triggered.
Note The Virtual Mark VIeS controller also supports the Cause and Effect Matrix.
A Cause and Effect Matrix can support up to 32 Causes and 32 Effects. There is no limit to the number of Cause and Effect
Matrices a user can add to the application code.
Multiple Causes can be associated with an Effect and multiple Effects can be associated with a Cause (many-to-many
relationship). The Causes that correspond to an Effect are OR-ed to get the value of the Effect. This means that even if one
Cause for an Effect is True the Effect is active and triggered, which is indicated by a red X at the Intersection of the Cause
row and the Effect column. Any one Cause can result in the Effect if they intersect and are active. For example, if a user has
configured an Effect to shut off a pump, there could be six different Causes that result in this one Effect.
The ToolboxST application is used to configure the Cause and Effect Matrix and download the configured application to a
Mark VIeS controller or a Mark VIeS Virtual Controller. Each Cause can have up to six inputs (connected variables) and the
Cause is the result of logical operations configured for those six variables within the Cause row. Users can configure the
number of Cause inputs that trigger the Effect.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 939
Public Information
The Cause and Effect Matrix features include:
• Causes
• Effects
• Intersection of Causes and Effects
• Tool Bar operations
• Variables and Pin connections
• Time Delay
• Bypass
• Cause set-point and hysteresis for Analog variables
• Latching
Note To display block help in ToolboxST, right-click the block and select Block Help or select the ToolboxST Info tab.
• Must have a system .tcw file with a Mark VIeS or Virtual Mark VIeS controller installed
• At least one program must be available to add the Special Task Cause and Effect
940 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
2. Enter a valid name for the task and click OK.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add multiple Cause and Effect tasks within the same program. Each task contains one Cause and
Effect Matrix, with one Cause and one Effect.
Note Users can also add also multiple programs and add Cause and Effect tasks to each program.
4. From the Tree View, select the task to display the Cause and Effect Matrix in the Summary View.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 941
Public Information
Cause and Effect Matrix
Note By default, when a Cause and Effect Matrix is added, the Intersection of the Cause and Effect is active (indicated by an
X). Refer to the section Intersection of Causes and Effects for further details.
942 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
14.3 Block Columns
Causes are displayed in the block rows and Effects are displayed on the columns. The Intersection of the rows and column
identifies the association between Causes and the Effects. Cause Columns and Effect rows can be hidden or unhidden as
needed.
Cause and Effect Matrix Columns
Column Description
Connected variables that, when set to True, results in the Cause(s) that triggers
Inputs
the associated active Effect(s)
Operation Operator type (AND, OR, or VOTED) used for all inputs of a Cause
Amount of time in milliseconds that a Cause is configured to wait before the
Delay Values (ms)
Cause output transitions from False to True when an input delay is enabled
Causes When Bypass is enabled and a Bypass limit is set, the bypassed Cause is not
Bypass Values
used to trigger the associated Effect(s)
Latch Values Unlatches the Cause and allows reset of the Effect
Output Cause(s) that result from the configured inputs
Description Description of the configured Causes
No. Cause and Effect number
Output Result of the configured output driven by the configured Cause(s)
Latch Values Unlatches the Effect and allows reset of the Effect
Amount of time in milliseconds that the Effect is configured to wait before the
Effects Delay Values (ms)
Effect output transitions from False to True when an output delay is enabled
Description Description of the configured Effects
No. Cause and Effect number
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 943
Public Information
14.4 Property Editor
The following table lists the Cause and Effect Matrix properties displayed in the Property Editor.
944 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To display the block description in the Summary View
OR
From the Property Editor, select the
Show Description drop-down menu
and select True.
The description is displayed in the upper left corner of the block, beneath the block name.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 945
Public Information
➢ To hide the block description from the Summary View
OR
From the Property Editor, select the
Show Description drop-down menu
and select False.
946 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
14.5 Intersection of Cause and Effects
The Intersection between a Cause and Effect row indicates an association between those Causes and the Effect. Where the
Intersection meets identifies which Causes are tied to which Effect. Any one Cause can result in (trigger) the Effect if they
intersect and are active (X). If any one Cause for an Effect is True, the Effect is triggered. When the Intersection is triggered it
is indicated by a red X. If an Intersection is not active, when the Cause(s) occurs the Effect will not be triggered.
Note By default, when a Cause and Effect Matrix is added the Intersection is active.
➢ To display the Intersection association details between Cause and Effect: select the Intersection to highlight
it and view the association details in the Property Editor.
The Property Editor displays the Cause number, Effect number, if the intersection is active or inactive, and the intersection
number.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 947
Public Information
➢ To activate or deactivate an Intersection: select the intersection to highlight it and select the box to activate (X) or
deactivate (no X) the Intersection.
Ac No
ti v
e t Ac
tiv
e
Tr
ig ge
re
d
948 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
14.6 Tool Bar Operations
The Cause and Effect Matrix provides a Tool Bar in the upper right of the Summary View.
• Add Cause
• Add Effect
• Delete Cause
• Delete Effect
• Add Cause Input Group
• Remove Cause Input Group
• Hide a Column
• Unhide All Columns
• Zoom In
• Zoom Out
• Print Cause and Effect Matrix
➢ To add a Cause: from the Cause and Effect Matrix tool bar, click the Add Cause icon.
One Cause is added to the block, with the corresponding variables for the newly added Cause and Intersection. Select the
Variables tree item for the block to view the variables.
Note The total number of Causes for one Cause and Effect Matrix cannot exceed 32.
➢ To add an Effect: from the Cause and Effect Matrix tool bar, click the Add Effect icon.
Note The total number of Effects for one Cause and Effect Matrix cannot exceed 32.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 949
Public Information
➢ To delete a Cause: from the Cause and Effect Matrix tool bar, click the Delete Cause icon.
The deleted Cause, the intersections in the same row as that Cause, and any assigned variables are removed from the block.
The Causes in the row below the deleted Cause are renamed and the pin names (if variable is unassigned) for that row are
updated.
➢ To delete an Effect: from the Cause and Effect Matrix tool bar, click the Delete Effect icon.
2. From the Cause and Effect Matrix tool bar, click the Add Cause Input Group icon.
950 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Cause Input Group Added
Note Up to six inputs can be added. After adding six inputs, the Add Cause Input Group icon is disabled.
The input is removed from the Inputs cell in the row of the selected Cause.
Note The Remove Cause Input Group icon is disabled if only one cause input is present.
Column Selected
2. From the Cause and Effect Matrix tool bar, click the Hide Selected Column icon.
952 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To unhide all hidden Cause columns or Effect rows
1. Place your cursor anywhere in the Cause and Effect Matrix.
2. From the Cause and Effect Matrix tool bar, click the Unhide All icon.
➢ To zoom in on the Cause and Effect Matrix: from the Cause and Effect Matrix tool bar, click the Zoom In icon.
➢ To zoom out on the Cause and Effect Matrix: from the Cause and Effect Matrix tool bar, click the Zoom Out
icon.
Note Make sure you have a printer connected to your machine. Your local printer is used to print the Cause and Effect
Matrix.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 953
Public Information
14.7 Configuration
In the basic configuration of a Cause and Effect Matrix, each Cause can have up to six configured inputs (connected
variables) that are displayed individually within the Cause row, and each Effect supports only one output (connected
variables). The Summary View displays the live values of the Cause inputs, the Cause output (True/False), the Effect outputs,
the state of Effect outputs (True/False) and the intersections (active/triggered/inactive). Connected variables can be:
Note For block help in ToolboxST, right-click the block and select Block Help or refer to the Mark VIeS Safety Controller
(SIL) Block Library (GEI-100691) for additional block information and block pin variables.
Note _OUTPUT and _LATCHED variables for each Cause and Effect and _INTERSECTION_VALUE for each Intersection
are placed on the EGD default page.
954 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To view Cause and Effect variables
From the Tree View, select Variables for a Cause and Effect block to display all variables
for that block in the Summary View.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 955
Public Information
Refer to the ToolboxST for a complete list of block variables.
956 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To display a pin with a connected variable: Double-click one of the block pins in the Cause row or Effect column
with a variable attached to it.
The Property Editor displays the selected Cause row/Effect column number, description of the selected Cause/Effect,
connected variable name, and pin name.
Note If the user attaches a Global Analog variable to a Cause input, the corresponding Cause input’s Set Point and Compare
Function variables will be displayed just below the input.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 957
Public Information
➢ To edit block pin connections and add/remove Cause inputs from pin connections
1. Place your cursor in a Cause row, Effect column, or Intersection and double click,
or right-click the Cause/Effect/Intersection and select Edit Pins from the menu.
The Edit Block Pin Connections — [pin] dialog box displays the pins for the selected Cause/Effect/Intersection.
Connected Variables
2. Enter or modify the Description field for the selected Cause/Effect/Intersection.
958 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Intersection Pin Connections
3. For a Cause, set the Inputs Count value (1-6) (enabled for Causes only) to add or remove inputs.
The Cause input, set-points, and hysteresis variables are added or removed as per the inputs count.
Note For an Effect and Intersection the Inputs Count field is disabled.
Each time a pin value is changed, perform a Build and Download the application code to display the expected results.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 959
Public Information
14.7.2 Time Delay
A Time Delay can be configured to determine how long the Cause and Effect Matrix will wait in milliseconds (ms) to
transition the Cause output from False to True or True to False. It is used to filter spikes in the inputs (input goes from True to
False to True to False); the logic waits for the set amount of delay time (in ms) before the Effect is triggered. Specifically,
Causes and Effects support an ON time delay and an OFF time delay before an Effect is triggered.
The Time Delay variables are:
• Pickup Delay: occurs when the Cause or Effect transitions from False to True
− CAUSE#_PU_DELAY
− EFFECT#_PU_DELAY
• Drop Out Delay: occurs when the Cause or Effect transitions from True to False
− CAUSE#_DO_DELAY
− EFFECT#_DO_DELAY
Note Each time an Immediate Value is changed, you must perform a Build and Download the application code to see the
expected results.
960 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To change the Immediate Value of a pin
1. Double-click the pin to display the Connect Pin dialog box.
2. Select Immediate Value.
3. Enter the value (in milliseconds) and click OK.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 961
Public Information
➢ To set an input value
1. Place the cursor in the input row and double-click to display the Send Value dialog box.
2. Enter a value in the Next Value Next field and click Send & Close, then click Close.
962 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
14.7.3 Bypass
Causes support a Bypass function, with a time limit specifying the maximum time (in milliseconds) for which the Cause can
be bypassed. The Cause can be bypassed when it is in Active or Triggered state. When a Bypass is enabled, the bypassed
Cause is not used to determine the output of the associated Effect(s).The user specifies the time limit until the Effect is
triggered (trip). This feature is primarily used for instrumentation maintenance. For example, if you are calibrating a pressure
transmitter you don’t want a trip to stop a running plant so the Cause can be bypassed during maintenance and then reset
when maintenance is completed.
Note If the Bypass Limit value is zero, the bypass is not active.
Note When a Bypass is active, the Intersection displays as active and triggered (red X) but the Effect will remain False.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 963
Public Information
➢ To enable a bypass value
1. Double-click the CAUSE#_ BYPASS_ENABLE pin to display the Send Value dialog box.
2. Select True or False for the value and click Send & Close, then click Close.
964 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
14.7.4 Set-point and Hysteresis
Hysteresis is a switch and reset function. In control systems, hysteresis can be used to filter signals so that the output reacts
less rapidly than it otherwise would because it considers recent history. For example, a thermostat controlling a heater may
switch the heater on when the temperature drops below A, and not turn it off until the temperature rises above B. (For
instance, to maintain a temperature of 20 °C, set the thermostat to turn the heater on when the temperature drops below 18 °C
and off when the temperature exceeds 22 °C.) Similarly, a pressure switch can be designed to exhibit hysteresis with pressure
set-points substituted for temperature thresholds.
Analog inputs have a set-point to be compared against so that a Boolean condition is generated. This condition supports
hysteresis and is activated (True) when the input is greater than or less than the set-point (unsafe). The comparison returns to
normal (False) when the input is less than the set-point. In ToolboxST, users configure the Cause input compare function
variable (CAUSE#_COMPARE_FUNC#) as Greater Than (GT) or Less Than (LT) with a set-point, which drives the Cause
output True or False.
The formula can be represented as follows:
Boolean input = If True, then True. If False, then False.
Analog input = Hysteresis is activated when input is ≥ set-point, and returns to normal when input is < the set-point
— hysteresis.
The operations that can be applied to Cause inputs are AND, OR, or VOTED. If the inputs are Analog, the resulting Boolean
condition after set-point and hysteresis comparisons is used for this operation. There can only be one operator type used for
all of the Cause inputs. The health of the input is considered for Cause output calculation. An unhealthy input is a vote to trip
(true). The operator type drives the health of the input as follows:
• If the operator is OR, the Cause output becomes True if any Cause input is unhealthy.
• If the operator is AND, the Cause output becomes True if all inputs are healthy.
• If the operator is VOTED, the Cause output becomes True if the number of unhealthy inputs is greater than or equal to
the configured input count number for the VOTED option ( (majority, such as 2-out-of-3 ratio), plus the number of
healthy inputs that are true. The user selects the Input Count (1-6) to set how many inputs have to be unsafe before the
Effect is triggered (meaning how many variables are True before it is tripped). The user configures the Initial Value for
the inputs, which is the number of input counts the user wants to trigger the Effect (trip).
Note The number of inputs (Input Count) has to be configured to use the VOTED operation.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 965
Public Information
➢ To configure a set-point for hysteresis comparison
1. Associate the variable CAUSE#_INPUT1 with a Global Analog variable to give a safe signal for use in determining if a
trip condition exists. For this example, an Analog variable is selected, which prompts the user to add a set-point and a
compare function (GT or LT).
2. Set a compare high and a compare low by setting the CAUSE#_COMPARE_FUNC# variable Immediate Value.
3. For a Cause input, set a high and low value for hysteresis by selecting the controller value for the CAUSE#_
HYSTERESIS# variable as LT or GT.
966 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
CAUSE#_COMPARE_FUNC# Variable Controller Value Set to GT
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 967
Public Information
Cause Input Value Set Greater Than Set-point Value
6. Select the Variables Tree View item, confirm that the Cause input Type is INT.
968 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
7. Double-click the CAUSE#_OPERATOR pin and set the Operator Type as AND, OR, or VOTED.
8. If the Operator type VOTED is selected, change the CAUSE#_VOTED_INPUT_COUNT value to a number less than or
equal to the number of Cause inputs you have for this Cause. For example, if you have two inputs, CAUSE1_INPUT1
and CAUSE1_INPUT2, set CAUSE1_VOTED_INPUT_COUNT to 1 or 2.
9. Perform a Build and Download the application code to view the expected results. The Cause output value transitions
from True to False or False to True based on the inputs value (GT/LT) in relation to the set-point for each input.
For example, if the Cause input1 is greater than its set-point value, and Cause input2 is greater than its set-point value, the
Operator Type is AND, and the compare function is GT, then the Cause output value is True. For another example, if an
Analog Cause input with a VOTED operator has a 2–out–of–3 (majority) high or low comparison with an associated input,
VARHEALTH (bad health is a vote to trip), the Cause output is True.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 969
Public Information
14.7.5 Latching
Causes and Effects support latching. The user enables latching on a per Cause or Effect basis. The Cause or Effect allows
resetting the latch using a variable in the application logic. The user can latch the Cause, the Effect, or both. Once an Effect is
triggered, the user has to reset the latch, which unlatches the Cause and allows the Effect to reset. If a Cause or Effect is
latched, it will not rest until the user unlatches it. The user must set the variable LATCH_RESET to True to reset the Latch and
the output will return to False. To enable a Latch for an input, the variable CAUSE#_LATCH_ENABLE must be set to True
first. To disable the Latch, first set CAUSE#_LATCH_ENABLE to False.
Do not latch an Effect if you have latched the Cause(s) for that Effect.
Attention
➢ To configure a Latch
1. Set LATCH_ENABLE to True.
2. Set LATCH_RESET to Variable.
Latched Effect
970 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
14.7.6 Add to Trender or Watch Window
Cause and Effect Matrix and individual Causes, Effects, Intersections, and pins can be added to Trender and Watch Window.
Mark VIeS Cause and Effect Matrix GEH-6703P User Guide 971
Public Information
Notes
972 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15 WorkstationST Component Editor
The WorkstationST Component Editor provides a comprehensive user interface for configuring WorkstationST features. The
elements of the configuration are grouped by specific function tabs that are enabled from the Component Editor Tree View.
Areas of the editor provide various displays, depending on the currently selected item.
➢ To create a component: from the System Editor Tree View, right-click the system name and select Insert New
and WorkstationST.
Tree View
lists all
major items
in the
component.
The list
changes
when a
different tab
is selected
Property
Editor
allows you
to edit the
item
selected in
the Tree
View
Component
InfoView
displays
specific
feedback
information
about the
currently
selected tab
➢ To edit the component: select an item in the Tree View. The configuration information for that item displays in the
Summary View and Property Editor.
➢ To edit a property in the Property Editor: select an item by clicking its value field.
Click the ellipsis button to change the value from a dialog box.
Click the drop-down list button to change the value from a drop-down list.
Note If no button displays, edit the value directly in the corresponding text box on the right side of the Property Editor.
976 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.6 Component InfoView
The Component InfoView contains multiple tabs that provide controller status information.
Log Tip � If there is a build problem, the error is listed on the Log tab. Double-click the error. The input focus goes
to the location in the component configuration where the error occurred.
Status Displays operating state and equality information about the component
Keeps a navigation history for each user session and allows you to return to different places in the
History editor. Each time an item is selected in the Tree View or Summary View, the name of that item is added
to the top of this list.
Finds all uses of a variable within a Library Container
The write icon at the beginning of some lines indicates that the variable is being written at that location.
Where Used
Tip � From the Where Used tab, double-click the desired item. The input focus goes to the view represented by
that line and the item is selected.
Each time a Build is performed, a message displays that allows you to view the Change log.
When Errors or Warnings are present, the Log tab notifies the user by displaying the current count, as well as a description.
Click each button to hide the corresponding item. For example, click Warning to hide the warnings listed in the Log tab;
Click Warnings again to display the warnings in the Log tab.
978 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.6.2 Status Tab
The Status tab provides the controller operating state and equality status. When you are online with the controller, the color
displayed on the Status tab indicates the overall state of the controller. Refer to the section Controller Status for further
details.
Note Some Data Grids, especially those without an Append Row, may not support all features described in this chapter.
Data Grids are used to view or edit many of the configuration properties available in ToolboxST component editors. While
each Data Grid contains different columns and properties, several features are common to all Data Grids, including column
resizing, clipboard operations, and multi-row editing.
Quickly set a property to the Left-click the row header for the first row to be edited. Then, while pressing the CTRL key,
same value for multiple rows left-click added row headers. After selecting all desired rows, use the Property Editor to
change properties for all selected rows. (Some properties are omitted when a group of rows is
selected, and properties with conflicting values will display no value in the property editor.)
To... Do this:
Resize a column Drag the vertical bar on the right of the column header to a new location.
Quickly remove a single column Right-click the column header and select Hide Column.
Move a column to a different location Drag the column header to a new location.
Sort by a column Click a column header. The column sorts in ascending order. To sort in descending
order, click the column header again.
Reset columns to the original Right-click any column header and select Default Column Organization.
configuration
Add or remove columns Right-click any column header and select Organize Columns to display the
Organize Columns dialog box.
Select a
column name
and use the up
arrow to move
it to the left-
most side of
the Data Grid
980 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.7.3 Copy and Move Data
To… Do this:
Copy and paste a single row Right-click the header for the source row and select Copy Selected/Current Rows to
place the source row on the clipboard. Then, right-click the header for the append row
in the destination grid and select Paste Row(s) to insert the row into its new
location.
Copy and paste multiple rows Left-click the row header for the first source row. Then, while pressing the CTRL key,
left-click added row headers. After selecting all desired rows, continue to hold down the
CTRL key and right-click any selected header. From the shortcut menu, select Copy
Selected/Current Rows to place the rows on the clipboard. Then, right-click the header
for the append row in the destination grid and select Paste Row(s) to insert the
rows into their new location.
Copy and paste a range of two or Click the top left cell of the desired range and drag to the bottom right cell. Right-click the
more cells selected region and select Copy Selected/Current Rows to place the cells on the
clipboard. Then, click the top left cell of the destination range and drag to select the
same number of columns and rows that were copied to the clipboard. Right-click inside
the destination region and select Paste Row(s).
Move rows between data grids Arrange windows on screen so both the source and destination grid are visible. (An
entry in a Tree View is acceptable as a destination). Left click the row header for the first
row. Then, while pressing CTRL, click any added row headers to be moved. Release the
CTRL key and drag a row header to the new data grid.
Add a variable to a block diagram, Arrange windows on screen so both the source grid and a destination block diagram,
Trender window or Watch Window Trender window or watch window are visible. Then, drag the row header for the variable
from a data grid to the destination window.
Tip � You can copy and paste rows between different data grids if the columns match by following the above procedures and
navigating to a different data grid before pasting the data.
Tip � Cells in a data grid can also be copied to and pasted from Microsoft Excel. The copied data is stored in .csv format,
which contains no information about column names. To make sure pasted data is placed into the proper columns, do not
change column ordering and always select the exact destination range in the ToolboxST configuration before pasting data
from Excel.
Access Rights
Access Rights Description
Allows you to set Modify Data and Modify Design access rights to pre-defined user roles. Once roles
Access Roles
have been assigned to a protected object, only users with those roles can access the object.
Allows you to make changes to data values associated with an object without changing how it works.
Modify Data For example, it protects the initial value of a variable defined in a controller. The purpose of this right is
generally to keep unauthorized persons from making unsafe changes to settings.
Allows you to change the way a protected object works. For example, this protects block creation and
Modify Design editing of connections within a library block diagram. The purpose of this right is to limit the ability to
change how the system works to authorized persons.
982 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.8.1 Passwords
Whenever you attempt to perform an operation on a protected object, the Enter Password dialog box displays.
Note Passwords are case-sensitive – secret and Secret are not considered to be the same password.
Tip � If you have performed an operation in the ToolboxST application that requires entering a password, it is
recommended to close the protected component when you are done so that an unauthorized user does not gain inappropriate
access.
➢ To clear all passwords and protect the component: from the Device menu, select Restore Password
Protection.
Protection Properties
Property Description
Access Roles Allows you to set modifying data and design rights to previously defined user roles
Allows you to modify data values and forcing of variables
984 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.8.4 Protected Objects
Specific actions governed by each access right depend on the specific component type.
Note For the procedure to enter the CA Server Thumb Print property, refer to the section CA Server Thumb Print.
The Security Servers properties must be filled out for a system to operate in Secure mode. If these properties are filled out, the
system is secure. If these properties are blank, the system is open (does not support Secure mode).
The OPC Server only requires a certificate if the system is Secure and the 3rd party product ExperTune is used. The certificate
must be assigned to the LocalMachine location, My substore, and the certificate name must be GeCssOpcServer.
The Device Manager Gateway only requires a certificate if the system is Secure. The certificate must be assigned to the
LocalMachine location, My substore, and the certificate name must be GeCssDeviceManagerGateway.
Note Certificates must be created for each feature and added to the LocalMachine location, My substore, and the certificates
must be named as indicated in this section for each computer with these features enabled.
986 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The following steps provide an overview of the process to enable these features for proper operation:
1. Fill out the ToolboxST system properties section Security Servers to define the parameters. (This is a requirement to place
the controllers in Secure mode.)
2. Perform a Build and Download each controller that supports secure connections.
3. Verify that all HMI computers running WorkstationST software to communicate with controllers in Secure mode are in
the Domain.
4. Create and assign a certificate for all devices and computers in the system.
5. Create a certificate for the OPC DA Server only if controller values may be changed over an SDI connection (ExperTune
product is used) in a Secure system.
Note The OPC DA Server only requires a certificate if it is commanded to alter variables that are only accessible using
SDI messages, such as when used with the ExperTune product. This is rare, as most systems limit writes to variables that
are exposed on EGD pages, which does not require a certificate.
6. Create a certificate for the Device Manager Gateway for each workstation with this feature enabled only in Secure
systems.
988 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.10 WorkstationST Status Monitor
The WorkstationST Status Monitor provides status and control of the WorkstationST features on the local computer. The
Status Monitor is included in the Status tab in the Component Info View of the configured WorkstationST component.
The WorkstationST Status Monitor is configured to start when you log on to Windows, and then runs as a tray icon .
When a error occurs with the WorkstationST Service (or any configured feature), an error icon displays .
➢ To monitor and configure WorkstationST features: from the toolbar, click Launch Toolbox.
➢ To start or stop WorkstationST features: from the toolbar, click Start or Stop. Or right-click the feature, then
select Start or Stop from the shortcut menu. Start and stop requests are sent to the WorkstationST Service.
A service control manager is used to start the WorkstationST Service.
Note When the WorkstationST Service starts, it attempts to start all configured features, and to keep the features running. If
a feature is stopped from the Status Monitor, WorkstationST Service will not attempt to restart it. If the feature is started again
from the Status Monitor (or WorkstationST Service is restarted), the feature starts again.
Information displays for each configured feature. The WorkstationST Service runs a System Data Interface (SDI) server. The
Status Monitor uses an SDI client to obtain the information displayed. Information is not available when the WorkstationST
Service is not running.
990 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.10.1.1 View Scheduled Tasks
All tasks scheduled in the WorkstationST component must be confirmed by an administrator to remain scheduled.
992 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.10.1.3 Alarm Server Status
➢ To display alarm server status
Right-click
Alarm Server
and select
View Alarm
Server Status.
994 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Select the Client Connections tab to
display alarm / event client information.
996 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.10.2 View Configured Feature Certificates
➢ To view certificates
1. Launch the WorkstationST Status Monitor from the tray icon.
2. Open the WorkstationST Certificate Manager.
From the WorkstationST Certificate Manager window, select the Feature Certificates
tab to display the data grid of configured certificates.
Note The Feature Certificate window is Read-only and cannot be used to import or export certificates.
Note If the Feature Certificates list is empty, the GeCssOpcServer and Device Manager Gateway feature’s certificates have
not been configured.
998 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.11 WorkstationST Component Menus
Menu Command Use to
Save Save changes to the current system
Print Generate a paper copy of the entire component configuration
Import Import WindSCADA OPC data
File
Export Mark VIe variables so they can be used in PI Historian for Legacy Toolbox (Toolbox
Export
Classic) or WindSCADA OPC data
Close End the component editing session and return to the System Editor
Undo Remove the item currently selected in the Tree View
Redo Add a new component to the current system
Cut Cut the selected item in the Tree View
Edit Copy Copy the selected item in the Tree View
Paste Paste the copied item in the Tree View into the Summary View
Delete Delete the item selected in the Tree View
Find Display the Component Editor for the item currently selected in the Tree View
Go Back Return to the view that immediately preceded the current view in the history
Go Forward Return to the view that immediately follows the current view in the history
Global Variables Display a list of global variables
Display a list of Trenders for this component (refer to Trender Instruction Guide,
Trenders
GEI-100795)
Watch Windows Display a list of Watch Windows for this component (refer to the section Watch Window)
Generate any of the following reports:
Alarm generates a list of alarm variables
Event generates a list of all variables marked as Events
GE Rationalization provides a report of alarms using the GE Rationalization column
Reports
View definitions
WorkstationST Data and Alarm Consumption provides a report of live data
consumption and alarm consumption viewed by WorkstationST, consumed devices, or as
text
Test OPC DA Client Open an OPC client window that connects to any OPC DA Server to verify communication
Test OPC AE Client Open the Test OPC AE Client window
Test OPC UA Client Open the Test OPC UA Client window
WorkstationST Open the Alarm Viewer (this only displays if an Alarm Viewer was installed)
Alarm Viewer
Export Alarms for Compare alarm criteria in plant alarm philosophy
Rationalization
Online Connect to or disconnect from a controller
Build Convert the current configuration into binary files that can be downloaded to a controller
Download Download the application configuration
Retrieve configuration information from the controller to create a new controller
Device Upload
component in the system
Put Device to SDB Store the component configuration to a System Database (SDB) (if available)
Restore Password Clear all passwords and protect the component
Protection
1000 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.12 General Tab
The General tab allows you to configure properties and attributes of a WorkstationST component. Features unique to the
WorkstationST application include the OPC DA Server, Recorder, Human-machine Interface (HMI) Configuration, and
Alarm Server. The Ethernet network and Network Time Protocol (NTP) can also be configured.
➢ To configure a WorkstationST component: open the Component Editor and select the General tab.
1002 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.12.1 Consumed Devices
When Consumed Devices is selected in the Tree View, the WorkstationST configuration receives information from the
devices listed in the Summary View. They can also be edited in the Summary View by toggling the Referenced column value
or by selecting Devices in the Property Editor.
1004 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.12.3 Time Card
If a time card is used by this WorkstationST component, information about the time card must be configured with NTP.
Time Card
allows you to
select the type
of time card
installed in the
WorkstationST
computer
Time Card
NTP Properties
Property Description
Overrides the system NTP settings, and uses local WorkstationST component settings
Configuration Manual Override
only
Selects the supported NTP configuration option to start on the WorkstationST
computer:
• Time Client
Configuration Option
• Primary Time Master
• Secondary Time Master
• Disabled
Disable NTP Broadcasts Disables or enables NTP broadcasts
Enable or disable NTP Server debug logging to file. This setting should only be enabled
NTP Server debug log enable during troubleshooting an NTP Server issue, then disabled as soon as debugging is
complete.
Specifies if WorkstationST will synchronize to a site time source and user determines
which option is used:
Site Time Reference Option • Broadcast
• Unicast
• None
1006 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
NTP Properties (continued)
Property Description
When the Site Time Reference Option property is set to Unicast, this property displays
Site Time Reference #1 (Optional) the IP address or name of the customer NTP computer or Network Time Server and is
used to synchronize the system to a site time source.
When the Site Time Reference Option property is set to Unicast, this property displays
Site Time Reference # 2 (Optional) the IP address or name of the customer NTP computer or Network Time Server and is
used to synchronize the system to a site time source.
NTP Operating Mode Mode (Unicast, Broadcast, or Disabled) to be implemented on the target
Name of the WorkstationST computer that this WorkstationST computer will use as a
Primary Time Reference
time reference
Name of the WorkstationST computer that this WorkstationST computer will use as a
Secondary Time Reference
secondary time reference
An optional network name used as a preferred network when locating the address of
Primary Time Reference Preferred the Primary Time Source. This setting is used by WorkstationST components to
Network determine the address to use in the ntp.ini file to reach the Primary Time Source. The
settings can be useful to select one network when multiple networks are available.
An optional network name used as a preferred network when locating the address of
Secondary Time Reference the Secondary Time Source. This setting is used by WorkstationST components to
Preferred Network determine the address to use in the ntp.ini file to reach the Secondary Time Source.
The setting can be useful to select one network when multiple networks are available.
➢ To schedule a task
From the
Recurrence
Pattern
options,
specify how
the task
should run.
If No Start
Time is
selected, the
Recurrence
Pattern
selections
are used.
If desired,
specify an
end time
(optional)
Scheduled Tasks
1008 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Scheduled Task Authentication
When a Scheduled Task is configured or edited in the WorkstationST application, and a Build and Download is performed,
the WorkstationST Service displays an Error until the new or edited task is authenticated.
Right-click WorkstationST Service and select View WorkstationST Scheduled Tasks Information.
Attention
Select the checkbox to authorize the configured scheduled task to run.
The Status for the authorized Scheduled Task confirms the authorization with an displays as OK.
1010 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.12.6 Network Adapters
The network adapters display as items in the General tab Tree View. The WorkstationST configuration determines the number
of adapters. Most applications have two network adapters. One connects to the UDH; the other connects to the PDH.
The following table describes the properties displayed in the Property Editor when a Network Adapter item is selected in the
Tree View.
Network Adapters Properties
Property Description
Adapter Settings
Enabled If set to False, disables the selected network adapter. Set to True to enable the network adapter.
Host Name Internet Protocol (IP) host name for the selected network adapter
IP Address Internet Protocol address for the selected network adapter
Wire Speed Speed of the network to which the selected adapter connects
Network Settings
Sets the network connected to the selected adapter (available networks are determined in the System
Network
Editor)
Controls the significant portions of the IP address
Subnet Mask This property is usually unavailable; for I/O networks, the subnet mask is always a fixed value, and for
other networks defined at the system level, the subnet mask is configured in the System Editor.
Note A Remote Dry Low NO x (DLN) tuning contract provides for periodic tuning for ambient conditions, fuel conditions,
and normal component wear.
When the Features items is selected from the General tab and the AM Gateway feature is set to True, the AM Gateway Config
Path property displays in the Property Editor. This property provides the full path to the main configuration file that defines
items such as which turbine units are enabled for remote tuning.
1012 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.14 On Site Monitor
The On Site Monitor (OSM) feature supports the Universal OnSite Monitor (UOSM). The UOSM is a standalone computer
that serves as a gateway to the customer’s system data, which is used by the GE Maintenance and Diagnostic (M&D) group to
detect and diagnose system problems.
The OSM collects system configuration data from the WorkstationST Config Reader and writes data files for the UPC
(Universal Product Code), which communicates with the M&D group. The OSM provides real time data using the
WorkstationST OPC DA Server.
When the General tab is selected, the On Site Monitor displays as a feature in the Summary View.
➢ To enable OSM
1. From the WorkstationST General tab Tree View, select Features.
2. From the drop-down list, select True to enable the On Site Monitor. The OSM Interface tab displays.
Note Changes to the network switch connections will not be available for computers in a system running WorkstationST
V04.06 and earlier until they are upgraded.
With the release of ControlST V04.07, the ToolboxST application allows you to edit switch port connections using the
Network Switch Component Editor, rather than editing each component’s network adaptor. The component network adapter
information is imported into each switch’s configuration when the switch is first edited in V04.07. While it will no longer be
possible to view or edit the network adapter switch connections from each component editor, connections configured before
the upgrade will remain available for any WorkstationST computer that has not been upgraded. All upgraded WorkstationST
computers will use the new switch-centric information.
1014 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To configure Network Monitor
1. From the General tab Tree View, select Features.
2. From the Summary View, set Network Monitor to True.
3. Click the Network Monitor tab.
4. Select the alarms or events to be generated.
The data acquisition rate parameters allow the level of SNMP network traffic to be adjusted based on network bandwidth
rather than display update rate needs. The switch data request rate is separate from the device SNMP data because the amount
of SNMP data exchanged with the switches is very large compared to the data retrieved from the devices. Specifying a fast
device scan rate allows for fast detection of a device going online or offline, while fast switch data rates detect an unknown
device being added to the network or a device being moved to a different port. Knowing the device location is less important
than knowing whether the device is online. The network bandwidth necessary to retrieve the forwarding database from the
switches can be large in large systems, so separate parameters allows for tradeoffs to be made between bandwidth and the
speed of detection of abnormal conditions.
The system network drawing displays all physical networks, as well as network switches and devices, their physical locations,
and their interconnection. The host name and IP address of each device network connection on a per network basis, as well as
the switch and port where the physical connection is made is also provided. This information is entered for the network
switches and devices as they are added to a system.
When a new system is created, it automatically includes a UDH network. This is the default controller-level network to which
all controllers are connected. The Network Monitor only attempts to monitor devices configured as Ethernet, IP networks.
Additional networks are added as needed.
Network Status
Viewer displays
a hierarchy of
network, switch,
and devices
The Device View As Configured tab displays the devices in their configured locations, as well as deviations of the device
connections from their configured locations. This is used to find occurrences of a device connected to the wrong port that is
masking the location of an offline device, but configured to be connected to that port.
The Device View By Connection tab displays the actual location of each device’s switch and port.
1016 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.16 Alarm Tab
The Alarm tab is used to configure the WorkstationST Alarm Server, the Alarm Scanner option, external OPC AE servers, and
Alarm printing. The Alarm Server connects to all devices consumed by the workstation (the device that displays Yes in the
Referenced column when the Consumed Devices item is selected in the Tree View and enabled). The Alarm Server receives
alarm messages sent from these devices to provide live alarm viewing. The alarm messages can also be saved in log files.
The alarm Scanner feature scans variables from the OPC DA or OPC UA Servers running on the local workstation and
external devices being consumed by this WorkstationST. It then generates Alarms and Events based on the variable
configuration.
The external OPC AE Server selections provide the configuration necessary to consume Alarm and Events from these
external servers.
Note Refer to the WorkstationST Alarm Server Instruction Guide (GEI-100626) for additional information on the
WorkstationST Alarm Server.
3. From the Alarm tab Tree View, select the Alarm Server item to display the Alarm Server configuration properties.
1018 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Alarm Server Properties (continued)
The number of days of historical alarm data to maintain before deletion occurs. The
difference is between the time of the newest and the oldest alarm data file. All historical
Historical File Age
alarm data files exceeding the time difference specified are deleted. A value of 0
disables this feature.
The maximum size (MB) that the historical alarm data files are allowed to use. If the
Maximum Alarm Historical Disk total size of all historical alarm data files exceeds this value, the oldest alarm data files
Space Allowed will be deleted until the total bytes used is less than this value. A value of 0 disables this
feature.
The minimum free disk space threshold (MB) before a Low Disk Space diagnostic
Minimum Free Space alarm is generated by the Alarm Server. A value of 0 disables the detection and alarm
generation. The default is 10.
General
If set to True, an Acknowledged alarm in the Normal state is automatically reset. If the
Automatically Reset Acknowledged
Send Alarms To CIMPLICITY option is set to True, setting this option has no effect and
Alarms
results in always resetting an Acknowledged alarm in the Normal state.
If set to True, the Alarm Server maintains Event queues and manages Events the same
Emulate CIMPLICITY and SOE
as alarms. This option allows the WorkstationST Alarm Viewer to emulate the
behavior
CIMPLICITY Alarm View.
If set to True, controller and I/O pack diagnostics are reported and logged to the
Enable Controller Diagnostic Alarm
historical alarm log. If set to False, controller and I/O pack diagnostic information can
Support
only be retrieved using the ToolboxST application.
Historical
Historical Alarm Path The fully qualified path where the Alarm Server writes the historical alarm data files.
Historical WorkstationST Alarms If set to True, the Alarm Server writes the alarms to the historical alarm data file. If set to
Enabled False, no historical alarm data files are created. The default value is True.
If set to True, the Alarm Server performs alarm synchronization between primary and
Periodic Alarm Synchronization
secondary Alarm Servers every 15 minutes.
Legacy Alarm System Interface
Connect to Legacy Alarm System If set to True, the Alarm Server connects to the Legacy Alarm System.
The host name or IP address of the computer running the Legacy Alarm System. This
Legacy Alarm System Host Name
option is only available if the Connect To Legacy Alarm System option is set to True.
Network Monitor / Control System Health Interface
Connect To Network Monitor or Configures the Alarm Server to connect and receive alarms from the Control System
Control System Health Health or Network Monitor.
The host name or IP address of the WorkstationST computer that the Network Monitor
Network Monitor or Control System
or Control System Health feature is running. This option is only available if Connect to
Health Hostname
Network Monitor or Control System Health is not set to None.
Note Each OPC AE server must be installed and configured before you add the server to the list and get the published
categories and condition names.
Refer to the WorkstationST OPC AE Server Instruction Guide (GEI-100624) for additional information.
➢ To add an external OPC AE Server: from the Tree View, right-click the External OPC AE Server item, then
click Add. A selection dialog box displays installed and operational servers.
WS1
WS1.Softing.OPCToolboxDemo_ServerAE
When an OPC AE server is added and selected in the Tree View from the Alarm tab, the data grid displays the translation of
each event category and condition name published by the OPC AE Server.
To translate incoming alarms and events, condition states must be mapped for the selected OPC AE Server. Once the
WorkstationST configuration has been downloaded, all Alarm Server clients can display alarms and events from all
configured OPC AE Servers.
1020 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Additional Properties
Property Description
Connection Information
Enable Connection To If set to True, connects to the OPC AE Server, and consumes configured Alarms and Events.
Server If set to False, the configuration is preserved but ignored by the Alarm Server.
Host Name Host name used to connect to the OPC AE Server
Secondary Host
Host name used for connecting to the secondary OPC AE Server.
Name
Name of the OPC AE Server running on the specified host.
Server Name For redundant OPC AE Servers, the secondary server must be identical to the primary server, both in
name and configuration.
General
Time units used by the OPC AE Server. The Alarm Server uses this property to determine how to
OPC Server Time
process the time stamp from this server.
Units
The Alarm Server expects the time to be in Universal Time Coordinated (UTC).
User Credentials
A domain name or computer name for the specified user name. For computers running in a Windows
Domain Name domain, enter the domian name. For computers running in Windows workgroups, leave this blank and
create a local user account on both the AE client computer and the OPC AE server computer.
User Name User name (or a domain/username) for the External OPC AE Server, if required.
User Password Password for the optional user name
➢ To display alarm and event types: click the OPC AE Server tab. The alarm and event types display in the
Summary View.
Note The GeCssOpcAeServer is a WorkstationST runtime feature, and must be installed and running for this configuration
to work.
From the Tree View , select WorkstationST Variables to display the variables.
1022 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The Alarm Scanner configuration is found on the Alarms tab under the Alarm Scanner item.
Note Only variables from WorkstationST and External Device components that have been configured as an alarm or event
will be available for selection. Mark VI, EX2100 and LS2100 variables are not available to be scanned as they are already
part of the alarm system. Do not scan the controller component variables, since this causes redundant alarms to be generated.
Note The variable attributes cannot be modified from the Alarm Scanner variable list. The variable’s configuration displays,
but settings can only be changed from the component or feature where the variable is defined (typically the OPC DA Server
tab).
1024 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.16.3 Fault Code Scanner
The Fault Code Scanner is a feature of the Alarm Server that provides a mechanism for devices and third-party software to
generate alarms by driving WorkstationST variables though OPC. The Fault Code Scanner is configured to monitor specified
INT or DINT variables. The value of the variable represents a specific fault condition (fault code), and the enumeration
associated with the variable provides the meaning of the values. The Fault Code Scanner monitors the value of the variable
and generates a new alarm whenever the value changes. The alarm text displayed for the alarm is supplied by the Format Spec
enumeration associated with the variable.
Click OK .
4. From the Tree View, right-click Fault Code Scanner and select Add Variable.
5. From the Select a Variable dialog box, locate and select the WorkstationST variables to be scanned.
6. From the WorkstationST Component Editor toolbar, click Build, then click Download.
7. Click Go Online and force the variable to test the generation of the alarms as displayed in the following figures.
1026 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Normal
Fault Condition 1
Fault Condition 2
Fault Condition 3
Note If the variable value falls outside the range of the enumerated values, the alarm is still generated and the alarm
description indicates the reason that the alarm text lookup failed as displayed in the following figure.
Note Each OPC UA server must be installed and configured before being added to the list to receive a list of alarms.
1028 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Security Settings: the client can be configured to use a specific security profile using the Security Policy and Message
Security Mode drop-down menus, or the client can be made to use the most secure endpoint exposed by the server by
selecting the Use Best Security check box. To use no security and avoid exchanging application certificates, select a Security
Policy of None and a Message Security Mode of None (the server must support the None security profile).
Authentication Settings: the client can be configured to use an anonymous user or a user name and password.
The server
displays in the
Tree View
Server Properties
Property Description
If set to True, creates a connection to the OPC UA server and consumes configured Alarms
Enable Connection To Server and Events.
If set to False, the configuration is preserved but ignored by the Alarm Server.
Host Name Host name of the computer where the OPC UA server is running
Server URL URL of the OPC UA server running on the specified host
Endpoint Configuration - Security Mode used for a secure connection. If Use Best Available Security is set to True, this
Security Mode setting will be ignored.
Endpoint Configuration - Security Policy used for a secure connection. If Use Best Available Security is True, this setting
Security Policy will be ignored.
Endpoint Configuration - Use If set to True, the client will attempt to connect to the server’s most secure endpoint, otherwise
Best Available Security the security settings defined in the Endpoint Configuration will be used.
User Token Information – User Name when a server implements a user name and password authentication. If blank, the
User Name user will be anonymous.
User Token Information –
Password when a server implements a user name and password authentication policy.
User Password
When the server connection is selected in the Tree View, two tabs display in the data grid: Variable and Active Severity
Mapping. Additional property values can be added to the alarms from the Variables tab.
1030 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.16.5 Alarm Printing
The Alarm Printing feature configures the alarm types for printing, as well as the common format for the Alarm and Event
messages and sends alarms to the defined printer. This requires a dot matrix printer to be available on the local computer for
use. Each alarm type can be selected for printing, and custom filters can be defined for each type to control print output. The
print output is defined in the Format tab when Alarm Printing is selected in the Tree View and selecting columns and the
width for each. If the column value is longer than the specified width, the value is truncated. Alarms are printed continuously
as they are generated. Refer to the manufactures printer manual for configuration information.
Note If Printing Enabled is set to False (default setting), the Filters tab does not display.
1032 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
When enabled, the Alarm Printing item in the Tree View displays sub-items
for Process Alarms, Events, Diagnostic Alarms, SOEs , and Holds .
When an alarm type is enabled for printing, the filtering configuration options
display in the Summary View .
Note Additionally, if the WorkstationST General tab setting Use Second Language is set to True, certain alarm fields (such
as Alarm State and Description) will be printed with the second language text.
Note Refer to the WorkstationST Alarm Viewer Instruction Guide (GEI-100620) for further details.
1034 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.17 HMI Config Tab
15.17.1 HMI Features
As a feature of WorkstationST Service, the HMI imports component data into a defined CIMPLICITY project and allows you
to manage HMI screen files. For additional information on managing HMI screen files, refer to the WorkstationST HMI
Configuration User Guide (GEI-100629).
Imported data includes:
1036 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
HMI Config Properties
Property Description
Enable Alarm Viewer Multiunit - Go To If set to True, displays multiple alarm names in the CIMPLICITY screen when started
Screen Capability by the WorkstationST Alarm Viewer.
Fully qualified path and file of the multiunit text file that is processed by the
WorkstationST Alarm Viewer.
This file contains the screen variable names and component name assignments to
Multiunit Path and File pass into the CIMPLICTY object model, OverlayEx Call. If this file is defined, it
overrides the file defined using the path of the NavCfg file.
The property Enable Alarm Viewer Multiunit – Go To Screen Capability must be set to
True to enable this property.
Project File Path Location and file name for the CIMPLICITY project that will receive imported data
If set to True, enables the CIMPLICITY project to send information to the Event Log
Set Point Audit Trail
about user-defined setpoints.
If set to True (default) and CIMPLICITY 7.x is being used, requires you to define the
CIMPLICITY project file path.
CIMPLICITY 7.x allows you to view and edit screens with a direct connection to
HMI Graphics without a Project WorkstationST Services. This eliminates the need to synchronize a CIMPLICITY
project database.
Refer to WorkstationST / CIMPLICITY Advanced Viewer Integration Instruction Guide
(GEI-100697).
Used to override the Use Second Language property in the WorkstationST General
tab when importing into a CIMPLICITY project.
Override Use Second Language If the override is False, the Importer uses the setting in the General tab.
If the override is True, the primary language description is imported into the
CIMPLICITY project.
Auto Download Screen Files Automatically downloads HMI screen files when the master screen files change.
Screen Editor Overrides the default editor, which is based on the screen file extension.
Overrides the default local screen directory.
This path can be absolute or relative. When relative, it is based on the location of the
CIMPLICITY project (defined in the Project File Path).
If the screen file path is blank, the default screen file path is \screens, relative to the
Screen File Path project file path parameter (for example, if the project file path is c:\site\cimproj, the
screen file path is c:\site\cimproj\screens.)
If the HMI Graphics without a Project property is set to False, Global Project
Parameters displays in the Tree View and the following properties display in the
Property Editor.
Note Global Project Parameters displays as a Tree View item only if the HMI Graphics without a Project property is set to
False.
➢ To add a global system or project parameter: from the Tree View, right-click either Global System or Project
Parameters and select Add.
➢ To download HMI screen files from the Master location to an HMI WorkstationST component
1. From the System Information Editor Tree View, select HMI Screens.
2. From the Summary View, select one or more HMI screen files and right-click to select Download selected HMI
Screens.
Note The most important status property is whether the HMI WorkstationST screen file is current with the Master file.
The System Information Editor can display the status of HMI screen files, including the date and size of the Master HMI
screen file and the WorkstationST component’s screen file.
1038 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.18 OPC DA Server Tab
OPC® is an industrial standard for communication between various platforms using the Microsoft COM and DCOM model.
The DCOM utility allows components to communicate across network boundaries. The OPC Data Access (DA) Server is
configured from the WorkstationST component OPC DA Server tab.
The OPC DA Server receives Ethernet Global Data (EGD) from all EGD-referenced devices consumed by the WorkstationST
application. The OPC DA Server provides live, time-stamped data. Write access allows you to write to variables. These writes
are channeled to the EGD devices through EGD Command Message Protocol writes. The OPC DA Server can also own
variables defined in the OPC DA client. The OPC DA Server has various data plug-ins. If enabled, an SDI data plug-in allows
access to named variables from a component that speaks SDI protocol, such as a Mark VIe controller, a Mark VI controller, or
a UC2000 Innovation Series controller. The OPC DA client data plug-in allows the server to obtain variables from an external
OPC DA Server.
Note Refer to the WorkstationST OPC DA Server Installation Guide (GEI-100621) for further details.
1040 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Properties
Property Description
If set to True, provides the capability to expose process alarm state and acknowledgment
Enable Process Alarms feedback data in addition to allowing Acknowledgment and Reset commands to the Alarm
Server.
When set to True, enables the server to allow client access based on both the Windows user
Enable Client Security by
under which the client is running and on Users and Roles defined in the System Information
User
Editor.
If set to False (enabled by default), OPC and SDI clients (for example, the ToolboxST
Enable Client Writes
application) cannot write to a variable.
Maximum client data update rate in ms
Maximum Client Rate If five times the exchange period is greater than the minimum, five times the exchange period
will be the timeout used.
Sets the minimum EGD exchange timeout in ms
Minimum Exchange Timeout Consumed EGD exchanges are declared unhealthy if they are not received within this timeout.
The default is 8000 ms. A minimum value of 1000 ms is allowed.
Number of backup log files to keep
The log files are two megabytes in size, and are kept in the application startup directory
Number of Backup Files
(normally C:\Program Files\GE Energy\GeCssOpcServer).
After changing this setting, restart the OPC DA Server Service.
Enables solicited data through the SDI protocol. If enabled, the server contains additional
internal variables for UC2000, Mark VI, and Mark VIe controllers.
SDI Data Enabled These variables are in addition to the public EGD variables. Although the internal variables are
present in the server and available for OPC browsing, they are not updated with live data until
an OPC client assigns them to a group.
Note DCOM security issues may be encountered when OPC DA client-to-server communications are configured. Refer to
the WorkstationST OPC DA Server Installation Guide (GEI-100621).
The OPC DA client allows you to receive data from other OPC DA Servers. An OPC DA client connection contains one or
more groups that are collections of variables to be updated.
➢ To add an OPC DA group to the connection: from the Tree View, right-click the connection and select Add
Group.
Enter a group
name and
click OK.
1042 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To add variables to a group
1. From the Tree View, select a group.
➢ To connect all items in the Tree View: select the top level item and click GoOn/Offline or right-click and select
Connect.
If a connection is successful, live values display in the Data Grid.
A connection between the client and the OPC DA Server requires access and launch permissions by the client on the server
computer. Since OPC DA Servers often run as system users (not administrators), the server must be able to access the client
computer to return data values. The client computer must allow access by the system account to the client. Refer to the
WorkstationST OPC DA Server Installation Guide (GEI-100621) for information on DCOM settings.
When the OPC DA server is started, and whenever the specified .csv file is changed, the live values are read and set to the
variables specified in the .csv file. The variables can be any writable variables to which the WorkstationST has access. For
example, a client-driven variable can be defined and put onto an EGD Produced Page. This variable’s value is then updated
from the .csv file values. Any errors display in the Component InfoView Status tab.
If CSV Uses New Format is True, the .csv file format is a variable name with a value on each line, for example:
Var1, 3.7
Var2, true
Var3, 4.5
If CSV Uses New Format is False, the .csv file format is one line of variable names and a second line of data values, for
example:
Var1,Var2,Var3
3.7,true,4.5
The utility LiveVarsToCsv.exe, which is in the GeCssOpcServer installation folder, is used to read a snapshot of live values
and write them to an output .csv file. The command line utility’s syntax is as follows:
LiveVarsToCsv [options] <varCfgFileName |
var1,var2,var3...> <outputFileName>
1044 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Where options are:
/opcClient - use an OPC client to the WorkstationST live data core, otherwise an SDI connection is used by default.
/host="name" - an optional host name. If not specified, local host is used.
/Horiz - Without this option, the output format has one line of comma separated variables and a second line with comma
separated values. With this option the output format has one line per variable with name, value and optional extended data.
/Extended - Additional information is appended to the variable column or row.
/Header - Includes a column header line. This option is only used when the /Horiz option is used.
/SeparateDateTimeColumns - Creates two columns for the variable's time stamp rather than one combined date/time column.
This is only valid when used with the /Horiz option /AdditionalColumns=col,val which allows the inclusion of a column
header(s) col with value val. For example, if you use:
/AdditionalColumn=Area,Train1, another column with a header text of Area and column values of Train1, would be appended
to the output. Multiple columns/values can be specified (for example Area,Train1,Customer,GE). This is only valid when
used with the /Horiz option /ColumnOrder=list which allows the order of the columns to be specified. The list is a comma
separated list of column header names.
Valid header names are:
Name, Value, Type, Time Stamp,Units,Description, Second Language Description.
If the /SeparateDateTimeColumns options was specified, Date and Time are also valid column headers.
If the /AdditionalColumns option was used, the headers specified are also valid for the ColumnOrder list. This is only valid
when used with the /Horiz option.
If the argument following the options is a valid file path, the file is expected to contain a list of variables, one per line with
optional comma separated columns for scale, offset and a translated output name (see an example below). Otherwise, the
argument following the options can be a list of comma-separated variable names.
Example varCfgFile format:
# Comments are allowed anywhere in the file if preceded by a ‘#’
var,scale,offset,translatedName
G1.Celcius,1.8,32,G1.Farenheit
Example using advanced options:
LiveVarsToCsv /Horiz /Extended /Header /SeparateDateTimeColumns /AdditionalColumns="Plant Area,Train1"
/ColumnOrder="Area,Name,Value,Date,Time,Description,Units,Second Language Description" var1,var2,var3 outputfile.csv
This utility can be used with the WorkstationST Task Scheduler to provide periodic writing of .csv data.
If the alias is part of a bit-packed word, the GroupShortName and Offset columns must be populated. WorkstationST
variables cannot be used as part of a bit-packed word. Additional fields are ignored. The column order does not matter.
Note To use the import WindSCADA feature, the OPC DA Server tab must be enabled. Refer to the section Features.
1046 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the Tree
View, select
WindSCADA Bit
Packed Words
to display names,
descriptions, and
types in the Data
Grid
Once the OPC dataset has been imported, perform the Save, Build, and Download commands. This updates the OPC DA
Server without requiring a restart. New OPC tags with the specified alias names are added to the namespace for access by
OPC clients.
Bit-packed Words Properties
Property Description
Name Full name with the device prefix
Description Existing Boolean variable in the OPC DA Server namespace
Type Offset for the Boolean variable in the packed word
The data is only configurable from the .csv file. If It becomes necessary to modify or add to the data, the file can be exported
back to the original .csv file from the WorkstationST configuration.
1048 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.18.4 Alarm Consumption from Remote Workstation
The following diagram illustrates alarm handling for consumption of alarms directly over a UDH and remotely from another
alarm server(s) from a second UDH.
The WorkstationST Alarm server feature will consume alarms for all Mark VIe, Mark VI, and Mark V product line of
controllers that are configured to be referenced as Yes on the General Tab, Consumed Devices configuration. For example, the
following figure displays a configuration where alarms from the BOP controller will be consumed by the alarm server.
Alarm consumption can be configured to consume additional alarms from other remote alarm servers on the Alarm tab. The
primary and secondary alarm servers in the system are intended to be used to consume or aggregate alarms from other remote
alarm servers. Continuing with the example, the following figures illustrate the primary alarm server being additionally
configured to consume alarms from the controllers in Block1 and Block2. Both a primary and a secondary alarm server are
configured.
1050 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To configure the Remote Alarm Servers: right-click on the Remote Alarm Server node and select the Primary
Workstation and Secondary Workstation from the drop-down menus. Set to True to enable the connection to the
remote alarm server.
Note The period, which is user-configured as an exchange on a page, is the rate at which the exchange is sent.
WorkstationST EGD Produced Pages can be configured with primary or secondary redundancy. A primary redundancy sends
the Produced Page if the page’s data source is healthy. A secondary Produced Page is sent by another WorkstationST
component if the primary Produced Page is not heard for three periods. Typically a consumer of an EGD Produced Page
declares the page unhealthy if the page is not received after five periods. If the secondary redundancy again detects the
production of the primary page, data production is stopped. Like the primary, the secondary producer sends the page if the
data source is healthy.
➢ To show redundancy
1. From the EGD tab, select a Produced Page.
2. From the Property Editor, modify the Redundancy by selecting from the drop-down list.
1052 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.18.6 Determine Produced Page Health
Each Produced Page contains WorkstationST variables. A data source for the variable values can be an OPC DA client
connected to the WorkstationST OPC DA Server, an OPC DA Server connected to the WorkstationST OPC DA client, or a .
csv file monitored by the WorkstationST .csv file watcher.
The Health Timeout Multiplier can be configured for each Produced Page. If the health timeout multiplier is greater than 0,
and at least one page variable is written by a data source within the timeout multiplied by the page period, the page is sent by
the primary producer (or the secondary if the primary is not producing). A flag allows the first variable in the page (the one at
offset 0.0) to be the only variable monitored to determine the data source health.
Note DCOM security issues may be encountered when OPC DA client-to-server communications are configured. Refer to
the WorkstationST OPC DA Server Installation Guide (GEI-100621).
The WorkstationST application provides an OPC DA Server that can be configured with an OPC DA client, which consumes
data from other OPC DA Servers. The OPC DA test client allows browsing and live data callback connections (OPC DA 2.0)
to any OPC DA Server. Detailed information displays in the Log window.
➢ To use the Test OPC DA Client feature: from the View menu, select Test OPC DA Client from the drop-down
list. Refer to the section OPC DA Client.
1054 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To add a server connection
An OPC connection contains one or more groups that are collections of variables to be updated.
➢ To add an OPC group to the connection: from the Tree View, right-click the created connection and select Add
Group.
Note For information on DCOM settings, Refer to the WorkstationST OPC DA Server Installation Guide (GEI-100621).
A connection between the client and the OPC DA Server requires access and launch permissions by the client on the server
computer. Since OPC DA Servers often run as System users (not Administrators), the server must be able to access the client
computer to return data values. The client computer must allow access by the System account to the client.
1056 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3. Select the OPC UA Server tab.
Properties
Property Description
Default source for Historical data if a source is not specified by the client.
Default Historian Type
Choices are Historian or Recorder, based on the features being enabled.
Enable High Performance EGD If set to True, enables multiple EGD receive threads to handle EGD activity.
Consumption More CPU is required by the OPC UA Server process, when this is enabled.
1058 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.19.2 OPC UA Client
Data from other OPC UA servers can be obtained using the OPC UA Client.
Failing to make a secure connection to the server results in data being exchanged over
non-secure or encrypted channels. Some OPC UA servers will not accept non-secure
connections.
Attention
Server Properties
Property Description
Host Name Host name of the computer where the OPC UA server is running
Server URL URL of the OPC UA server running on the specified host
Endpoint Configuration - Security Mode used for a secure connection. If Use Best Available Security is set to True, this
Security Mode setting will be ignored.
Endpoint Configuration - Security Policy used for a secure connection. If Use Best Available Security is set to True, this
Security Policy setting will be ignored.
Endpoint Configuration - If set to True, the client will attempt to connect to the server’s most secure endpoint, otherwise
Use Best Available Security the security settings defined in the Endpoint Configuration will be used.
User Token Information – User Name when a server implements a user name and password authentication. If blank, the
User Name user will be anonymous.
User Token Information –
Password when a server implements a user name and password authentication policy.
User Password
1060 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
An OPC UA client connection contains one or more subscriptions, which are collections of variables to be updated.
➢ To connect all items in the Tree View: select the top level item and click Go On/Offline or right-click and select
Connect.
If a connection is successful, live values display in the Data Grid.
Properties
Property Description
Name of this external Historian. This name displays in the OPC UA server's namespace, with all
Historian Name
variables from this Historian prefixed by this name.
Host Name Host name or IP address of the Historian WorkstationST running the OPC HDA server
OPC HDA Server Name of this external Historian's OPC HDA server
1062 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
When an external
Historian is selected
in the Tree View,
User Credentials
display in the
Property Editor
Enter a valid
Windows domain
name, username,
and password. The
domain is left blank
for computers using
Windows workgroups
➢ To use the Test OPC UA Client feature: from the View menu, select Test OPC UA Client.
1064 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.20 Variables Tab
The Variables tab automatically displays when you create or open a WorkstationST component. It allows you to configure and
map WorkstationST-owned variables.
Note These variables, previously named Client-driven Variables, are defined on the OPC DA Server tab.
WorkstationST-owned variables are written to by WorkstationST clients, such as Modbus and OPC DA and OPC UA clients.
➢ To add variables: from the Variables tab Tree View, select WorkstationST Variables.
Enter a variable
Variables can be edited both in the Data Grid and the Property Editors. The Data Grid is used to view or edit variable
definitions, and can be configured to display a subset of the variable properties. When a variable is selected in the Data Grid,
the Property Editor displays all variable properties.
1066 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
WorkstationST Variables Properties (continued)
Property Description
Entry Low Limit Default lower limit for the setpoint entry on the HMI
Format Spec System-owned format specifications assigned to a variable
HMI Resource Allows the user to configure access and visibility of variable and alarm data
Determines the number of digits to the right of the decimal point
Precision This is the default for precision when displaying the number on HMI. If a Format Spec has been
specified and this precision attribute is not specified, the Format Spec Precision is used.
Engineering units
If a Format Spec has been specified and Units is not specified, the Format Spec Units is used with
Units
the SDB version of the HMI device. This attribute is not used. Only the format specification's Units
string is used.
Variable tag name that can be customized by the user, and is available to the WorkstationST
Alias
component and the HMI
Array number of elements in this array variable
Enumerations values represented in separate CSV records
Fully qualified name of the variable
Full Name For example, a variable name gas_fuel_opt in a user block named Config under the Program
CORE would have a full name of CORE.Config.gas_fuel_opt.
Initial Value Allows array length, data type, and enumeration editing
Name Variable name
Type Variable data type
Enables the automatic collection by the Historian when Boolean and set to Logged on Change
Historian Deadband
Analog and set to 0 or higher
Historian Deadband
Defines the deadband value as either engineering units or percent of range
Definition
Enables the automatic collection by the Recorder when Boolean and set to Logged Continuous or
Recorder Deadband
Logged on ChangeAnalog and set to 0 or higher
Recorder Deadband
Defines the deadband value as either engineering units or percent of range
Definition
Has Health Bit If set to True, assigns a health bit to the EGD variable
Initial Health If set to True, causes the initial quality of the OPC DA variable to be good
EGD Page Used to assign the variable to an Ethernet Global Data Page
Used primarily for EGD:
ReadOnly variable can be read on EGD
External Access
ReadWrite variable can be written to through EGD
NoAccess variable cannot be changed with the ToolboxST application
If set to True, causes the WorkstationST HMI configuration to import the variable as a virtual point.
Virtual HMI Point
Live values of virtual points are not typically available to the HMI.
1068 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Mapping Update Rate is the rate for the variable mapping task in ms. Source variables are copied to destination variables
at this frequency. The value can range between 200 and 300,000 ms.
The OPC AE Server is OPC AE version 1.10-compliant. Optional interfaces that are provided allow browsing of published
content, enabling/disabling content by Area or Source, and providing a keep-alive heartbeat to maintain the client connection.
OPC AE Server, configured in a WorkstationST component, requires ToolboxST V 02.02 or later. The server is implemented
as a service with the name GeCssOpcAeServer.
15.21.1 Routing
The OPC AE Server can be connected locally or remotely from another computer.
Note Variable is used to describe an entity within the ToolboxST application. Source is the comparable OPC AE term; the
comparable OPC DA term is Item.
When an alarm or event is received by the Alarm Server, it is sent to the OPC AE Server through an internal client
connection. Before connected OPC AE clients are notified, variable name and condition states must be translated.
Example 2
In the following table, the component name is G1, the Boolean variable name is TooHot, and the variable properties are Alarm
= True, Event = False, and Hold = False.
1070 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.21.4 State Translations
The three alarm and event types that can have a state are Alarm, Diagnostic, and Hold. Event and Sequence of Events (SOE)
are considered simple by OPC AE, and do not have states. The OPC AE Server implements and acknowledges Alarms,
Diagnostics, and Holds as condition-related states. Events and SOEs are simple events, and cannot be acknowledged from any
external OPC AE client.
➢ To display the alarm class definition: from the System Editor Edit menu, select System Information.
Alarm definitions display in the System Information Editor Data Grid.
OPC Properties
1072 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To configure the OPC AE Server
Note The Alarm Server must be enabled for the OPC AE server to be used.
4. Select the Alarms tab to verify that the necessary options have been set. There are no options defined here that affect the
operation of the OPC AE Server.
5. Click the OPC AE Server tab, then from the Tree View, select Publish Settings. All alarm and event types are
published by default. These settings are for each consumed device.
The WorkstationST component can be built and downloaded. Use the WorkstationST Status Monitor to check the running
health of the OPC AE Server. The DCOM configuration settings may need to be modified for the GeCssOpcAeServer
application before external clients can connect.
Note Refer to the WorkstationST Recorder User Guide (GEI-100627) for further details.
The Recorder tab Tree View displays the Recorder item with an entry for each component in the Consumed Devices
configuration in the General tab. A System item is created to collect data from multiple components. The following table lists
the available Recorder properties.
Recorder Properties
Property Description
Recorder Path Location of the Recorder files being created
When set to True, provides validation of the trip logs by connecting to the controller and uploading the
Validate Trip Logs
configuration of the capture buffers
Within a component, data can be configured to be automatically collected by the Recorder. Signals on the EGD network are
automatically routed to a continuous Live collection if their short-term deadband property contains a value.
For components with an Upload Type property on the capture buffer, setting this property to Automatic creates a collection
for this capture buffer. Setting this property to Trip creates a Trip Log that includes this capture buffer.
Automatic collections allow only storage, scan rate, and description property modifications. All other modifications must be
performed in the component. User-defined collections are configured from the Recorder tab.
1074 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To add a collection
1. From the Tree View, right-click a component and select Add Collection.
2. From the drop-down list, select the collection type: Live Data, Trip Log, Capture Buffer, EPA Log, or Maintenance Log.
Note Refer to the subsequent document sections, such as Live Data, for more information on the available collection types.
3. From the Collection Name dialog box, provide a name for the collection.
Enter a name
and click OK.
4. The collection is added to the Tree View for the selected component.
Removing a component from the Tree View causes that component and all of its
collections to be deleted.
Attention
Note An Automatic collection can only be deleted by removing it from the component’s configuration.
➢ To add a variable
1. From the Tree View, right-click the collection name and select Add Variable.
2. From the Select a Variable dialog box, select the Tree View component item, select the appropriate variable(s) from the
data grid, then click OK.
➢ To delete a variable: from the data grid, right-click the row of the variable to be deleted and select Delete Selected
Row(s).
1076 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.22.1 Live Data
The Live Data collection collects data samples continuously during or after an event.
Note When the Alarms and Events or the diagnostic alarms are enabled for a collection, they are saved to the file when the
file is closed. This typically occurs at the end of the hour.
Source Direct indicates data values obtained through direct connection to the device with the device sending
the Data to the Recorder (example: data through SDI).
ByProxy allows the Recorder to collect data from devices referenced by proxy in this WorkstationST
(configured as consumed devices).
Configuration Method, either Automatic or Manual, used to configure this collection
Type Type of collection (Live Data)
Disk Usage Amount of disk space, in MB, that this collection is allowed
Storage Time Time, in days, that the files are maintained on disk
If set to True, records the alarms and events that occurred in the collection time frame. The Alarm
Alarms/Events
feature must be enabled in this WorkstationST component.
Description Provides a description of the collection
If set to True, records diagnostic alarms that occurred in the collection time frame. The Alarm feature
Diagnostic Alarms
must be enabled in this WorkstationST component.
Enable If set to True, enables the data collection
If set to True (default), controls whether the Recorder feature uses or ignores all predefined Recorder
Use Component
variables from the controller. If set to False, variables required for collection must be added manually
Configuration
(only when the Configuration property is set to Automatic).
Method Method, either Continuous, Triggered Level, or Triggered Edge, used for data collection
Name Collection name, is used as part of the file name
Scan Rate Rate, in ms, that the data is scanned for changes
Variable Count Number of variables in the collection
1078 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.22.4 EPA Log
The EPA log collection uploads and writes to a file that the capture buffer data specified by the status variable in the
collection. The EPA log generates and prints a .csv file.
Note Refer to the WorkstationST Application Mark V Feature System Guide (GEH-6759).
Note Refer to the WorkstationST Device Manager Gateway Instruction Guide (GEI-100757).
1080 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.28 Control System Health Tab
The Control System Health feature allows you to display the health of various components on the UDH, the PDH, and IONet.
This includes the following:
Note Refer to the WorkstationST Control System Health Instruction Guide (GEI-100834) for information on parameters and
alarms.
The Control System Health management system consists of a server and a viewer client.
1082 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.29.2 Produced Pages
Produced Pages are data samples configured to be available to other components on the network.
Note When the first Produced Page is created, it automatically becomes the default page.
Tip � Any variable defined with $Default as the EGD page name is automatically placed on the currently selected default
page.
➢ To delete a page: from the Tree View, right-click the page to delete and select Delete.
1084 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.29.3 Page Compression
When a page compression is performed, the variables are located in increasing size order, starting with Booleans, then Words,
Double Words, and finally all other variables. A page compression causes an exchange major signature. Consumers normally
mark the exchange variables as unhealthy until the consumed configuration can be rebound.
➢ To compress a single page: from the Tree View, right-click the page to compress and select Compress.
➢ To compress all Produced Pages in a component: from the Tree View, right-click Produced Pages and
select Compress All.
Tip � If the variable to be added to the EGD page is already in use on the Software tab, you can add the variable without
using the EGD tab. To add a variable from the Software tab, select the desired variable(s) in the Summary View and set the
EGD Page property using either the Summary View or the Property Editor.
➢ To add a variable to a produced page: from the Tree View, right click a Produced Page and select Add
Variable to display the Select a Variable dialog box.
➢ To delete a variable from an EGD Page: from the Summary View, right-click the variable to delete and select
Delete Selected Row(s).
➢ To copy variable information from an EGD Page to the clipboard: from the Summary View, right-click a
variable and select Copy Selection. The data is copied in .csv format.
Note To edit exchange signatures and configuration time, set the Layout Mode property to Manual. The Layout Mode
property displays when a Produced Page is selected in the Tree View.
3. Review the warning about manual Exchange Signature editing and click OK.
4. Make any desired changes to the signatures and configuration time and click OK.
Note When EGD configurations are edited in remote devices, you must refresh the configuration to ensure that the latest
variable information is used. The configuration is automatically refreshed occurs when a WorkstationST component is
opened, and when a Build command is performed.
➢ To refresh the configuration of a referenced device: from the Tree View right-click the device to be refreshed,
and select Refresh.
1086 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.29.6 EGD Diagnostics
The EGD protocol includes a Command Message Protocol (CMP) to obtain the status of a Class 2 or higher EGD device. The
WorkstationST component is a Class 3 EGD device. When any EGD item in the Tree View other than a referenced device is
selected, the EGD Statistics from [Device] tab displays the statistics from the open component. When a Referenced Devices
item is selected, the statistics are obtained from that device, and the name of the tab page changes accordingly.
Enabling the translation of the data in the Source Address column to a host name with a Tool Tip. This
translation can take some time, so the feature is only enabled upon request.
When the collection is started, the runtime begins storing all EGD messages received. When the queue gets full, old messages
are deleted. When the UI stops the collection and uploads the data, all messages display in the grid.
The collection status displays in the status bar.
1088 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Columns include:
Receive Time is the UTC time when the message was received.
Source Address sources the IP Address.
Producer ID Dotted is a four-byte unsigned integer that uniquely identifies the producer of an exchange in a given network.
This ID is used by the protocol to identify the node (or set of redundant nodes), so even nodes that do not produce any data
must be assigned a unique Producer ID. The Producer ID value is generally assigned by a configuration tool set to the IP
address of the producing node (in network-byte order) by default. Where displayed in dotted decimal form, the Producer ID is
treated as a four-byte field whose data is in network-byte order. Where displayed in any other form, the Producer ID is treated
as a four-byte little-endian unsigned integer value (example: 3.4.5.6 = 0x06050403 = 100992003).Producer IDs of 0 and of
0xFFFFFFFF are reserved and cannot be used. Multiple nodes in a redundant system may use the same producer ID. For the
purposes of this specification, the redundant system may be treated as a single-producer node. Controlling what devices
within the redundant system are producing EGD is a local matter within the redundant system.
Producer ID is a four-byte unsigned integer and unique address of the producing device of an exchange in a given network.
This ID is used by the protocol to identify the node (or set of redundant nodes), so even nodes that do not produce any data
must be assigned a unique Producer ID. The Producer ID value is generally assigned by a configuration tool set to the IP
address of the producing node (in network-byte order) by default. Where displayed in dotted decimal form, the Producer ID is
treated as a four-byte field whose data is in network-byte order. Where displayed in any other form, the Producer ID is treated
as a four-byte little-endian unsigned integer value (example: 3.4.5.6 = 0x06050403 = 100992003). Producer IDs of 0 and of
0xFFFFFFFF are reserved and cannot be used. Multiple nodes in a redundant system may use the same producer ID. For the
purposes of this specification, the redundant system may be treated as a single-producer node. Controlling what devices
within the redundant system are producing EGD is a local matter within the redundant system.
Exchange ID is a four-byte unsigned integer that uniquely identifies a particular exchange definition on a specific producing
node. The most significant two bytes of the Exchange ID must be zero for version 3.04 of the protocol. Pre-defined static
exchanges are assigned a value between 1 and 16383 (0x3fff). The value of bits 14 and 15 (the high order bits in the lower
half of the long word) are normally 0, but may be used to differentiate normal static exchanges from those defined during
runtime.
Bit 15, 14 meaning
0,0 = Static Exchange
0,1 = Reserved
1,0 = Logic Driven Exchanges
1,1 = Reserved
1090 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Number Data Bytes are the number of data bytes in the message. (Total message size minus 32-byte header).
Reserved 1 is reserved.
The Global Variables window is particularly useful when you want to modify a property for multiple variables. For example,
to move multiple variables onto an EGD page, select the rows for the desired variables and then change the EGD Page
property in the Property Editor. Refer to the section Data Grids.
Because only existing global variables can be changed, new variables cannot be added from the Global Variables window.
You cannot make any change that affects the name of the global variable (such as Name or Global Name Prefix).
1092 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.30 WorkstationST Reports
WorkstationST reports provide a variety of controller information in a viewable format. Generated reports display in a
separate window and can be printed or saved for later use, as well as exported to a .csv file and opened in Microsoft Excel.
Reports can also be sorted, filtered, and searched to quickly locate information:
The following reports can be created and used for troubleshooting and informational reference:
• Alarm
• Event
• Workstation Consumed Device Information
• WorkstationST Feature Configuration
• GE Rationalization
Note The Hold report is not supported for WorkstationST at this time.
Note The Alarms report will only display alarms that are configured in the Alarm Scanner or Fault Code Scanner.
1094 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Alarm Report Columns
Column Description
Name Variable name
Description Variable description
Alarm Class Group of related alarms that share a common priority and color scheme
Display Screen HMI screen name
Format Spec Configured format specification
Type Variable type (such as BOOL, REAL, UINT)
Units Engineering units
BQ Enables bad quality for a variable
H Enabled High alarming state for the variable when it is defined as an analog Alarm
HH Enabled High high alarming state for the variable when it is defined as an analog Alarm
HHH Enabled High high high alarming state for the variable when it is defined as an analog Alarm
L Enabled low alarming state for the variable when it is defined as an analog Alarm
LL Enabled Low low alarming state for the variable when it is defined as an analog Alarm
LLL Enabled Low low low alarming state for the variable when it is defined as an analog Alarm
RH Enabled Enabled rate of change when the variable is alarmed
Plant Area Defined string that associates a variable to an area or function of a plant
Normal Severity Value assigned when the Alarm is in the normal state
Active Severity Value assigned when the Alarm is in the active state
Variable tag name that can be customized for use with the WorkstationST application
Alias
and all HMIs
If enabled, causes the Alarm to be cleared before the operator acknowledges the Alarm
Auto Reset
condition when the process returns to normal limits
If enabled, allows the operator to temporarily remove the Alarm from the Alarm Viewer
Alarm Shelving
display
Alarm Shelving Max
Maximum time, in minutes, that an Alarm can remain shelved
Duration
Second Language
Description in second language (if configured in System Editor)
Description
DH Enabled Deviation alarming state for a variable when it is defined as an analog Alarm
Alarm Inhibit Group Name of the Alarm Inhibit group when the variable is defined as an Alarm
Parent Alarms Alarms configured as parent to the variable (variable should be alarm)
Child Alarms Alarms configured as child to the variable (variable should be alarm)
Alarm On Zero True if alarm occurs on 1 to 0 transition
Entry No Row entry number
Consequences of Inaction Consequence if operator does not address this alarm
Operator Action Action the operator should take to avoid defined consequences
Operator Urgency Indication of how important it is that the operator addresses this alarm
Potential Causes Possible cause of this alarm
Second Language
Consequence in second language if operator does not address this alarm
Consequences of Inaction
Second Language Operator Indication in second language of how important it is that the operator addresses this
Urgency alarm
Second Language Potential
Possible cause of this alarm in second language
Causes
Second Language Operator
Action in second language the operator should take to avoid defined consequences
Action
The Event report lists digital signals defined as an Event, and provides an alarm History record when a signal transitions from
a 1 to 0. Event notifications provide the date and time stamp for when the Event occurred. This report can be used for
troubleshooting and informational reference.
1096 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
From the Event report, double-click an Event
to display the Alarm definition details.
➢ To create a Workstation Consumed Device Information report: from the View menu, select Reports, then
select Workstation Consumed Device Information.
There are several tabs available for the user to view consumption. These report views are detailed in the following sections:
1098 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Live Data Consumption View
1100 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.30.3.3 View by Consumed Devices
By selecting the View by Consumed Devices tab, the controller devices with child nodes are displayed indicating their
consumers. For example, by selecting the Live Data Consumption tab , G1 is shown consumed by HMI_Block1 and HMI_
Block1b, and additionally consumed indirectly through HMI_Block1 by Alarm_Primary, Alarm_Secondary, and HMI_
Block2.
1102 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.30.3.4 View as Text
Select the View as Text tab to view a text report of consumption that can be saved to a file representing the consumption
configuration.
➢ To create a Workstation Feature Configuration report: from the View menu, select Reports, then select
Workstation Feature Configuration.
➢ To copy a Workstation Feature Configuration report: from the Workstation Feature Configuration report File
menu, select Copy all to clipboard, then paste into an Excel spreadsheet or other application.
1104 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.30.5 System IP Address Information
The System IP Address Information report provides a report of WorkstationST device names, host name, network name, and
IP address.
➢ To create a System IP Address Information report: from the View menu, select Reports, then select System IP
Address Information to display the report.
Alarm Help files are generated when a build is performed for the device or when the
device is saved. However, Alarm help files are only generated when the Publish Alarm
Help property is set to True in the system Property Editor.
Attention
Note When a GE Rationalization report is generated from a WorkstationST component, it includes the following:
• WorkstationST owned variables with the Alarm property set to True. For Analog alarms, it will also include a line for each
unique combination of Variable Name and Alarm Condition Name.
• A line for each unique combination of Variable Name and Alarm Type if any External OPC AE Servers on the Alarm tab
are configured.
• A line for each Variable Name if any External OPC UA Servers on the Alarm tab are configured.
1106 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To create a GE Rationalization report
1108 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.30.7 Report Features
Many reports provide a set of common features located on the View menu toolbar for the operators convenience, as follows:
• Save report
• Retrieve (generate) report
• Export report
• Import report
• Print report
• Sort (modify) columns
• Filter
• Refresh
• Zoom
• Find text
• Help
Toolbar Icons
Icon Description
Zoom in
Zoom out
Get help
➢ To save, retrieve, or print a report: from the report File menu, select the desired command.
1110 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To sort a report column: click any column heading to apply a sort to that column. The first click sorts the column in
ascending order; a second click sorts the column in descending order.
Column
names that
display in
blue cannot
be moved.
Or
2. Select a column header and use the drag-and-drop feature.
➢ To apply a report filter: from the Report menu, click Apply Filter to open the Edit Report Filter dialog box.
Available Available
columns comparison
(double-click and Boolean
to add to an operators
equation) (double-click
to add to an
equation)
Click to add
parentheses
Click OK to
accept the
filter equation
Enter filter that displays.
equation to
be used. Click Clear
to delete the
equation.
Click Cancel
to cancel the
equation but
keep the
current
settings.
<= Left expression must be less than or equal to the right expression
>= Left expression must be greater than or equal to the right expression
Expression to the left of the operator must match the wildcard expression
to the right of the operator
When using the LIKE operator, you can prefix or suffix a wildcard
LIKE character, either * or %, to the right-hand value. The wildcard character
can stand for any number of alphanumeric characters, including zero. The
wildcard character can only be present at the beginning or the end of the
right-hand value (for example, *value or value* or *value*).
AND Expressions to the left and right of the AND operator must both be True
OR Either the expression to the left or to the right of the operator must be True
1112 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Report Operator Expressions (continued)
Expression Description
NOT Expression to the right of the operator must be False
➢ To remove a report filter: from the Report menu, click Remove Filter. The filter is removed and all available rows
display.
➢ To save a filtered report: from the File menu, click Save Report.
➢ To search for text within a report: from the Report menu, click Find to display the Find dialog box.
If selected,
capitalization
in the test
string must
match the
text in the
report exactly
➢ To export a GE Rationalization report: from the GE Rationalization report File menu, select Save. Save it as a .csv
file to your computer, and modify as needed.
Tip: Change the Save as type to All Files (*.*) so you will
still be able to save the file as a .csv file.
Click Save .
5. Import the file into ToolboxST and verify that all the special characters display correctly.
1114 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.30.7.4 Importable Report Data
Certain columns (and their associated data types) in reports can be imported from a .csv file.
If you use Microsoft Excel to modify the .csv file, make sure you save the file back to a
.csv file from a .xls file.
If the .csv file contains UTF-8 special characters, to avoid issues with displaying
special characters after import back into ToolboxST open the file with Notepad and
Attention save the file with Encoding set to UTF-8. Refer to the procedure To avoid issues with
second language special characters during import.
1116 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.31 Alarm Rationalization
Alarm rationalization produces the detail design necessary to manage an alarm lifecycle. During this process, alarm
definitions are systematically compared to criteria (conditions) set forth in the alarm philosophy document for the plant. If an
alarm meets this criteria, the alarm set point, consequence, and operator action are documented, and the alarm is prioritized
and classified according to the philosophy.
The most common uses of Alarm Rationalization are:
Select from the Available Attributes table using the arrows to add them to or remove them from the
Selected Attribute table. Click Export to export alarms for Rationalization.
GE Rationalization is an available selection for export (as displayed in this figure). However, it is only available for
backwards compatibility.
1118 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To export GE alarms for Rationalization in ControlST: generate a GE Rationalization report.
Note The GE Rationalization report contains a column for Parent Alarms and for Child Alarms. A large number of
parent/child relationships can cause these two columns in the .csv file to be incompatible with the Excel application. The
application allows a maximum limit of 32,767 characters in a cell.
When a GE Rationalization report is generated, it can be saved as a .csv file, modified, and then imported back into the
ToolboxST application. For the procedures to export and import GE Rationalization reports, refer to the section Export and
Import Reports.
➢ To open a stand-alone Watch Window: from the Start menu, select All Programs, , ToolboxST, and Watch
Window.
➢ To create a Watch Window: from the System Editor Tree View, right-click the system and select Insert New,
Tool and Watch Window.
Enter a Name,
and a Description
(optional), and
click OK.
Note If this Watch Window is being opened for the first time, the list is empty. Add or import a new Watch Window.
➢ To open an existing Watch Window: from the System Editor Tree View, right-click the system and select Insert
Existing and Watch Window.
➢ To open a Watch Window: from a Component Editor View menu, select Watch Windows.
1120 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
15.32.1 Add Variable
➢ To add a variable: from the Watch Window Edit menu, select Add Variable and Using Add Wizard . When the
Welcome page displays, click Next.
If you selected
System
Component in the
previous page,
select the desired
component from
the drop-down list
and click Next.
The variables
will display here.
Click Finish .
Once a variable is added to a Watch Window, right-click the variable row header to perform the following actions:
Note When a system component providing signals to a Watch Window is replicated, the Watch Window is replicated as
well.
1122 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To organize columns in a Watch Window: from the View menu, select Organize Columns.
Forcing of protective functions is never permissible for an operating unit. All safety
Warning measures should be strictly enforced in conjunction with this procedure.
Note The Watch Window tool only exports grid columns necessary to retrieve variable information. For example,
DatasourceName from the exported file is used to retrieve the variable’s remaining properties from the system. User-defined
columns such as User Comment are also included.
➢ To save a Watch Window: from the <Watch Window name> File menu, select Save As to save the Watch Window
as a .watch file in a user-selected location,
or select Save to save the Watch Window as a .watch file in the Tools folder in the system.
15.33 CommandLineST
CommandLineST allows you to perform the following:
• Add and delete variables and their supporting structures to/from a WorkstationST component
• Build and download a WorkstationST component
• Get a .csv file of all variables a WorkstationST component can access
• Get a .csv file of all aliases defined in a WorkstationST component
Note The ToolboxST application must be installed. In addition, a system and a WorkstationST component must already
exist, the OPC DA Server feature must be enabled, and any network adapters must be added to the WorkstationST
configuration.
1124 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
The CommandFile is a .csv file where each line includes command, arg1key, arg1value, arg2key, arg2value, and such. The
hash mark (#) can be used to enter comments in the .csv file.
The command line syntax is:
CommandLineST.exe[options]<CommandFileName|command,arg1key,arg1value,arg2key,arg2value...>
Example:
CommandLineST.exe /SuppressInfos c:\temp\AddTestWk1.csv
15.33.2 Options
The following options are supported:
/ErrorLog=filename Where filename is the name of the error log. If this option isn’t included, the default name is
CommandLineST.log. The error log is written to the directory from which the executable is
run unless a path was included in the filename.
/SuppressWarnings Keeps both warnings and infos from being printed in the error log.
• Select
• Add
• Delete
• Enable
• Report
• Compress
• Save
• Build
• Download
• Download WorkstationST Feature
• Reports
Select opens the .tcw file and selects a WorkstationST component. The appropriate parent item must be selected before an
Add or Delete command can be performed. For example, before adding a new group to an OPC DA client, the client needs to
be selected. The selection for any item type remains until another item of that type is selected. For example, an OPC DA
client is selected and several groups are added. Then several commands perform operations on the Modbus configuration. If
the following command tries to select a group, it searches for it under the OPC DA client that was selected many commands
prior because it had not been superseded by any another OPC DA client. Performing commands in this manner works, but the
command file is more difficult to read unless comments are included.
Add selects an item automatically. If an identical item already exists underneath the current parent, the existing item is
removed before adding the new item (the log file displays a warning). This implies two things. First, any children items are
removed. (For example, any groups under a client are removed, as well.) Second, all desired non-default attributes of the
signal must be included. A separate Modify command does not currently exist that would leave all current definitions in
place, and only replace specified attributes.
Delete searches for the identified item under the currently selected parent and deletes it. If it is not found, the log file
displays a warning.
Enable enables the identified WorkstationST feature. Component features must be enabled before they can be configured. It
is assumed that the OPC DA Server feature is already enabled in the identified WorkstationST component. However, Modbus
can be enabled through the command line interface.
Compress compresses the identified EGD page. If you delete a variable from an EGD Page, a Compress command of all
EGD Pages in that WorkstationST component must be performed before you can build it. Otherwise, a validation error
displays. The Compress command compresses all EGD Pages in the currently selected WorkstationST component. Performing
a Compress command corresponds to a major signature change for that exchange on EGD, and has system implications.
Performing an Add command of an existing variable, which removes the old variable definition and adds the new variable
definition, does not require you to perform a Compress command if you have not removed a variable from an EGD Page. For
example, if a variable was on page1, the new variable definition must be complete enough to include the key/value pair,
egdpage, page1.
Save saves changes made to the currently selected WorkstationST component. No changes are saved unless an explicit Save
or Build command is performed.
Build builds the currently selected WorkstationST component. A validation is run. If the validation does not have any errors
(warnings are permitted), it runs the build. (A successful build automatically saves the configuration.) If any validate errors or
warnings occur during the validation, they are written to the error log. Any errors that occur during the Build command are
also written to the log (other Build messages are not included). Informational messages are also not included.
Download downloads the currently selected WorkstationST component. If this WorkstationST component was successfully
built since its selection, this download occurs. Otherwise, the log file displays an error.
Download WorkstationST Feature adds WorkstationST variables with only the specified feature receiving the download.
1126 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Reports runs on the currently selected WorkstationST component. Two types of reports can be created: Variable and Alias.
All variables to which the OPC DA Server (running in this WorkstationST component) has access are included in the Variable
report. There is an optional name key/pair that can be used to reduce the scope of the variables or aliases included in the
report. The Search value can include the * wildcard. If either the name key/value pair is not included, or the name value is set
to *, all variables or aliases are included in the report.
If the optional filename key/value pair is included, that name is where the report is written. It may or may not include a path.
If no path is included, the report is written to the directory from which the CommandLineST.exe was run. If no filename
key/value pair is included, the report filename is:
“WorkstationName”_VariableReport.csv or “WorkstationName”_AliasReport.csv
Report Fields
DataType x —
Description x —
Units x —
FormatSpec x —
Computer and
Command Item Name Parent AddressType Alias
OPCServerName
System,
System,
WorkstationST,
Workstation,
Group, Client requires both
Select Client, Group1, N/A N/A Select
HWInterface, these arguments
HWInterface,
and Slave
Slave1
require a Name
Client, Group1, Group, Variable, For a Variable, it
Variable, Alias must be either For a
Add
HWInterface, HWInterface, OpcServer or SlavePoint:
Client requires both (Alias
Add2 Slave1, Slave, Group3. HoldingReg;
these arguments requires
SlavePoint1, SlavePoint, and For a HWInterface Input; InputReg;
this)
MasterMes- MasterMessage must be either Coil
sage1 require a Name Masters or Slaves
Client, Group1, Group,
Variable, Alias Variable4, For a
For a Variable, it Delete
HWInterface, HWInterface, SlavePoint:
Client requires both must be either (Alias
Delete Slave1, Slave, HoldingReg;
these arguments OpcServer or requires
SlavePoint1, SlavePoint and Input; InputReg;
Group3. this)
MasterMes- MasterMessage Coil
sage1 require a Name
Enable Modbus N/A N/A N/A Enable
Report4 5 Variable, Alias Name4 optional N/A N/A N/A Report
Com-
Compress6 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
press
Save6 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Save
Build6 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Build
Down-
Download6 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
load
Download
WorkstationST OPC DA Server N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Feature
1128 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
1When one of these items is selected, added or deleted, it is associated with the last appropriate parent that was selected or
added. (A group’s parent is a client, a Slave’s parent is a HWInterface, a SlavePoint’s parent is a Slave, a MasterMessage’s
parent is a Slave.)
2When an item is added, it is automatically selected. For example, if you add a Client, then add a Group, the
Group becomes a child under the Client that was just added.
3 If the Parent argument value is OpcServer, the variable is added or deleted from the WorkstationST Variables
list. If the Parent argument value is Group, the variable is added or deleted from the last selected or added
Group.
4 When Delete a Variable or make a report, you can use a * wildcard in the Name.
5 The report includes all variables and aliases that the currently selected WorkstationST component has access
to, or a subset of them if a search string is entered in the Name field (using Name, *, or leaving off the optional
name key/value pair reports all variables or aliases that the currently selected WorkstationST component has
access to).
# Add a Modbus Master and its signals; test signal definition in OPCserver space
add, item, hwinterface, parent, masters, name, 3.25.180.202
add, item, slave, name, 18
add, item, Variable, name, ClientSig18, parent, opcserver, description, Client Sig 18 description, externalaccess, readwrite
add, item, slavepoint, name, ClientSig18, addresstype, InputReg, datatype, lreal, address, 2, rawmin, 0, rawmax, 1000, eng
min, 0, engmax, 100
add, item, mastermessage, name, modbusmastermessage0, functioncode, funccode4, periodmultiplier, 6, numberofregisters, 4,
startaddress, 2
# Add a Modbus Slave and its signals; test signal definition in OPCClient group
add, item, hwinterface, parent, slaves, name, 3.25.180.201
add, item, slave, name, 28
add, item, client, computer, npiCAR, opcservername, GeCssOpcServer
add, item, group, name, grp1, deadband, 5, egdpagehealth, Page1, updaterate, 2000, uselocaltime, true
add, item, Variable, name, ClientSig28, parent, group, remotename, RemoteClientSig28, datatype, int, externalaccess,
readwrite
add, item, slavepoint, name, ClientSig28, addresstype, holdingreg, datatype, dint, address, 3
1130 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
# Compress Save, Build and Download
compress
save
build
download
# Run a report
report, item, workstation, name, wk1, search, ClientSig*
# Open the system and add WorkstationST variables to the OPC DA Server
Note Connecting a variable to a Modbus register automatically defines the variable. The variable must have already been
added either to the OPC DA Server or to an OPC Client group as a separate action.
If the key/value pair for a given attribute is not included when adding a variable, the variable is assigned the default value.
If the key/value pair for a given attribute is not included when adding a group, the group is assigned the default value.
1132 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Report Key/Value Pairs
Attribute Default Value
Item Required. Possible values include Variables, Alias.
*. Can use to narrow the number of variables or aliases included in the report (for
Name
example: G1*)
WorkstationName_Item Report.csv. Can specify any file name, with or without a path. If
Filename
no path is included, it is written to the directory from which the .exe was run.
If the key/value pair for a given attribute is not included when adding a hardware interface, the HW Interface is assigned the
default value.
HW Interface Key/Value Pairs
Attribute Default Value
Required. The name is either the Com port if it is serial (COM1) or the IP Address if it is
Name
Ethernet.
Parent Required when adding. Value is either Masters or Slaves.
Ethernet. Possible Values:
InterfaceType
Ethernet, serial
IPAddress 0.0.0.0
BR19K2. Possible Values:
Port COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9, COM10,
COM11, COM12, COM13, COM14, COM15, COM16.
ResponseDelay 0
StopBits 1
If the key/value pair for a given attribute is not included when adding a MasterMessage, the MasterMessage is assigned the
default value.
MasterMessage Key/Value Pairs
Attribute Default Value
Required. Format should be:
Possible Values:
FunctionCode
FuncCode1, FuncCode2, FuncCode3, FuncCode4, FuncCode5, FuncCode6,
FuncCode8, FuncCode15, FuncCode16
NumberOfRegisters 1
PeriodMultiplier 5
StartAddress 1
1134 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
16 WorkstationST — Working Online
The WorkstationST runtime features include Monitoring, Data Collection, Alarm Collection, and Human Machine Interface
(HMI). The WorkstationST Service obtains status and live data, and performs the Download command with the ToolboxST
application.
The ToolboxST configuration is the maintenance software tool for WorkstationST platforms.
Status Colors
Color Condition
Green All features functioning normally — normal state
One or more of the following:
The following attributes are the maximum number that can display for a configured WorkstationST application (with all
features enabled).
1136 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Controller Equality — Major Difference
Any modification that causes a memory allocation change and requires the controller to fetch data from the Flash memory
into the RAM causes a Major Difference between the configuration in the ToolboxST application and the configuration
currently running in the controller. A Major Difference status requires a Build and Download to the controller. The controller
is restarted after the download is complete. The following modifications cause a Major Difference status in the controller:
• Compressing variables
• Changing frame rate
• Changing the background blockware period
• Adding the first I/O pack to a controller
• Changing redundancy type
• Changing the platform type, which changes the number of Ethernets
• Changing any NTP configuration on a controller
Note Certain conditions do not allow a download, for example, an incorrect platform type. Check the Component InfoView
for errors that would prohibit a download.
1138 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3. Click Finish.
4. In the Component InfoView, review the Log tab for potential warnings or errors that may have occurred during the
download.
1140 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
17 Finder
The Finder is a separate window in the Component Editor, which contains several useful tools. It can help you find items,
such as text, overrides, differences, and variable usage from the different types of components.
➢ To open the Finder: from the toolbar, click the Find icon . Or from the Edit menu, select Find.
Click to display
Enter search text available wildcards
Click Replace
to display a
field to enter
replacement
text
Select Entire
System to
search every
configured
component
Select Open
Components
to search all
components
open in the
System Editor
Select to search
inside the
currently selected
item (in this case,
the Modbus tab)
Select the
search method
from the drop-
down list
Find Methods
The following Find methods are available to control how the text entered in the Find box is matched to text in the ToolboxST
application:
• Anywhere
• Begins With
• Ends With
• Match Exactly
• Match Whole Word
• Wildcards
• Regular Expressions
Anywhere finds the specified text anywhere within a searchable text string.
Anywhere
Begins With finds the specified text only at the beginning of a searchable text string.
Begins With
Ends With finds the specified text only at the end of a searchable text string.
Ends With
A search for: matches: but does not match:
abcde
abc
abdc
abc
ab
xyzabc
bc
Match Exactly finds the specified text only when it is exactly equal to an entire searchable text string.
1142 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Match Exactly
Match Whole Word finds the named text only when it is exactly equal to an entire word of a searchable text string, meaning
it is surrounded on both sides by either punctuation or white space.
Wildcards is similar to Match Exactly, except any single letter can substitute for a ? character and any sequence of zero or
more letters can substitute for a * character.
Wildcards
A search for: matches: but does not match:
abdc
bc
abc
a?c abc cde
adc
abcde
xyzabc
abc
adc
abcde bc
a*
abdc cde abc
ab
abc cde
Regular Expressions processes the text entered in the Find box as a regular expression (sometimes abbreviated regex). A
regular expression is an advanced system of wildcards used to match a specific set of text. The ToolboxST configuration
supports a standard set of regular expression commands similar to many popular third-party tools.
1144 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
18 EGD Editor for External Devices
The EGD Component Editor for external devices allows you to configure Ethernet Global Data (EGD) for an external or
third-party device. The EGD protocol allows controller devices (sometimes known as nodes) to share information in a
networked environment. EGD allows one controller device, referred to as the producer of the data, to simultaneously send
information to any number of peer controller devices (consumers) at a fixed periodic rate. This network supports a large
number of controller devices capable of both producing and consuming.
Properties display in
the Property Editor
The following table describes the properties displayed in the Property Editor when a Network Adapter item is selected in the
Tree View.
Network Adapter Properties
Property Description
Adapter Settings
Enabled If set to False, disables the selected network adapter. Set to True to enable the network adapter.
Host Name Internet Protocol (IP) host name for the selected network adapter
IP Address IP address for the selected network adapter
Wire Speed Speed of the connected network
Network Settings
Network Name of the connected network
Subnet Mask Subnet mask associated with the connected network
1146 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
18.2 EGD Configuration
➢ To configure EGD for an external device
1. From the System Editor, right-click an external device and select Edit EGD. (If Edit EGD is not available, the EGD
Editor Enable property of the component may be set to False.
2. From the EGD Component Editor, select the EGD tab.
3. In the Tree View, select Ethernet Global Data. The Ethernet Global Data properties display in the Property
Editor.
This property is available for configuration when Ethernet Global Data is selected in the Tree View:
Producer ID sets and displays the Unique address of the EGD producing device for this component. This property is
assigned when the component is created. The EGD Producer ID displays in the Property Editor as an unsigned integer. Click
the ellipsis button to display the EGD Producer ID window that includes dotted and hexadecimal representations.
➢ To delete a Produced Page from the Tree View, right-click the page to delete and select Delete.
➢ To configure a Produced Page: from the Tree View, select the EGD tab and expand the Produced Pages.
1148 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Produced Page Properties
Property Description
Destination IP Sets the IP address to which the exchanges on this page are unicast or multicast.
Address (If the Mode property is set to Broadcast, this property is not available.)
If set to True, broadcasts EGD on Ethernet 0
Ethernet 0 (If more than one Ethernet Adapter has been configured for EGD, additional Ethernet properties
display.)
Can be set to Broadcast, Unicast, or Multicast, depending on the modes supported by the component’s
EGD implementation profile:
Broadcast sends the page to all EGD nodes
Mode Unicast sends the page to a single destination
Multicast sends the page to the specified multicast address
This multicast address cannot conflict with multicast addresses on IONet. An error message is
generated if a conflict exists.
Indicates the number of exchanges in the selected page. It is updated after selecting the Build
Exchanges
command
Determines whether the exchange numbers and offsets are assigned automatically at build time or are
Layout Mode
entered manually
Name Allows you to rename the selected page
Period Transmission period of the page in ms
Used to prevent exchanges with the same period from being produced at exactly the same instant. The
skew for the first exchange in the page is set to this value, and each additional exchange skew differs
from the previous exchange’s skew by exactly this value (in nanoseconds). For example, if you have
Skew
three exchanges in a page and a skew value of 2, the first exchange’s skew is two, the second
exchange’s skew is four and the third exchange’s skew is six.
The Skew property will not be visible if it is not supported in the implementation profile configuration.
Starting Exchange ID Sets the Exchange ID used for this page. Each additional exchange is incremental from the number
➢ To compress a single page: from the Tree View, right-click the page to compress and select Compress.
➢ To compress all Produced Pages in a component: from the Tree View, right-click Produced Pages and
select Compress All.
➢ To add a variable to a produced page: from the Tree View, right-click a Produced Page and select Add
Variable to display the Select a Variable window.
➢ To delete a variable from an EGD Page: from the Summary View, right-click the variable to delete and select
Delete Selected Row(s).
➢ To copy variable information from an EGD page to the clipboard: from the Summary View, right-click a
variable and select Copy Selection. The data is copied in .csv format.
Note To edit exchange signatures and configuration time, set the Layout Mode property to Manual. The Layout Mode
property displays when a Produced Page is selected in the Tree View.
The exchange signature is typically managed automatically. The major signature must be incremented when the exchange
content changes in any way other than additions to the end. If you are using the EGD Device Editor to configure EGD for a
device and the device signature changes only when the manufacturer updates the configuration, you may need to manually set
the signature.
3. Review the warning about manual Exchange Signature editing and click OK.
4. Make desired changes and click OK.
1150 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
18.6 Referenced Devices
The EGD variables defined in other components can be added to the current component’s variable list by adding a reference.
References can only be created to EGD-capable devices that are consumers of Produced Pages, and as such only
EGD-capable devices are available for referencing.
➢ To select referenced devices: from the Tree View, right-click Referenced Devices and select Select Devices.
The EGD configuration for the selected devices is loaded and the variables display in the Summary View.
When EGD configurations are edited in remote devices, you must refresh the configuration periodically to ensure that the
latest variable information is used. This is automatically done during a Bind and Build operation as well as when a
configuration is saved.
➢ To refresh the configuration of a referenced device: in the Tree View, right-click the device to be refreshed and
select Refresh.
Once connected, the Produced Pages or Referenced Devices option displays the values. Use the Refresh button in the
column header to update the grid.
1152 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
18.9 EGD Diagnostics
A CMP can be used to obtain the status of a Class 2 or higher EGD device. When any item from the EGD tab Tree View other
than a Referenced Device is selected, the EGD Statistics from [Device name] tab displays the statistics from the open
component. When Referenced Devices is selected, statistics are obtained from that referenced device, and the name of the tab
page changes accordingly.
Filter Toggle defaults to a filtered state. It displays items that have the same name but have a different Producer ID as
the open component.
Delete deletes the selected item(s). If the item(s) were saved as part of the configuration, they can be added again.
The EGD configuration server uses the producer ID to store all the documents for an EGD node.
If you open two systems, then point to the same configuration server and save a device of the same name with two different
producer IDs to that server, you can end up with two producer ID nodes with the same device name.
1154 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
18.11 External Device Menus
Menu Command Use
Update the EGD configuration files, refreshes consumed exchanges and variables,
Save assigns produced variables to exchanges, and, if an EGD configuration server has been
specified, publishes the configuration to the server
Transfer produced data, consumed data, symbols, implementation profiles, and GUI
device EGD configuration files to and from a variety of file formats
File Import and Export
The GE Rationalization report is the only report that can be imported to an external device.
Print the summary grid view with the column selection, order, and width currently visible in
Print
the view
Close Close the currently opened device
Paste Paste the copied item in the Tree View into the Summary View
Go Back Return to the view that immediately preceded the current view in the history
View
Go Forward Go to the view that immediately follows the current view in the history
Send CMP messages to EGD Class 2 or higher devices to view live values from the
Online
device
Refresh the consumed information for all referenced devices, automatically sets the layout
Device Bind and Build of any unassigned produced variables, and, if no errors occur, publishes the configuration
to the EGD configuration server
Store the current EGD configuration to the System Database (SDB). Only available if the
Put Device to SDB
system has an SDB enabled and configured.
Send Problem
Display the Send Problem Report form to report system issues
Report
Help Release Notes Display the release notes for the current version of the application
How-to Guides Display ControlST Software Suite How-to Guides (GEH-6808) (if available)
1156 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
19 Configuration Management System
(CMS)
19.1 Overview
The ControlST Software Suite includes a Configuration Management System (CMS) that provides revision control and
maintain history for CMS-controlled ToolboxST systems.
The CMS consists of the following components, which are described in this chapter:
Note Perform a Get System from Repository on any computer that has network connectivity to the computer on which
the Repository resides.
• Establishes a security model for the CMS Server. CMS security uses Windows (Domain and/or Workgroup) security for
user authentication (CMS users must exist as valid domain or workgroup users)
• Creates and deletes master locations known as CMS Repositories in which configuration files and revision history are
stored and maintained
• Adds and deletes CMS usernames and privileges to control access to the systems in the repositories
• Provides a mechanism to back up and restore repositories. Backups include revision history for a ToolboxST system in a
Repository. User information can be included or excluded from the backup copy.
• Starts and stops the CMS Server application
If you have upgraded from a previous version of the CMS Server, refer to the section
Upgrade from CMS to CMS – SVN.
Attention
The CMS Server is installed on a single computer and configured for the user’s specific location. Local Administrator
privileges are required to install and configure the CMS Server.
The CMS Server uses a Repository to track system changes and control client access. Each Repository contains a list of CMS
users and access permissions. The Repository maintains the revision change history for the ToolboxST systems that are added
to that Repository. A CMS Server can have one or more repositories, and each Repository can contain one or more
ToolboxST systems.
Note The user must be logged on as an Administrator to install and configure the CMS Server.
Typically, the CMS Server is only installed on one computer per site. When the CMS
Server installation option is selected, a Setup dialog box displays to confirm that the
CMS Server is only being installed on a single computer.
Attention
Note The ControlST software release and version numbers displayed in the Setup dialog box may differ from those
displayed during an actual installation.
1. Place the ControlST Software Suite DVD in the DVD-ROM drive and the installation automatically begins.
2. Review the Setup Notes and click Continue.
3. Install the CMS-SVN Server as follows:
a. Select the check box for CMS-SVN Server.
b. Click Yes to proceed with installation.
c. Click Install.
1158 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
CMS-SVN Server Installation Option
10. If you do not have a certificate from a CA, create a self-signed certificate.
1160 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Enter your client information,
then click Create .
Note The CMS Administrator Tool is automatically installed during CMS Server installation and a shortcut icon is placed on
the computer desktop. This tool is used to configure the CMS Server, including adding users and setting access permissions.
11. Click Finish to complete CMS Server installation, then click Yes to exit setup, or No to install additional ControlST
software installation options.
1162 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Users are automatically added as a CMS Administrator with Read and Write access to the Repository. The username and
password default to the user’s current Windows username and password.
3. Add additional users to the Repository and set user access privileges.
Note The Repository username is used by the user to log in to the CMS. The username and password default to your current
Windows username and password.
4. Copy the Repository URL address. (This address is manually entered during initial CMS Client configuration).
Click OK.
Attention
Backup Create a backup copy of the repository for Repository restore
Restore Restore a Repository from a backup copy
Add users and set user permissions
Add
Users with empty passwords cannot access the Repository.
Users
Delete Remove a user from the system
Edit Edit permissions for a user
Start and stop the server
Server
Stopping the server disables all repository operations.
Create Self-signed
Tools Create a server certificate for each client to accept
Certificate
Copy repository URL to the clipboard for use during configuration to connect clients
Copy Repository URL
to the Repository
File Exit Close the CMS Administrator Tool
1164 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
19.2.2.1 Create New Repository
A Repository is created using the CMS Administrator Tool.
Note The CMS Administrator Tool can only be accessed from the computer on which the server has been installed and
designated as the CMS Server. Administrator permissions are required on your computer to use the CMS Administrator Tool.
➢ To create a Repository
1. From the Start menu, select All Programs, GE ControlST, CMS Server, and CMS Administrator Tool.
2. Enter a Repository Name and click OK.
The CMS Administrator Tool displays a message notifying the user that the Repository was created successfully.
3. From the Repository drop-down menu, select the Repository to backup. Click Browse and navigate to and select the
location for the backup file, then click OK.
1166 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4. When the Repository backup has completed successfully, a dialog box displays the location where the backup copy was
saved. Click OK to complete the process.
Note A backup copy of the Repository must have been previously created for use to restore the Repository.
4. When the Repository restore has completed successfully, a dialog box displays the location of the backup file used to
restore the Repository. Click OK.
1168 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To open the restored Repository
1. From the CMS Administrator Tool Repository menu, select Select....
2. From the drop-down menu, select the Repository and click Open.
The restored Repository displays users and permissions in the CMS Administrator window.
Note CMS menu items are disabled until a ToolboxST system is opened.
The CMS Client (in the ToolboxST application) is used to place ToolboxST systems under CMS control, get systems from the
Repository to the local drive, check out individual components in a master configuration, make edits, and check in
components.
The CMS Client provides the following functions:
Note Use the CMS Administrator Tool to assign or remove CMS users to and from the Repository.
The Working Copy is the CMS user’s local copy saved on a particular computer that contains the system .tcw file and all
related files and folders for the system within the CMS Server. A Working Copy is specific to a particular CMS user. Different
users cannot share a Working Copy.
When a user adds a system to the Repository, the current location of the ToolboxST
system .tcw file becomes the local Working Copy on that computer. Place the .tcw file
and configuration files in the desired Working Copy location before adding the
ToolboxST system to the CMS Server.
Attention
To prevent errors during check out and check in, network-shared folders should not
be used as a local Working Copy. Users should maintain the Working Copy on their
hard drive.
Attention
1170 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
19.3.2 Initial CMS Client Configuration
The following diagram provides an overview of the procedures described in this section.
Get System
Add System from Repository
to Repository CMS Server
Get System
From Repository
Computer 1
Computer 3
Computer 2
Attention
1. Open the ToolboxST application system .tcw file.
2. Log in to the CMS Client.
HMI\GeMaint
1172 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3. If the CMS Server was configured with a self-signed certificate, users are prompted to save and accept the certificate.
Note If the user has already saved the certificate this dialog box will not display.
1174 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To get a Working Copy from the CMS Server on other computers
This operation only needs to be performed one time for each computer to get a local
Working Copy of the system on each computer.
Perform a Get System from Repository on any computer that has network connectivity
Attention to the computer on which the Repository resides.
1. From the ToolboxST application, get the system from the CMS Server.
HMI\GeMaint
Note If the user has already saved the certificate this dialog box will not display.
3. Save the Working Copy of the system to a designated location on the computer.
From the drop-down menu, select the system. Enter the folder path or
click Browse and select a location to save the system folder, then click OK.
Note Even if the folder path requires a new folder, the system will automatically create the new folder.
1176 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To open a system from the CMS Client
1. From the ToolboxST application, open a system.
Note You must connect to the correct CMS Server to log on.
HMI\GeMaint
1178 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
19.3.3 CMS Features and Status Icons
The CMS menu lists the CMS features. The following sections describe these features in detail.
1180 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
19.3.3.1 Login and Open a Working Copy
Selecting Login logs the user on to connect to the CMS Server.
Browse to the local Working Copy and select the .tcw file (system opens in Read-only mode).
Note You must connect to the correct CMS Server to log on.
HMI\GeMaint
Browse to the local Working Copy and select the .tcw file (system opens in Read-only mode).
2. From the CMS Login window, click Cancel.
3. Work disconnected from the CMS Server to make all files writable.
1182 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To update the CMS Server with changes made while working offline
1. Log in and connect to the CMS Server. An exclamation mark icon indicates the local copy has been modified and is
different from the server copy.
Note It may be useful to perform a Compare... to verify your changes before checking in the component.
19.3.3.4 Refresh
Selecting Refresh updates the CMS status icons for the system and components.
Note CMS status does not update automatically. The user should periodically perform a Refresh to update the CMS status of
all components in the system.
Note You must be connected to the CMS Server for the Refresh feature to work properly.
HMI\GeMaint
1184 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
3. Add the system to your Repository.
The system name displays with a blue lock icon and the system is in Read-Only mode.
Note Components under CMS control will be in Read-Only mode until the component is checked out.
1186 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
19.3.3.10 Check Out
Selecting Check Out checks out a component from the Repository for the user to make changes, and prevents other users from
checking out the component.
Tip � To check out multiple components at one time, press and hold [Shift] on the keyboard and select the components.
Use the View by Type option in the View menu at the system level to quickly select all Libraries and devices before performing
check in, check out and undo check out.
19.3.3.11 Check In
Selecting Check In checks in the user’s changes to the Repository, and allows other users to get the changes and check out the
system or component.
Tip � To check in multiple components at one time, press and hold [Shift] on the keyboard and select the components.
Use the View by Type option in the View menu at the system level to quickly select all Libraries and devices before performing
check in, check out and undo check out.
Tip � To undo check out of multiple components at one time, press and hold [Shift] on the keyboard and select the
components.
Use the View by Type option in the View menu at the system level to quickly select all Libraries and devices before performing
check in, check out and undo check out.
1188 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
View History Results
From the View History window, select a Version and click Get.
The component displays the out of date icon with the revision number.
1190 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
4. Make any changes needed, then check in the component.
Note Users can compare the current Working Copy to any previous version displayed in the history, including the latest
version in the Repository. Additionally, users can select and compare two versions displayed in the history.
Attention
Comparison Results
1192 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Note If there are no differences identified between the current Working Copy and the most recent copy in the Repository, the
system will display a dialog box to notify the user that there are no differences.
To select two versions, press and hold [Ctrl] on the keyboard and select the
appropriate versions , then click Compare to display comparison results.
1194 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
19.3.4 CMS Library Features
Beginning with ControlST V06.02, users can check out and work with the Libraries within a Library Container in a CMS
Repository. This allows multiple users to work on individual Libraries in the Library Container at the same time. The
following table describes features users can perform while working with Libraries in the CMS.
Note To delete Library Containers or individual Libraries, right-click the item and select Delete.
To rename a Library Container, right-click the item, select Rename, and enter the new name.
To rename individual Libraries, enter the new name in the Property Editor.
Note CMS status does not update automatically. The user should periodically perform a Refresh to update the CMS status of
all components in the system.
Note You must be connected to the CMS Server for the Refresh feature to work.
1196 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
19.3.4.2 Check Out
➢ To check out a Library Container
1. From the Library Container Component Editor, make sure the Library Container you want to check out is checked in
(indicated with a blue padlock icon).
2. Check out the Library Container from the CMS Repository.
3. A dialog box displays and ask if you want to check out all elements.
1198 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Right-click the Library, select CMS,
then select Check Out.
Tip � If the CMS status icons do not update immediately, click Refresh to update the CMS status icons and view checked out
libraries. You must be connected to the CMS Server for the Refresh feature to work.
1200 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
19.3.4.3 Check In
➢ To check in a library to the CMS Repository
1. From the Library Container Component Editor, select a library that is checked out (indicated by a green check mark
icon).
2. Check in the library to the CMS Repository.
A blue padlock icon for the library indicates it has been checked back in to the CMS Repository.
Tip � Use the View by Type option in the View menu at the system level to quickly select all Libraries and devices before
performing check in, check out, and undo check out.
4. Enter a brief description of the changes you made in the Comments field, then click OK.
A blue padlock icon next to the libraries indicate they have been checked back in to the CMS Repository.
➢ To undo checkout: right-click the item and select CMS, select Undo checkout, then click Yes.
The changes you made while the item was checked out will not be saved.
Tip � Use the View by Type option in the View menu at the system level to quickly select all Libraries and devices before
performing check in, check out, and undo check out.
1202 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
19.3.4.6 View History
➢ To view the history
History View
Note If there are no differences identified between the current Working Copy and the most recent copy in the Repository, the
system will display a dialog box to notify the user that there are no differences.
1204 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
19.3.4.7 Compare
Attention
➢ To compare Library versions
OR
1206 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
➢ To compare two versions of a Working Copy
To select two versions, press and hold [Ctrl] on the keyboard and select the
appropriate versions , then click Compare to display comparison results.
➢ To configure the new Repository: add the system to the CMS Server.
1208 GEH-6703P GEH-6703 ToolboxST User Guide for Mark Controls Platform
Public Information
Glossary of Terms
application code Software that controls specific machines or processes
attributes Information, such as location, visibility, and type of data that sets something apart from others. In signals, an
attribute can be a field within a record
Auto-Reconfiguration A feature that allows an I/O pack to be replaced and its configuration files downloaded when the
I/O pack is replaced
baud A unit of data transmission. Baud rate is the number of bits per second transmitted
bit Binary Digit. The smallest unit of memory used to store only one piece of information with two states, such as
One/Zero or On/Off. Data requiring more than two states, such as numerical values 000 to 999, requires multiple bits (see
Word).
block Instruction blocks contain basic control functions, which are connected together during configuration to form the
required machine or process control. Blocks can perform math computations, sequencing, or continuous control. The
ToolboxST application receives a description of the blocks from the block libraries.
Boolean Digital statement that expresses a condition that is either True or False. In the ToolboxST application, it is a data
type for logical signals.
collection A group of signals found on the same network. Trender can be configured by adding collections.
Configure To select settings for such things as the location of hardware jumpers or loading software parameters into
memory.
Control Constant Control Constant is a signal with an initial value that is read and never written.
Designated controller In a Mark VIe dual controller system, the designated controller is the controller to which the I/O
packs listen for outputs when they have the option to listen to multiple controllers. In a TMR system, the designated controller
initializes the other controllers.
Ethernet LAN with a 10/100 MB baud collision avoidance/collision detection system used to link one or more computers
together. Basis for TCP/IP and I/O services layers that conform to the IEEE 802.3 standard, developed by Xerox, Digital, and
Intel.
fault code A message from the controller to the HMI indicating a controller warning or failure.
Fieldbus is a digital, two-way, multi-drop communication link among intelligent measurement and control devices. It
serves as a local area network (LAN) for advanced process control, remote input/output, and high-speed factory automation
applications.
Finder A subsystem of the ToolboxST application for searching and determining the usage of a particular item in a
configuration.
firmware The set of executable software stored in memory chips that hold their content without electrical power, such as
flash memory.
font One complete collection of letters, punctuation marks, numbers, and special characters with a consistent and
identifiable typeface, weight, posture, and size.
forcing Setting a variable signal to a particular value, regardless of the value that blockware or I/O is writing to that signal.
gateway A device that connects two dissimilar LANs or connects a LAN to a wide-area network (WAN), computer, or
mainframe. A gateway can perform protocol and bandwidth conversion.
Gateway A computer that translates another fieldbus-related protocol to FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol, for example,
HART® or Modbus® to FOUNDATION fieldbus protocol.
heartbeat A signal emitted at regular intervals by software to demonstrate that it is still active.
hexadecimal (hex) Base 16 numbering system using the digits 0-9 and letters A-F to represent the decimal numbers
0-15. Two hex digits represent 1 byte.
I/O Input/output interfaces that allow the flow of data into and out of a device.
initialize To set values (addresses, counters, registers, and such) to a beginning value prior to the rest of processing.
linking device Provides a standardized communications and control system for installing components from various
manufacturers.
node In a local network, a component connected to other components that communicates with other network devices. In a
tree structure, a location on the tree that can have links to one or more nodes below it.
non-volatile The memory specially designed to store information even when the power is off.
online Online mode provides full CPU communications, allowing data to be both read and written. It is the state of the
ToolboxST application when it is communicating with the system for which it holds the configuration. Also, a download
mode where the device is not stopped and then restarted.
physical Refers to devices at the electronic or machine level in contrast with logical. Logical implies a higher view than
the physical. Users relate to data logically by data element name; however, the actual fields of data are physically located in
sectors on a disk.
register page A form of shared memory that is updated over a network. Register pages can be created and instanced in
the controller and posted to the SDB.
relay ladder diagram (RLD) A ladder diagram has a symbolic power source. Power is considered to flow from the left
rail through a contact to the coil connected to the right.
resources Also known as groups. Resources are systems (devices, machines, or work stations where work is performed)
or areas where several tasks are carried out. Resource configuration plays an important role in the CIMPLICITY system by
routing alarms to specific users and filtering the data users receive.
rubber block A block that can extend to include a variable number of pins.
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) A graphical programming model that allows you to organize an application by
creating a state machine with three types of components: steps, actions, and transitions.
Trender A subsystem of the ToolboxST application that monitors and graphs signal values from a controller.
validate Makes certain that items or devices do not contain errors and verifies that the configuration is ready to be built
into application code.
variable The basic unit for variable information. Variables are the placeholders for memory locations in the toolbox’s
different platforms.
word A unit of information composed of characters, bits, or bytes. It is treated as an entity, and can be stored in one
location. Also, a measurement of memory length, usually 32 bits in length, but can also be 4, 8, or 16 bits long.
WorkstationST A ControlST application that provides a user interface for configuring various features such as alarm
management, control system health, Historians, and data interfaces.
Index Calibratation
valve circuits 691
Capture Buffer 1078
Change Log 88
A client
OPC DA 1042
Access privileges 156 OPC UA 1059
access roles 162 Test OPC DA 1054
add Test OPC UA 1064
HMI screen files 128 CMS 1157
modules 309 Administrator Tool 1165
add a task 781 Client 1170
Add Special Task 784 features 1179
alarm server configuration 1164
printing 1031 server installation 1158
server status 993 Working Copy 1170
status viewer file menu 996 coding practices report 865
tab 1017 Coding Practices report 450
Viewer 1034 Collection Type
Alarm Add Collection 1075
block templates 104 Capture Buffer 1078
definitions 108 Delete Collection 1076
inhibit group 110 EPA Log 1079
report 422, 840, 1093 Live Data 1077
shelving 74 Maintenance Log 1079
shelving privilege 143 Trip Log 1078
symbols 113 Collections 1075
Alarm Help 36 command
Alarm Rationalization 491, 1117 download 528, 917
Alarm Scanner 1022 event history 555
Alarm Shelving 74 command line
Alarms arguments 20
classes 106 CommandLineST 1124
Alias 341 command file examples 1130
Alias mode 98, 172, 341 commands 1126
Aliases 172 options 1125
application syntax 1124
documentation 196 commands 1126
System Design Procedures 197 compare
arguments 1128 devices 288, 752
Assign a Generic Fieldbus Function Block to a parameters 321, 778
Fieldbus Device Placeholder 643 to controller 287, 751
attach variable 508, 895 Component InfoView 269, 738, 977
attribute value editor 758 components
attributes 758 group 40
Auto-Reconfiguration 301 instance 65
move and copy 40
options 743
B upgrade 60
Backup and Restore Computer recommedations 18
UCSB 554, 933 condition-based unshelving 75
backward compatibility 96 configuration server reports
Bar Code 310 referenced devices 369, 802, 1151
batch commands 48 configure
block Dynamic Data Recorder (DDR) tab 352
Diagram Editor 223 external devices 83
find unlinked 81 HART devices 694
rename sheets 225 NTP 1006
shape shortcut menu 240 OPC AE Server 1071
Block Pin report 415, 832 PCNO module 719
border options 227 PIOA for ARCNET support 727
W
Watch Window
add variable wizard 496, 883, 1121
export 499, 886, 1124
open existing 495, 882, 1120
organize columns 498, 885, 1123
Web report 403, 820
wizard
add module 762
controller setup 917
create system 69
creation 735
replication 66
upload 931
Wizard
creation 265, 973
download 1138
upgrade 749
upload 552
Working Copy 1170
Working Online With a WorkstationST
Component 1135
Workstation ST
Alarm Server 42
WorkstationST
Alarm Server 1001, 1017, 1136
Alarm Viewer 1034
connect to 1135
menus 999
Status Monitor 989
Z
zoom and pan tools 239